Home

Avaya DECT R4 - Avaya Support

1. Finalizing the plan s se aa ra AAA Installing and operating IPBS Introduction cc c ca ba 2 aK Re ee ee KK Re Se we ew DESCEND UOR Gt br Gade eee as ee ee ee oe oe Ee eB IP DECT Base Stati0N 2 o o o o o BC aGapter AA OR OA Re a ee a sd a se he Oe a ee ee a ee ke RO Symbols po ha ES Se READER ESOS DERE YS BORO Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge ESD Safety ASPE y e AAA ES ED OR Ew Regulatory Compliance Statements EU EFTA only Regulatory Compliance Statements USA and Canada only PSU ica ARA AAA AE RIOR AA AAA AAA IP Security Terminology lt aso aw cee A AAA a Introduction to IP Security in IP DECT lt lt eae IP DECT Administrative functions ee Installation of the Base Station DASS Station Cabling lt lt ca de A AA A Install the Base Station 4 Power the Base Station 2 COMINO 20 ee OB AA A a a A Requirements ee Access the GU se i ee cercar OO a a ee GUI WOD ACCESS 2 ee kerk ODES Owe EG Oa ee Configure Wie Master lt lt hi oe ot awe OSE Owe Lew Oe Configure the Standby Master 2 05 ee Configure the Slave Radio 4 Multi Base
2. 293 Technical Sotlons lt ssa ciara ias 293 Reguirements oces 64 cnica ee ae ee 293 Installation and Configuration o 294 Required Information o 294 Hardware Installation and Configuration lt 294 Software Installation 56 e ecce reata ea a e a A 294 GONRQUESION ods isitme terende ma AD AAA AAA 295 MONON e a ee ee ee ae a a a a a aa a a 295 Update of ANNS nce doa a ense a ee ee a 295 Multiple AIWS configuration eee 296 AIWS configuration for Multi Base Station Masters 302 AdministatioN 2002000 a a ee Se RA A 304 Data Backup is fa 3 Sh a6 Re oe ar a a AA RRA 304 PONS General 500 as es E A AN A A a a 305 Authentication Levels and Default Passwords 305 Functionality MAT kn ck kc DR ee Re 306 Set passwords a Ge HEH Oe PPS Oe Se a A 306 Password POU ita ec ah eS eS CASED mL ew eee 306 Web access security settings 2 2 307 Configuration Page daa RARA ORD OEM Oe RH A 308 ICONS ai ica ae ew we ROA A ee ae RO RS ee Hw 309 e botkier Sah Scie as en A a Be ne 309 AIWS Setup Wizard and Configuration 312 Basic Configuration Steps ee eee ee eee 312 Optional AN hah ewe SEO Se eS ee RS 313 Operation Messaging 2 eee eee 4 314 Messaging Tool eke ke aro AAA 314 PIPA o RO A RARA A SH OH EN
3. 011 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 65 Installing and operating IPBS Fix the Mounting Bracket to a Ceiling Fixing to a ceiling is done in the same way as the a wall see Fix the Mounting Bracket to a Wall When the base station has to be positioned above a suspended ceiling make sure that the front of the base station points downwards Fix the Mounting Bracket to a Pole or Beam The mounting bracket can be fixed to a pole diameter gt 45 mm or a beam wider than 50 mm by means of a strap or flexible metal band less than 30 mm wide The strap or flexible metal band is not included in the box 1 Fix the mounting bracket to a pole or beam using the metal band see figure 14 Figure 14 Fixing the mounting bracket to a pole or beam Tied wrongly 66 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation of the Base Station Use the Cable Ducts When the base station is mounted to the wall cable ducts can be used to route the wiring through 1 Fix the cable duct to the wall in one of the positions shown in figure 15 on page 67 Figure 15 Minimum distances between a cable duct and the mounting bracket 15 mm thick cable ducts Secure the Cable 1 For safety reasons secure the base station cable to a conv
4. e EU 1880 1900 MHz e US 1920 1930 MHz e LA 1910 1930 MHz e BR 1910 1920 MHz Modulation GFSK Channel spacing 1 728 MHz Antenna Integral Sensitivity 93 dBm Radiated power EU 250 mW US 100 mW Environmental Operating temperature 0 C to 40 C Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C Enclosure protection IP44 IEC EN60529 Immunity to electromagnetic fields 3V m EN61000 4 3 Immunity to ESD 4 kV contact discharge and 8 kV air discharge EN61000 4 2 Free fall test standard product IEC 60068 2 32 procedure 1 dropped 12 times from 1 metre Ascom approves 12 drops from 1 5 metre Option Bluetooth radio Radio spectrum add on from factory ISM 2 4000 2 4835 MHz 466 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya 3725 DECT Telephone Accessories Leather case Swivel type clip Security chain Basic charger Advanced Charger Multiple Battery Charger Rackmount Charger Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS e Portable Device Manager PDM e verified Bluetooth Headset Jabra BT8010 Motorola H350 Motorola H670 Nokia BH 201 Nokia BH 804 Nokia BH 904 Peltor M2RX7 WS4 Plantronics Voyager510 Plantronics Voyager520 Plantronics Voyager835 Plantronics Explorer390 Plantronics Explorer665 Samsung WEP410 SonyEricsson HBH PV702 SonyEricsson HBH GV435 SonyEricsson HBH PV740 SonyEricsson HBH IV835
5. Perform a Factory reset When you perform a Factory reset on a telephone all configuration settings will be restored to default values PBX subscriptions will be removed and all data are removed This includes contacts messages etc The software will be left intact Factory reset is activated from the Admin menu See Administration on page 170 to see how to activate the Admin menu and Admin Menu Tree on page 170 to see where in the menu to find Factory reset It can also be activated from PDM After a Factory Reset you should follow the steps under Installation of a new Telephone on page 147 Replacement procedure choice guide Depending on situation two different replacement procedures can be chosen replacement via PDM AIWS and Easy Replacement Use the following list as a guide to choose which procedure to use e Ifa telephone needs to be replaced due to for example a broken display see Easy Replacement on page 153 152 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Maintenance e If the electrical connection is damaged it might not be possible to follow the Easy Replacement procedure Depending on fault it might work to do a replacement via PDM AIWS see Replacement of a telephone with the AIWS on page 155 or Replacement of the telephone with the PDM on page 157 e f two telephones and their settings shall be switched between two users follow Replacement of a telephone with the AIWS on
6. 294 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Configuration AIWS Setup When accessing AIWS the first time follow the instructions in Getting Started on page 412 Note The IP address must not change during operation because renew of IP address via DHCP is not handled Other equipment connected to this product also expects a fixed IP address in some cases If the IP plan is changed this product must be restarted to update the IP address Otherwise there is a risk for IP address collision For information about Power Down and Restart see Power Down and Restart of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 425 Software Configuration 1 Log in to AIWS http xxx xxx xxx xxx and click on Device Manager 2 Upload definition files The definition files are usually included in a package file See Import new Packages on page 343 for more information A package file contains a definition file def It may also contain software for the devices bin and a template tpl You may have to contact your supplier for the latest updates If the definition file shall be imported as a separate file see Import Parameter Definition Files on page 343for more information You may have to contact your supplier for the latest updates How to work with Numbers is described in chapter Numbers on page 333 Mounting For mounting see Installation on page 430
7. 166 R Reboot a sea a a ho Bo da hed 383 Remote Management 384 replace aii a a a ad oo Powe 266 replace a device 2 4 340 reset ia a Pele Qe ee ee 237 508 Restart lbar isos pi SOR ane des t 295 Run template 0 0 0 000 261 335 S security alert ooo a 244 SendTestMessage 517 Set times Ye ae en Sele BER a 381 Shortcuts ota RAG Ao A ee 169 site database 241 256 265 279 Site Survaytoolmenu 172 software 250 251 274 325 327 349 510 Software Version 000 308 System Information 0 516 T Ta a tte oN OE a E 325 Telephone charging 2 2 2 eae 236 Telephone disconnection 4 236 Templatess iret 2 Det Beko bd ek a 328 Time Settings 2 2 ee ee 380 TOOLS 25 65h GoGo oe eS Bek a ae 2 oe 212 225 Troubleshooting 2 ee ee 219 526 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010
8. Replace the Compact Flash Put the circuit board back into the cabinet oa eg If the Compact Flash is not preprogrammed with a valid IP address follow the instructions in Setup of Network Parameters on page 444 else connect the power cable 7 Replace the cover Updating Application Software The application software on the Compact Flash can be updated for example if new functionality for the application has been released The version of the application software has to be compatible with the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware operating system version See Replacing an Image on the Compact Flash below for information about how to upgrade the operating system The AIWS device manager needs to be closed before the software update can be started Otherwise the software upgrade will not start until the AIWS device manager will be closed There is no additional indication or warning text that the AIWS Device manager is still open Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 449 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware A Important When updating the application software the customized configuration of the NetPage will be overridden and needs to be restored afterwards Therefore it s recommended to take a backup of all NetPage files as well Refer to Backup and Restore of NetPage files on page 408 Open the page xxx xxx xxx xxx system 2 Press Software The current software versions for the application and
9. 1 Open the AIWS Configuration pages and select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration Under DECT Interface select Message Distribution 2 Click on Alarm see figure 158 on page 410 Figure 158 Setting up the Message Distribution list for the DECT Interface to send information to the OAP Server DECT Message Distribution ER Aam Mobile Data Location Availability Info 3 Enter the address 127 0 0 1 OAP in one of the address fields Click on the Activate button 410 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting See Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS on page 511 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 411 Installing and operating AIWS Getting Started This appendix contains a copy of the printed leaflet included in delivery 412 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Getting Started Figure 159 Getting Started leaflet page 1 of 2 Getting Started These instructions will help you getting started and to access this product Once logged in a setup wizard will help you with the basic configuration Supply voltage 12 24 V DC 10 Current consumption max 0 4 A at 12 V max 0 2 A at 24 V Note Refer to reverse side for figures and information about connections cables switches etc Accessing the Product The web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or later is used for accessing the product s user inter
10. 2 Note that storing Li lon batteries at high temperature dramatically reduces its capacity For example storage around maximum temperature reduces capacity with 20 in less than a month permanently Compliance to European regulations and standards EU directives 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Product marking For models production date until March 2010 ce QD ID B014317 For models since production date April 2010 ce QD ID BO16451 Radio EN 301 406 TBR22 Bluetooth EN 300 328 2 EN 301489 17 SAR Specific Absorption Rate EN50360 and EN62209 1 0 074 W kg 10 gram Safety EN60950 1 EMC EN301489 6 EN 301 489 1 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 467 Technical Data Compliance to US regulations and s tandards Product marking FCC ID BKZDH4 For models production date until March 2010 QD ID BO14317 For models since production date April 2010 QD ID BO16451 US 9FVW4NANDH4 HAC SAR Specific Absorption Rate FCC OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C and IEEE Std 1528 ANSI IEEE Std C95 1 Normal operation 0 104 W kg 1 gram Body worn operation 0 029 W kg 1 gram Safety UL 60950 1 EMC Radio FCC Part 15 D and FCC Part 15 C Bluetooth Hearing Aid 47 CFR Part 68 Subpart D and TIA 968 A Compliance to Canadian regulations and standards Product marking 1C 3724B DH4 For models prod
11. 3 Under Common click Network The Network page appears Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 381 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 144 The Network page DHCP IP add Default gateway Net mask Host name Doma DNS Server WINS The fo param For ad Setting Li Network Enabled v rrevtous Factory 10 30 4 24 10 30 0 1 255 255 248 0 Elise in name ascom rd com 10 30 0 101 Banana Sa 110 30 0 101 activate llowing parameters can be set via the Advanced Configuration page Some of these eters can also be set in the Setup wizard DHCP IP address Default gateway Net mask Host name Domain name DNS Server WINS Server ditional information see also Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 421 cence Number It is possible to enter the licence number via the Advanced Configuration page and the Setup Wizard To set via the Advanced Configuration page 1 2 Click Configuration on the start page The Configuration page appears Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu in the AIWS Configuration page The Advanced Configuration page apperars Under Common click Licence The Licence page appears Enter Licence number Click Activate 382 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration Reboot It is possible to reboot the AIWS via the Advanced C
12. RFP Scan This section only applies to the IPBS To scan for occupied system IDs of other Avaya IP DECT systems within the coverage area perform an RFP scan following the steps below Note Executing an RFP scan will terminate all calls on the IPBS 1 Select Diagostics gt RFP Scan 2 Click Start Scanning Service Report To download a service report do the following 134 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation 1 Select Diagnostics gt Service Report 2 Click download 3 Click Save and browse where to save the service report Reset Some configuration changes requires a reset in order to take effect A reset reboots the software There are two ways to perform a reset e idle reset waits until there are no active calls in the IPBS e Immediate reset clears all calls and resets the IPBS Idle Reset 1 Select Reset gt Idle Reset 2 Click OK 3 The IPBS will reset when there are no active calls Immediate Reset 1 Select Reset gt Reset 2 Click OK 3 The IPBS will terminate all active calls and reset TFTP Mode Note When the IPBS is in TFTP mode it can only be reached using the gwload utility This mode should not be used during normal operation Boot When the IPBS is in Boot mode it uses a small version of the firmware minifirmware which contains only the IP stack and the web interface 1 Select Reset gt Boot 2 Click OK Avaya DECT R4
13. 1 Marked as hidden in the html page index html To make the alarm priority option available remove the comment and save the file in the ftp area When using index4 html these changes need to be done in several files see Change the NetPage User Interface Functionality on page 395 GUI Description Beep Code Silent 1 beep 2 beeps 3 beeps 4 beeps 5 beeps 10 beeps NO oO fF WY O Siren Note The system does not distinguish between the number of beep codes Change the NetPage User Interface Functionality As a help for locating comments hidden text in the html code the comment marks lt and gt are used see the example in figure 152 The comment marks are also used to hide functionality in the user interface Text written or functionality framed by the comment marks is not interpreted by the web browser Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 395 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 152 Example of how to mark html text as comments i e hide it lt TD valign top style height 25 gt 1 gt This is the button that opens the NetPage phonebook If the phonebook is not used remove the complete script and the amp nbsp amp nbsp line mark it as comments to be able to include it again later on E g o For comments included in the JavaScript code the comment mark is used see figure 153 Text written after the comment mark in the same line is not interpreted
14. 2 Click Save in the dialogue window and enter the file name default name statuslog csv and the file path Clear Fault Log This functionality removes all non active faults from the fault log 1 Click Clear 2 Click Yes in the dialogue window to remove all non active faults from the status log file Timeout Repeated faults can be blocked i e the fault will be discarded and no actions will be taken The incoming fault will be handled when first received and blocked during the set timeout 1 Enter the timeout in minutes 0 1000 minutes the default value is 10 minutes If no Status Logs should be blocked set the timeout to 0 2 Click Set timeout to save the setting Backup the Configuration This instruction is used to backup the Device Manager database and ELISE2 configuration The backup file is saved in a proprietary file format and cannot be edited Save it in a place where you can easily find it for a restore 1 On the AIWS Start page click on Configuration and log in 2 Click on Other Settings in the left menu 3 Click on Backup Restore The Backup Restore view appears Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 373 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 134 Parameter Backup Restore WSM Configuration Backup Restore Backup parameters Restore parameters Browse Restore 4 To make a backup file of the current configuration click Backup in the Backup Restore window T
15. Click the Common Messages or My Messages button in NetPage For Common Messages enter the user name user and the password password Click Add message There is always a blank line at the column end Enter the name of the message and add a message text of maximum 250 characters Set the message type beep code and priority Click Save Click Close to exit the administration Edit a Predefined Message 1 Click the Common Messages or My Messages button in NetPage For Common Messages enter the user name user and the password password Select the messages that shall be changed and the administration field will open Make the changes and click Save Click Close to exit the administration Message History Status Status on the last sent message Status Description Message The message is accepted by NetPage and will be accepted transmitted Message The Messaging System has completed the transmission completed of the message In the user interface index4 other message history statuses can appear such as Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 407 Installing and operating AIWS e Call Diversion e Manual Acknowledge e Delivery Receipt Note Deleting a message in message history will delete the received message on the telephone as well Backup and Restore of NetPage files It is recommended to make a backup of all NetPage files the phonebook and predefined groups
16. Note Make sure connectors are correctly inserted Bus Connection to Screw Terminals If system bus cable is not used connections are made with twisted pairs to screw connector J24 Figure 170 Connection of System 900 bus To A or B bus in other units i S11 BUS 1 within the System 900 A l2 BUS 2 Other System 900 units are connected to A or B bus pin 1 and 2 at screw connector J24 Note Observe polarity Use only twisted pairs for two wire connections 438 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation Connection of Supply Voltage A separate power supply is connected to screw connector J5 pin1 and 2 The current through J5 must not exceed 3A Note External power supply must incorporate an insulating transformer Output current must be inherently limited to max 8 A Note The external power supply must comply with EN IEC 60950 1 requirements Note For US and Canada The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware shall only be connected with the following power supply AWS 1166 SA60 Sino American Electronic Co Ltd Switching Adapter 1 Connect the power supply cable to J5 1 2 Note 12 V wire is marked with white stripes GND wire has a text printing of the cable characteristics Figure 171 Connection of supply voltage J5 Supply voltage in ON Q1 12V I2 GND Supply voltage ote 3 12V A 4 GND cas sl Additional Connections Error
17. Omnidirectional single antenna Directional dual antenna sisa wri ear Oe TREE SES Directional single antenna Outdoor housing DECT base stations Troubleshooting gt i gt sas ias INEFOCUCHON e r reared re Se OS ds A AE AA IP DEGT Base Station IPBS i 2c cbc ec inicia see ee OG BS Sa a Remote LAN sniffer traces es Avaya 3720 3725 DECT Telephones e eee Fault Symptoms cooocrnirrr sra A Display Information lt lt c sarna ere AA LED Error INGICANONS 6 5 6 oD a a A ARA Advanced GRATO ia criar CHS SOKA S LAKE SEES ENED SEE Multiple Battery Charger ee R ckmou t Charg o c e eor a AAA A Be ee a a 14 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Contents Portable Device Manager PDM 2 0 ee eee eee ee ee 509 Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS lt lt 511 General Troubleshooting s sios seses a ee 511 NetPage Troubleshooting aaao 513 Reboot after image installation w o restoring the parameters 514 Built in tools in AIWS 4 6464 45 be wR AAA 514 Advanced Troubleshooting 2 2 0 eee 516 ANS TacholY FOSOL o o aca a aa a a a ee A a a 517 What to consider when replacing a module 518 A 2 536565 6a ood e RA OES CR OE ES OR
18. Restart There are two ways to restart an Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware e following the power down instruction above and then apply the power again or e initiate a restart from the administration web page Operating Modes There are five different operating modes normal network setup fail safe image installation and unlicensed Network Setup Mode To be able to contact the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware a valid and unique IP address is necessary In this mode the IP address is set to 192 5 36 229 which is reserved for installation of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Network Setup Mode should only be used when Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware has not got any IP address or when the IP address has to be changed i e if Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware has been moved from one network to another Fail safe Mode This mode can be used when it is impossible to contact the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware When started in Fail safe Mode no applications are started It is possible to return to factory settings or a backup copy of parameters from the web page xxx xxx xxx xxx admin XXX XXX XXX XXX is the IP address given to the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware If there is a problem accessing this page it is possible to access xxx xxx xxx xxx system where it is possible to change network parameters or install new software Image Installation Mode The Compact Flash includes the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware operating system and applicat
19. Restore 1 Open NetPage In the Administrate field select the My Groups button Click on the Backup Restore button In the Backup Restore view click Browse and browse to the once backed up file Click Open gt Restore 2 If not already done repeat the same process as above in point 1 but for Common Groups Log on with user and password password Repeat the same process as above in point 1 but for My Messages If not already done repeat the same process as above in point 1 but for Common Messages Log on with user and password password 5 Test that NetPage is functioning properly see Test the New User Interface on page 401 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 409 Installing and operating AIWS Open Access Protocol OAP This function makes it possible for customer applications to communicate with other connected systems for example the Cordless Telephone System The protocol that is used for communication is called Open Access Protocol OAP For more information e g a Function Description please contact your system administrator Configuration The Message Distribution lists for the different interfaces have to be configured to send the information to the OAP Server in order to give the client access to the information The address of the OAP Server is xxx xxx xxx xxx OAP Configuration Example The DECT Interface should be configured to send User Data to the OAP Server
20. 2 Inthe left pane click Phonebook and Edit See figure 104 on page 317 3 In the Edit Phonebook page click Delete All It is now possible to mark entries not to be deleted by clicking on the blue arrow w If the blue arrow icon is clicked it disappears and a red X is displayed 4 Click Save All entries marked with a blue arrow are deleted The entries that are marked Xx are kept Operation The user accesses the phonebook by sending a message from the telephone The message includes a search query containing part of the first name and or the family name or phone number see below You want to search for Text to be entered First name or Family name lt Part of name gt First and Family name lt Part of first name gt lt space gt lt Part of family name gt First name only lt Part of first name gt lt space gt Family name only lt space gt lt Part of family name gt Telephone number lt Part of number gt Some telephones have separate fields for these entries and some don t By part of name means the first characters of the name and by part of number means the last digits of the number If no message text is entered the AIWS will return a failure 1 Enter the text and send it to the phonebook with the specified address number The search result is sent back to the telephone as an message If more than one number that matches the query is found the result is displayed as a list of names Note A central phonebo
21. In order to send a message do as follows 1 On the AIWS start page click on Send Message the Messaging Tool window appears 2 Enter phone number in the top text field 314 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Messaging 3 Enter message in the bottom text field 4 Click on the send button The message is sent to the receiver NetPage The NetPage messaging tool is shown for user with a licence including NetPage CALL ID gt SEARCH A z BEEP CODE PRIO Normal y Normal gt SEHD MESSAGE A Create and send Messages You can sent a message with priority Normal Low and High The higher the priority the faster the message will be delivered An additional priority code Alarm can also be made available by customizing the netpage html files Messages send with priority Alarm will be opened immediately independent from the active screen on the handset site even if the handset is in a call In the combo box Beep Code you can select how the message should be signalled on the called telephone Note Selecting Beep Code x beeps will only work if on the called phone the setting Sound amp Alerts gt Message alerts is set to Beep 1 Click Send Message on the start page The NetPage opens 2 Click either on the Search button to search a number from the Users list or enter number in the Call ID field It is possible to enter several Call ID s separated by semicolon
22. Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 135 Installing and operating IPBS Reset Using the Reset Button It is possible to do a hardware reset of the IPBS by pressing the reset button The button is accessed through a hole in the back of the IPBS figure 12 on page 53 Note Use a pointed object in an non conducting material to perform a reset Short press lt 1 sec Restart Medium press 3 sec Restart in TFTP mode In TFTP mode the IPBS can be accessed only through the gwload application This mode is intended for support and development departments Long press 10 sec Factory reset all configuration parameters will be set to default Wait afterwards until values the LED LED 1 for IPBS is steady amber Quit Operation To end operating the IPBS web interface simply close the web browser There is no logout or change account option in the web application Commissioning This section describes the visual inspection and tests that must be executed after completing the installation and initialization of the IP DECT system The purpose of the visual inspection and tests is to verify that all installation activities have resulted in a correctly functioning system If it appears that a part is malfunctioning while the system is installed correctly i e no cabling faults no configuration faults the technician must consult the maintenance section included in this manual for fault finding
23. This chapter describes how to install configure and operate the Advanced Charger It is an advanced charger equipped with a USB port making it possible to connect it directly to a PC for the purpose of upgrading or configuring the Advanced Charger itself or a cordless telephone placed in the charger The Advanced Charger also has two Ethernet ports enabling upgrading and configuring over a LAN of a cordless telephone placed in the charger The USB port is used to connect the Advanced Charger to a PC running the Portable Device Manager PDM This program can be used to upgrade the software and to configure parameters in the Advanced Charger as well as in a cordless telephone placed in the Advanced Charger The USB port is used when the Advanced Charger is connected to a PC running thePortable Device Manager PDM The PDM or the Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS can be used to upgrade the software and to configure parameters in the Advanced Charger as well as in a telephone placed in the Advanced Charger The Advanced Charger supports easy replacement that is replacement of a faulty telephone via the telephone display and does not involve PDM or AIWS Figure 36 Advanced Charger o o The Ethernet ports makes it possible to connect several Advanced Chargers to the same LAN Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 195 Installing and operating the Advanced Charger This chapter is intended as a guide for insta
24. Uploadable Language It is possible to upload one additional language to the telephone The language file is generated via an Excel file The Excel file used to generate language files is delivered from your supplier Note If another language file is uploaded the first additional language is overwritten Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 163 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones Certain special characters are allowed when generating the language file see information in the Excel file To upload an additional language the PDM or the Device Manager in the AIWS is used go to the devices tab and select device s In the Device menu select Upload language A parameter can be altered to match the uploaded language The parameter controls e The characters available for text input e The sort order in the phonebook See also on the PDM Upload a Language on page 272 or the AIWS Installing and operating AIWS on page 289 Customize the GUI This feature is included in 3725 not in 3720 It is possible to customize the telephone Graphical User Interface GUI by turning certain menus On or Off This is done in the PDM AIWS by editing a template or a Number setting for the corresponding portable or Number The path to these settings in the template depends on the version of the parameter definition file def In the current version the path is Customization gt Visibility gt X whe
25. see figure 6 Note It is recommended to have at least 68 dBm for good speech quality The 68 dBm circles should overlap to ensure seemless handover between 2 base stations The handset should receive the next base station with 62 dBm at the 68 dBm circle of the first base station Sync radius the radius of the circle around a particular IPBS in which other IPBSs lose synchronization with that IPBS with a given synchronization loss probability This means that the size of the sync radius depends on requested probability of losing synchronization see figure 6 Note A value of 80 dBm is a recommendation to ensure good sync conditions 24 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 IP DECT System IP DECT System Management On Site Management The IPBS is managed using a web GUI accessed over the LAN Remote Management The IPBS has support for remote setup and configuration over the Internet using a VPN client over IP networks IP Administration Security All IP administration is based on secure IP All access to the IPBS is password protected in order to prevent unauthorised access Software Upgrade The IPBS has support for software download and it is possible to do a software upgrade using the web interface It also has support for automatic firmware update from a web server or a TFTP server Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 25 System Description VoIP Signalli
26. 200 is the extension and 1234 is the AC code 0 200 1234 88 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Configuration Note o N nn When using AC code start with the character and end with the character Otherwise skip the characters If the user is already assigned to a Portable Device it will be moved to the anonymous list when logging in a new Portable Device It is recommended to go off hook as the first step When dialling the login or logoff sequence in on hook mode and pressing off hook at the end of the sequence the dialled digits will be added to the call list Therefore the individual AC can be found in clear text as well Repeat step 4 to 6 for all telephones Under the Configuration menu select DECT gt System Disable anonymous registration by selecting Disable in the Subscription drop down list Click OK Individual Registration 1 Select Users Click New Enter the following information in the corresponding text fields Long Name The name of the user need to be unique throughout the system This is the name presented in a called party s display unless this is configured in the IP PBX Display Name Will be showed in the telephone display when the phone is idle Number The phone number extension need to be unique throughout the system IPEI IPDI The unique identification number of the telephone Auth Code The individual authentication code for this use
27. A key pair and a CSR file will be created This may take up to one hour depending on the key strength selected During this time the device will be fully operational with the exception of https not working and the certificate tab pane not being visible When the CSR file has been generated it is visible in the Signing Request section of the Certificates page Download the CSR file by clicking the PEM or DER link in the Signing Request section Send the CSR file to your CA If successful your CA will send back a digitally signed certificate This file should now be uploaded Select the certificate file Click Upload Note If the CSR file generated in step 5 is deleted before receiving the reply from the CA in step 8 it will not be possible to upload the signed certificate file in step 10 The system will automatically delete the CSR file when step 10 has completed LAN This section describes how to do the following configurations and settings Set DHCP mode Set IP static address Set dynamic IP address Set link type Configure VLAN View LAN statistics Set DHCP Mode The IPBS can have different DHCP modes see the table below Off Used if the IPBS should have a static IP address 102 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Client The IPBS acts as a DHCP Client if there is a DHCP server in the network it will be assigned an IP address Automatic In automatic DHCP m
28. Figure 149 Start page default user interface index_template AIWS Send Message Phonebook GE n Device Manager Configuration Setup Wizard E K AVAYA A copy of the default AIWS Start page see figure 149 above is stored in the start page folder on the AIWS FTP area The start page copy index_template is an html file which can be copied and edited It is also possible to replace the start page with a completely new user interface When the edited or new html file is saved as index html and placed in the Start page folder on the AIWS FTP area it will replace the default start page 392 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Language and User Interface Default Send Message GUI Figure 150 NetPage default user interface index3 CALL ID gt SEARCH A z BEEP CODE PRIO Normal Normal y gt SEND MESSAGE ye i The default NetPage user interface index3 htm1 see figure 150 above is opened from the start page by clicking Send Message In the NetPage folder on the AIWS FTP area there are four examples of the NetPage user interface index1 index2 index3 and index4 Index3 is a copy of the default NetPage user interface All NetPage functionality is included in the default user interface but all parameters that can be configured in the example user interfaces index1 index2 and index3 are not shown The necessary code for viewing and configuring the hidden parame
29. Front view Figure notes 1 LED 1 2 LED 2 3 Reset Contents of the Box The box in which the IPBS is packed contains An IPBS with integrated antennas A patch cable approx 1 m A mounting bracket Two screws with wall plugs Power Distribution Back view m 4 Test RJ12 5 LAN RJ45 6 Power Supply RJ45 The IPBS can be powered using the following methods Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af A local AC adapter Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 53 Installing and operating IPBS Note For more information about power distribution see Power the Base Station on page 71 Software The software in the IPBS can be updated by downloading new software without disconnecting the equipment The new software is stored in flash memory See Update on page 129 for information Connectors e One 8 pin RJ45 modular jack for LAN PoE e One 8 pin RJ45 modular jack for to connect external power supply e A6 pin RJ12 modular jack for factory testing LEDs Status of LED1 lower LED Description Steady Green Operational Quick flashing amber Download of firmware in progress Steady Amber TFTP mode Alternating red green No
30. Module restart Unite Name Server Status Start of component Module Fault List Persistent No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Persistent No Seriousness CES Information Defe v Factory E Critical Default Critical Default v Warning Default Y Critical Default Information Defe Seriousness No Error Default The AIWS fault log is a centralised log file and shows a complete log of the faults in the system Every time a fault message is generated in the system information about the fault is written to the log file The maximum number of entries in the log file is 1050 When the log file is full the 50 oldest entries are removed 1 page The first 25 log entries are shown To get the following 25 log entries click the Next link The following fault levels exist in the log Information Individual reset All OK Critical error Error Warning Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide Select Status gt Fault log in the left menu on the AIWS Configuration page to open the 05 2010 371 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 133 Example of AIWS fault log Fault Log Entry 1 25 172 1 25 26 50 51 75 76 100 101 125 126 150 151 172 Next Expand all entries Time Level Description Module Address 2008 01 22 16 22 53 Error Communication IMS 172 20 9 133 Failed to transfer Unite communication block IMSar 2008 01 15 10 52 38 Warni
31. Portable device PSTN PSCN Q QoS QSIG RFP RFPI RSSI RS232 RTP SIP Site SMS SST SST XML based protocol used to create customized applications for Unite access Over The Air Private Branch Exchange telephone system within an enterprise that switches calls between local lines and allows all users to share a certain number of external lines Portable Device Manager A chryptography standard defining a file format used to store keys and certificates Power over Ethernet In this document a portable device or portable means cordless telephone Public Switched Telephone Network Primary receiver Scan Carrier Number defines the RF carrier on which one receiver will be listening on the next frame Quality of Service Q signalling a set of standards defined by ECommunication ManagerA ESTI and ISO for connection PBX to PBX in networks Radio Fixed Part DECT base station part of the DECT Infrastructure Radio Fixed Part Identity Radio Signal Strength Information Industry standard serial communication protocol Real Time Transport Protocol Session Initiation Protocol Contains information of devices and Numbers Short Message Service global protocol for sending messages between cordless telephones Site Survey Tool Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 521 ToS ToS UNS USB User ID V VoIP VoWiFi WiFi WSM Type of Service Unite Name Server Universal Se
32. RS232 ports J11N7 8 e 1 not used 2 TX 3 RX CTRL IN CTRL OUT not used GND not used To external unit using RS232 K communication O nu A O o N Connections for Serial Line Printer To connect the serial line printer see figure 174 for the pin layout and wiring run 440 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation Figure 174 Connections for serial line printing 25 pin male l ELISE D sub connector i e 1 not used DSR 6 pcp 8 ale i 3 RX po AB REN 4 CTRLIN RXD 39 e 5 CTRL OUT GND 70 ASS 6 not used RTS 10 PE 7 GND i cts 56 e 3 not used RS422 Communication with External Unit Depending on software application the RS422 port is used or not If it is used the connector J6 is connected to the external unit as shown in the figure below Figure 175 Connection of external unit via the RS422 port 2 J6 Rb S 1 10 To external unit Ra S 2 Ta i using RS422 lt Tb S 3 Rib communication i Ta S 4 Ria Connection of AUX Inputs and AUX Outputs The application of the inputs and outputs are software dependent Two digital inputs and two digital outputs can be connected via J16 The outputs are of open collector type and the output signals are dimensioned for 100 mA at max 12 V A pull up resistor should be connected to the output as shown in figure 176
33. Select time source Web browser A bus or Time server Note Not all system s Central Unit can provide the time Independent of time source the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware can handle different time zones and adjust the clock according to daylight saving time 446 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation The date and time format controls the appearance of date and time in log views and application specific pages The administration pages that are common to all Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware will display date and time in the following format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS for example 2000 01 31 13 30 00 This format for date and time will also be used in exported log files An Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware can also set the time in connected systems for example System 900 In this case the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware will send its time to the connected system once every 24 hour period and when the time is updated To set the time in System 900 from the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware do as follows 4 On the time settings page enter when the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware should send its time to System 900 in the Time push time field 5 Click Setup System 900 time 6 Select Yes in the Set time in System 900 Setting time in other carrier systems is done similarly If several carrier systems are available the time will be sent at the same time to all systems Time Synchronization It can t
34. Some of the optional settings in AIWS are included in the basic licence other require an additional optional licence Refer to How to Use this Chapter on page 291 e Set Language it is possible to translate the user interface language refer to chapter Customize the Language on page 387 e Customize the Start page and NetPage GUI the Start page and the NetPage user interface can be customized to suit the individual customer requirements concerning functionality Refer to chapter Customize the User Interface GUI on page 391 e Open Access Protocol OAP makes it possible to communicate with other systems that is connected to the AIWS Refer to chapter Open Access Protocol OAP on page 410 e Digit Treatment makes it possible to set the way telephone numbers are converted in telephone number lists Refer to Digit Treatment in Central Phonebook on page 364 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 313 Installing and operating AIWS Operation Messaging Creating and sending messages requires no password and can be done by any user in the system Depending on AIWS bundle different GUI s are displayed Figure 101 Messaging button on AIWS start page Send Message For configuration of the Messaging Tool see Operation Messaging on page 314 Messaging Tool The Messaging Tool GUI is displayed on AIWSs without additional licence Figure 102 Messaging Tool GUI EN
35. The user also has access to all administration pages The sysadmin has permission to change passwords for all users in the product In addition there are two other users in some Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware products One is called user and the default password is password This user is product dependent and what it is used for is described in corresponding product documentation This user does not have access to the administration pages where passwords normally are changed The user can change its own password on the following page http xxx xxx xxx xxx admin public user_chpass shtml The password can also be changed by the users admin and sysadmin The other user is called ftpuser and the default password is changemetoo The user is available in products with a FTP area The user can change its own password on the following page http xxx xxx xxx xxx admin public ftpuser_chpass shtml Administration To access the web pages below the user admin is used The web page xxx xxx xxx xxx admin is used in most occasions for example e System setup for example System 900 configuration Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 429 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware e Troubleshooting information e Changing passwords On the following occasions the web page xxx xxx xxx xxx system must be used e Current software installation has to be replaced e No software is installed on Elise 2 Server AIWS Hard
36. Users 2 Click show 3 Click on User to unsubscibe 4 Click Unsubs The user is now shown as Not Subscribed Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 125 Installing and operating IPBS When a user has been unsubscribed in the IPBS the subscription will automatically be deleted in the telephone when the telephone is currently connected to this system Device Overview Radios Information about the devices in the IP DECT system 1 Select Device Overview gt Radios Figure 31 Device Overview in the Master IPBS AVAYA IP DECT Base Station Configuration Radios Air Sync General LAN Static Registrations Name t RFPI IP Address Syne LDAP Device Name Version Connected Time IP IPBS 01 2f 70 9014C41008 10 50 46 80 Slave Backup OK Master IPBS 0350 3 0 203 0 22 3 1 16 3 0 201PBS1 Y3 PA Od 20h 13m 35s LDAP IPBS 01 2f 71 Standby 10 50 46 81 Up Standby IPBS 0343 3 0 20 3 0 22 3 1 16 3 0 20APBS1 Y3 PA Od 1h 36m 15s DECI IPBS 01 2f 71 9014C4300A 10 50 46 81 Slave OK Standby IPBS 0343 3 0 20 3 0 22 3 1 16 3 0 204PBS1 Y3 PA Od 1h 36m 15s UNE IPBS 01 2 72 9014042009 10 50 46 82 Master OK IPBS D315 3 0 20 3 0 22 3 1 16 3 0 20 PBS1 Y3 PA Od 20h 13m 34s Administration Uninitialized Registrations Users Name t IP Address Device Name Version Connected Time Device Overview IPBS 01 2F8d 135 124 84 21 IP DECT Base Station 3 1 16 3 0 20 PBS1 Y3 PA Od 20h 13m 34s Add Add Radios In the U
37. and messages This is useful for example when recovering a customised GUI in case of software or hardware replacements Even after a software update the NetPage files need to be restored NetPage Files NetPage files are the phonebook the GUI files including image files and the Common Groups and the Common Messages files Backup Copy and save all NetPage directory files in the NetPage ftp area see Files for Translation Editing on page 391 Restore 1 Put copies of all of the backup NetPage directory files in the NetPage ftp area see Files for Translation Editing on page 391 2 Test that NetPage is functioning properly see Test the New User Interface on page 401 Predefined Groups and Messages Note This functionality can only be reached from index4 see figure 154 on page 398 Backup 1 Open NetPage In the Administrate field select the My Groups button Click on the Backup Restore button The Backup Restore view is opened Click Backup gt Save Choose the file name and save 2 If not already done repeat the same process as above in point 1 but for Common Groups Log on with user and password password 408 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Messaging Tool Configuration 3 Repeat the same process as above in point 1 but for My Messages 4 If not already done repeat the same process as above in point 1 but for Common Messages Log on with user and password password
38. battery and clip included Material Case PC ABS Key pad PC Clip PPA Colour Grey Display w x h 28 x 35 mm CSTN display Clip Hinge type standard or swivel type Battery Type Li polymer Speech time 20 h under optimal conditions 13 h with Bluetooth headset in use under optimal conditions Stand by time 120 hunder optimal conditions Charge time lt 4 hours Discharge charge cycles gt 80 capacity left after 400 full charge discharge cycles 1 The stand by time is without activated screensaver Connectors Multi purpose connector For battery charging software download and configuration Headset connector User interface Standard 2 5 mm Display w x h Multiple colours with high resolution more than 65k individual colours 128 x 160 pixel LCD with white LED back light Indicator LED on top front for visual indication of incoming call message The LED may also be used for visual indication of normal function Vibrator Incoming call message 464 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya 3725 DECT Telephone Keypad Soft keys 3 Hook off On hook and Power On Off Symbol on the same key Five way navigation key OK in the centre of key Numerical keys Volume up down Multifunction button Audio Ring signal Adjustable in 8 steps Earpiece Adjusta
39. boxes Clicking in the column will give a short description of selected parameter 1 2 3 Select the Numbers tab The Numbers view appears Select the Number The selected row is highlighted In the Number menu select Edit Alternatively right click and choose Edit or double click on the Number The Edit Parameters for lt Number gt window opens where lt Number gt is the current Number Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 259 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM 4 Select parameter in the left pane 5 Make your changes on the Value row When a parameter has been edited the name of the node to which the parameter belongs changes to a blue colour Click Cancel if you want to undo all parameters edited since your last save and return to the main window 6 Click OK to save your changes Note If the Handset is used on an Integral system only the sound and alert settings for Vibrating alert on off key sound click tone silent ring type normal short silent will be valid Other settings are ignored This is also valid when configuring profiles Figure 69 Editing parameters in the PDM GUI Edit parameters for 123456 Device type d62 Talker Parameter version 25 2 E Systems H Settings Connections Profiles H Shortcuts Audio E Customization OK Cancel Note When you save the parameters they are automa
40. device and associate it with a Number in the database The parameters will automatically be sent from the Device Manager to the device See Associate a Number with a Device on page 337 336 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Associate a Number with a Device Before being able to synchronize parameters between AIWS and devices it is necessary to associate a Number with the device It is possible to enter several Device ID s in advance and to associate them with a Number at a later moment See also Assign a Number to a device on page 341 and Create new Device on page 340 1 Select the Numbers tab 2 Inthe Number menu select Associate with device The Associate Number dialogue opens Figure 116 Associate number dialogue Associate number Choose a device to associate with Device Device type Software Parameter Upgrades Online Latest nu 036470296748 3725 2 6 6 24 4 807 036470296761 3725 2 6 6 24 4 Y 812 036470296776 3725 2 6 6 24 4 809 Search for in Device 1D v Show all 3 Select the device you want to associate with in the list and click OK 4 Click OK If the selected device is online it will immediately be updated with the selected Number If the selected device is not online it will be updated the next time it is online It is possible to associate several Numbers with several devices simultaneously Avaya DECT R4 Ins
41. gt device info gt User ID needs to be the extension number of the handset The user ID can be configured by AIWS Device Manager or WinPDM Navigate to the Numbers tab select the device and select number rename Change the number to the extension number of the handset Some characters will not be sent via SMS or the Send option does not work at the handset For SMS only the following characters will be supported by the SMS protocol Figure 184 SMS Characters CASPO P p _ 1AQaq 0r 2BRbr T43CScseAn4DTdAt Qe 5EUeceuiMs6rv iviWY 7G6Wgwodil 8HXhxC0 9IYiyL1FrZz t JZj201 KAkioER lt LO l1lSGCRe MNm RAS gt NUniGa E 20 50 Handset restarts continuously when the handset moved away from the connected system This is currently a limitation in the software The problem occurs if the handset is subscribed to IP DECT other GAP and Integral Enterprise or Integral 5 systems at the same time and Change system is set to Automatically Workaround After a restart the handset will start to search for a system Go immediately to menu Connections gt System gt Change system Select one of the systems in the list that you currently like to use Make sure Automatically is not selected Centralized phone book search fails when using LDAP It was observed when entering a blank in between the first name or the last name input field that there was no or faulty search results Unfortunately a blank in the search string is internally
42. is connected If charger doesn t appear in the AIWS device manager when connected via Ethernet you might have to configure the AIWS IP address with the PDM tool refer to Advanced Charger does not appear in AIWS on page 200 Easy Handset Replacement doesn t start at the Rackmount Charger Easy handset replacement is only supported in the first slot most left of the Rackmount Charger Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 507 Troubleshooting Rackmount Charger doesn t go online in the Device manager or Easy handset repleacement doesn t start Try a software reset To reset the Rackmount Charger press the embedded LED on the front of the charger for example with a pen or a screw driver 508 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Portable Device Manager PDM Portable Device Manager PDM When troubleshooting the PDM it is always a good idea to examine the log files since they provide additional information that may prove useful When reporting an error to your supplier always include the appropriate log file Log files are stored under C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data Avaya WinPDM log The log files are rotated every 10 MB and are time stamped with 1 ms resolution The PDM does Not Start Installation fails To run the PDM the computer must fulfill the requirements listed in Portable Device Manager PDM on page 482 If you do not have the c
43. right click on the device and select Factory reset A message saying Do you want to reset the selected device s to factory defaults will appear 4 Click Yes File management This chapters covers the File management for parameter definition files software files phonebook files and language files Import and export of templates and numbers is described in Import and Export on page 276 Import of translation files is described in Language settings on page 246 The parameter definition file holds the definitions of all parameters for a specific version of a Number s parameter set Updated software and new parameter definition files for devices and Numbers can be added to the PDM see Import Parameter Definition files on page 269 If there is a naming conflict when importing a warning message is diplayed 268 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Definition File Version Parameter Version Both definition files and device software include parameters and are indicated by a version number Note The version of the definition file matches the version of the device software If a Number is updated with a new parameter version it does not always demand a new definition file An old definition file can often be used but if new parameters have been added in the new parameter version these parameters will not be editable The release note will tell you if a new definition file is needed to
44. should be avoided e Depending on network size a backbone of least 100 Mbps should be used LDAP The LDAP protocol is used in the IP DECT system between two or more Master IPBS if different network regions shall be used It is also used for Standby Master TCP IP and UDP IP Port Documentation For detailed information please ask your Avaya contact for document CID 139993 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 19 System Description IP DECT System The major parts of the Avaya IP DECT system are the IP DECT Base Station It consists of the software components DECT Radio interface and DECT Master There is only one DECT Master in a single site IP DECT system In a multi site IP DECT system each site is connected with the Communication Manager through an own DECT Master and an XMobile trunk Figure 2 Software components of the IPBS z 007 IPBS The IPBS is connected to an IP network through the LAN interface which provides connectivity to the Communication Manager System layout All IPBS are connected to the LAN but it is only the DECT Master that have a logical connection to the Communication Manager It is a flat layout where all DECT Radios are logically communicating directly to the DECT Master see figure 3 on page 21 20 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 IP DECT System Figure 3 Logical connections of the software components DECT Mast
45. used as a delimiter between first name and last name E g if Klaus Dieter is entered as the first name and Miller as last name the LDAP request will search for Klaus as first name and Dieter as last name Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 501 Troubleshooting Handset shows no access but calls are possible This issue could occur if the IPBS with which the handset is currently connected is disconnected from power and the IP network In such situation the handset roams to another IPBS of the same IP DECT system but the roaming to the new base station is incomplete from the IP DECT system point of view because the old IPBS doesn t answer anymore The new IPBS will block the location registration for about 5 to10 minutes So the handset will show no access for this time period However calls will be possible on this handset even if the location registration was not accepted by the new IPBS Display Information The following error messages can be shown in the telephone display Display shows Probable cause Action or comment No access The telephone is in range but has no access rights Switch off the telephone and then switch it on again If this does not work the subscription data for this extension in the IPBS Master might be deleted No System The telephone beeps once a minute with a low tone followed by a high tone during max 30 minutes If the vib
46. 05 2010 237 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger Maintenance Software Upgrade The charger software is pre installed Updates can be performed by using PDM or AIWS For PDM details see Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM on page 239 or for AIWS details see Upgrade a Device with new Software on page 349 Administration Data backup N A Troubleshooting See Troubleshooting on page 495 238 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Introduction The Portable Device Manager PDM provides a generic application for managing Cordless Telephones Advanced Chargers and Rackmount Chargers on one or more sites The PDM makes it possible to edit parameters update software in the devices and upload files It can save parameters and software for individual sites in a database This chapter is intended as a guide for installation maintenance and troubleshooting purposes and is relevant for e Installation and parameter setup e Device administration and PDM daily use Handles devices on own site only Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 239 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM How to Use this Chapter For a basic description on how to work with PDM see PDM description on page 242 Installation and Configuration These tasks are intended for ins
47. 1 0 075 W kg 10 gram Safety AS NZS 60950 EMC EN301 489 1 and EN301 489 6 DECT AS ACIF S004 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 473 Technical Data Advanced Charger Physical Dimensions x w x h 130 x 98 x 55 mm Weight 160 g excl power adapter Material Case PC ABS Rubber feet Colour Charcoal grey Functional Supply voltage 100 240 V 50 60 Hz AC adapter 5 V DC charger Charge current 0 65 A Interfaces USB USB specification 2 0 full speed Ethernet Support data transfer rates up to 100Mbps IEEE802 3 standard Environmental Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C Storage temperature 20 C to 65 C Enclosure protection IP30 IEC EN60529 Immunity to electromagnetic fields 3 V m EN61000 4 3 Immunity to ESD 4 kV contact discharge and 8 kV air discharge EN61000 4 2 Compliance to European regulations and standards EU directives 2004 108 EC EMC Product marking CE Safety EN60950 1 EMC EN 55022 class B EN61000 4 3 Compliance to US regulations and standards Product marking 474 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Advanced Charger Safety UL 60950 1 EMC FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Compliance to Canadian regulations and standards Product marking Safety CSA 60950 1 EMC FCC
48. 1 1 0 2 0 Y 036470296748 3725 2 6 6 24 4 036470296761 3725 2 6 6 24 4 Y 036470296776 3725 2 6 6 24 4 Work area Desktop Charger Ad Sort the List By default the lists in Devices Numbers and Templates are sorted by Device ID Number ID and Name respectively To sort the list by any other column click on the appropriate column heading To reverse the sort order click on the column heading again The sorting order is indicated by an up or down arrow in the column heading Secondary sorting order can be done by pressing Ctrl and clicking on the column heading Filter the List By default the list in each tab shows all available Devices Numbers or Templates It is possible to filter the list by selecting the desired device type in the Device types column in the left pane Colour coding General colour coding This colour coding is valid for the lists under the tabs elf the version number is shown in red the Device Manager has found no parameter definition files supporting that device type elf the version number is shown in dark red the parameter definition file is compatible but does not have exactly the same version as the device 324 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Colour coding for parameter and template editing In the parameter and template editing windows the following colour coding is used Colour Black Context Description General Normal Dark blue For t
49. 10 carriers for the other frequency bands Under all normal circumstances all carriers should be enabled To enable or disable carriers 1 Select DECT gt System Note To access the System tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Mark unmark the Enabled Carriers check boxes 3 Click OK Configure Coder Select the preferred coder and enter the desired frame length If exclusive is selected for the coder the IPBS is forced to use that coder With Silence Compression enabled no information is sent during pauses in the conversation this is used to save bandwidth Note When exclusive is enabled for a coder it might be impossible to make calls outside the IP DECT system G450 system only supports G 711A ULaw G 729a Coder G723 53 is not supported 1 Select DECT gt System Note To access the System tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Choose the applicable coder in the Coder drop down list 112 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Enter the sample time in milliseconds in the Frame text field Choose Exclusive enabled or disabled by checking unchecking the Exclusive check box Choose Silence Compression enabled or disabled by checking unchecking the SC check box 6 Click OK Configure Supplementary Services The supplementary services determine to handle the defined dial codes locally in the IPBS master All
50. 180 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Communication Manager system administration Configure the codec used for the selected network region A codec set supported by IPBS and Media Encryption none is required the Far end Network Region that has to be configured in the signaling group will be linked to this codec IPBS codec support e G 711 A law 64kbps 20 and 30 ms packets e G 711 y law 64kbps 20 and 30 ms packets e G 723 1 5 3 kbps 30 and 60 ms Not supported with Avaya G450 Gateway e G729A 16 kbps 20 30 40 50 and 60 ms For Communication Manager 4 and Communication Manager 5 display ip codec set 1 Page L of 2 IP Codec Set Codec Set 1 Audio Silence Frames Packet Codec Suppression Per Pkt Size ms 1 G 711MU n 2 20 2 3 4 oe 6 7 Media Encryption 1 none N Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 181 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager display ip network region 1 Page 1 of 19 IP NETWORK REGION Region 1 Location Authoritative Domain Name MEDIA PARAMETERS Intra region IP IP Direct Audio yes Codec Set 1 Inter region IP IP Direct Audio yes UDP Port Min 2048 IP Audio Hairpinning n UDP Port Max 3329 DIFFSERV TOS PARAMETERS RTCP Reporting Enabled y Call Control PHB Value 46 RTCP MONITOR SERVER PARAMETERS Audio PHB Value 46 Use Default Server Par
51. 2 0 supported e Ethernet port 10 100 Mbit s e Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows Vista Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 197 Installing and operating the Advanced Charger Installation and Configuration Advanced Charger Installation 198 The chargers shall be placed in a dry environment with a temperature range from 5 C up to 40 C Delivery includes e Advanced Charger e Power Supply Cable AC cord with corresponding wall plug e Power Supply adapter including DC cable e USB cable No tools are required Figure 37 Advanced Charger connections o Ce ara oe From left DC power Ethernet LAN Ethernet PC and USB 1 Connect the AC power supply cord to the adapter 2 Connect the power supply cord to the wall socket 3 Connect the DC cable to the charger The charger LED indicates the status of the charger See table in chapter Operation on page 203 4 Connect the Advanced Charger to the pc with a USB or Ethernet cable One of the Ethernet connections is used for communication with a PC and the other can be used for LAN connection Power over Ethernet is not supported The USB Interface supports USB 2 0 Full speed One Mini B Receptacle USB connector is used The USB connection is used for communication with a PC Power over USB is not supported Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Figure 38 Connection to PDM Software installa
52. 3 Factory Activate e AIWS3 OAP The DECT connection is configured in the AIWS Setup Wizard In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Device Management Remove all IP addresses In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Other gt UNS gt Alias Call ID gt 999999 In the UNITE Address field set to the IP address of AIWS2 plus Phonebook that is if AIWS2 has the address 192 168 0 2 set to 192 168 0 2 Phonebook Figure 92 Setting Unite IP address UNS Alias Call ID configuration Alias Call 1D EN 1999999 UNITE Address EJ 192 168 0 2 Phonebook EEN Factors cancel Activate 300 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Migration to a triple AIWS solution This example assumes that the original system uses one AIWS Enterprise and one AIWS Standard as in Functionality distributed on two AIWS modules on page 296 The AIWS Enterprise AIWS1 handles Device Management The AIWS Standard AlWS2 handles Netpage and the connection to DECT An additional module AIWS OAP shall now be added to the system One reason for this migration is to configure the external application which here is considered to be the most business critical application on one AIWS and the less critical applications Netpage Phonebook and Device Management on the another two AIWSs Change the followi
53. AIWS The telephone is shown as Online v in the Devices view 5 In the Numbers view right click and associate the Number see Associate a Number with a Device on page 337 6 Register the telephone in the PBX Recommended work flow for DECT telephones that are up and running 1 Install and configure AIWS see Installation and Configuration on page 294 2 Connect the telephones to the AIWS When connected the Numbers are shown as Online v in the Device Manager 3 Right click on the entries and Save Central Phonebook administration e For administration of the central phonebook refer to chapter Phonebook Administration on page 316 Daily operation e For the daily operation i e creating and sending messages refer to chapter Operation Messaging on page 314 292 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Introduction Included in the delivery e Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware e Getting started instructions leaflet e Ordinary RJ45 straight through pinouts network cable for connection to the LAN e Licence certificate Technical Solution AIWS consists of a server and a client part The server runs on the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware and is configured from a web interface The Java based client is run on a PC connected to the Local Area Network LAN and is loaded from the server Device Manager Requirements Refer to Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS on page 48
54. Administration on page 316 Note If an LDAP connection to a central phonebook is used all settings needed is done in the setup wizard Technical Specification The local database has defined limitations while most of the limitations for the LDAP server depends on the LDAP server used see table below Max Max Max Max Max Local Database LDAP Server No of phonebook entries 500 2000 Server dependent No of characters in family name 20 Server dependent No of characters in first name 20 Server dependent No of digits in phone number 20 Server dependent No of returned entries request 25 25 telephones that can access the phonebook Depends on telephone type 1 See also documentation for the telephone Phonebook address The default Call ID is 999999 for phonebook access Do as follows to change the address 1 2 oa fF w amp On the AIWS start page click on Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens In the left pane click Other settings gt Advanced configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page opens In the left pane under Other click UNS Click on Alias Call ID Click 999999 in the list Enter the new Call ID for the phonebook i e the Call ID the telephones are using to access the phonebook Check that the Call ID does not conflict with any of the telephones in the system Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 359 Installing and operating AIWS Phonebo
55. Certificate validation is disabled until system 0x000c1000 IPBS time is set Interface down 0x00110000 IPBS Interface not configured 0x00110001 IPBS DHCP server not responding 0x00110002 IPBS Invalid UDP RTP port base range 0x00110019 IPBS Invalid UDP NAT port base range 0x0011001a IPBS Invalid NAT port base range 0x0011001b IPBS Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 497 Troubleshooting Checksum error 0x00110040 IPBS ARP poisoning detected 0x00110041 IPBS Out of TCP NAT ports 0x00110046 IPBS Out of TCP ports 0x00110047 IPBS TCP checksum error 0x00110048 IPBS TCP bind error 0x00110049 IPBS Out of UDP RTP ports 0x00110050 IPBS Out of UDP ports 0x00110051 IPBS UDP checksum error 0x00110052 IPBS UDP bind error 0x00110053 IPBS No route to destination 0x0011005a IPBS No route to destination if down 0x0011005b IPBS No route to destination if unknown 0x0011005c IPBS No route to destination if unconfigured 0x0011005d IPBS No route to destination loop 0x0011005f IPBS Remote LAN sniffer traces The IPBS offers the ability to do remote LAN sniffer traces The IPBS offers a PCAP interface that can be connected by LAN sniffer tools like Wireshark 1 2 3 Go to Diagnostics gt Traces In the IP section select the TCP UDP Traffic check box In the Remote PCAP section select the Enable check box to enable the Remote PCAP interface Now the Remo
56. Choose between Local and ESS users This is the Number list that is used in NetPage In systems without an ESS this parameter shall always be set to Local Creating or Updating the Number list In the NetPage default GUI index html a number list can be accessed by clicking the Search button Before the number list can be used the entries have to be added The number list entries can be created from any CSV file using Microsoft Excel or any leading spreadsheet or relational database application The CSV file is uploaded pasted with the Number list upload program included in NetPage as described below Figure 157 The page for uploading a new or updated CSV file Number list upload Choose CSV file to upload broma Sort order en Second Column Upload file 1 Create a CSV file with the following format First name 1 Surname 1 Phone number 1 First name 2 Surname 2 Phone number 2 404 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Messaging Tool Configuration 2 Open the page http xxx xxx xxx xxx admin user uploadnrlist html Log on with user The default password is password The application shown in figure 157 will appear 3 Browse to find the CSV file Choose the sort order Click on Upload file When the CSV file is uploaded it will be converted and saved as uploadednrlist js The file is a text file with the following format nr_array First name 1 Surnam
57. Device Manager PDM on page 239 or for AIWS details see Upgrade a Device with new Software on page 349 Rackmount Charger Configuration Each Rackmount Charger need access to DHCP to receive an IP address automatically If no DHCP is accessible it is possible to configure with PDM AIWS If the Rackmount Charger is configured to run DHCP connect the network cable and the charger will automatically receive an IP address If the charger is not configured to run DHCP the charger will use the setup IP addresses The following parameters exist for Rackmount Charger and can be changed via AIWS or PDM Parameter Description Ethernet Bit rate auto default Ethernet connector auto default Ethernet duplex auto default DHCP Enabled Yes default No Charger IP address 192 168 0 101 default Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 default Default gateway IP address 192 168 0 1 default DNS IP address 192 168 0 2 default Charger IP port 12346 default Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 233 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger Service Discovery Enabled Yes default No Service Discovery Domain Name of domain DH IP address one DH only 192 168 0 3 default DH IP port 10147 default 1 Currently only auto setting is available Follow this instruction to set Rackmount Charger parameters 1 Check that the Rackmount Charger
58. Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware are shown 3 Navigate to Install software and follow instructions Note The eas files must be used to update the application software It is possible to update the software over a remote connection However note that it is not possible to update software on the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware that handles the remote connection Replacing an Image on the Compact Flash The complete Compact Flash image has to be replaced if the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware operating system has been updated A Important When a new image is installed all information on the Compact Flash will be replaced this includes all IP settings It is strongly recommended to take a backup of the parameters before the image is installed in order to be able to recover the unit to original setup Refer to Backup and Restore of NetPage files on page 408 1 Open the page xxx xxx xxx xxx system Press Software Navigate to Install Image Follow the instructions on the page Select parameter backup and take a backup of the current configuration incl network setup and license key 4 Select start installation The AIWS will reboot in image installation mode If the automatic redirect fails after the reboot press the back button in your browser If this fails either open the page http xxx xxx xxx xxx install manually Refer to Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS on page 511 to get further information 5 Select the
59. Ethernet connection Status of LED2 upper LED Description Not lit IPBS operational and no traffic Air synchronization OK Steady green IPBS operational and traffic Air synchronization OK Slow flashing green Air synchronization OK and fully occupied with traffic Flashing amber Air synchronization inadequate and no traffic Slow flashing amber Air synchronization inadequate and fully occupied with traffic Steady amber Air synchronization inadequate and traffic Flashing red No air synchronization searching for air sync candidates 54 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Description Quick flashing red Download of RFP software in progress Flashing steady amber The radio is switched off in the Master a red green common setup for the Master because of a missing air synchronization Note All amber statuses are warnings that Air synchronization although still adequate is fading and might be lost A flashing red indicates lost Air synchronization IP DECT Base Station with External Antennas The IPBS is available with two omni directional external antennas Other external antennas can be mounted as well This section contains the differences between the IPBS with internal and external antennas For all other information see IP DECT Base Station with Internal Antenna on page 53 Contents of the Box The box in which t
60. Headset gt Headset type gt User headset profile When a name has been configured for the profile it will be visible and selectable in the telephone menu The following parameters can be set e microphone gain e speaker gain Note Changing these parameters may result in a very high sound level which can cause hearing damage Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 167 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones Note Changing these parameters may result in lower sound quality such as noise and echo If audio problems occur it is noticeable for the person listening on the conversation Evaluate carefully before applying Owner identification in the idle display It is possible to add owner identification in standby mode of the telephone In a template or Number in PDM AIWS the parameter is found at Settings gt Owner ID Note It is also possible to configure the Owner ID via the telephone menu See User Manual Avaya 3725 telephone Profiles This feature is included in 3725 not in 3720 It is possible to set up an own profile for incoming calls message alerts vibrating alerts key sound etc This can be useful when there are many users on the same telephone and they want different sound profiles It can also be used for temporarily settings for example while in a meeting incoming calls should be silent Profiles are configured via parameters in the Profiles folder Note It is also possible t
61. IP address must be used Setting the UP1 Parameters 140 The applet saves the configuration in a line starting config change UP1 The full syntax is config change UP1 url lt url gt poll lt slow gt poll fast lt fast gt disc If the URL ends with a then a default filename is used based upon the product in question If for example the URL is http 1 2 3 4 configs it is expanded to http 1 2 3 4 configs update IPBS htm The product type name used is the one used in the Version line on the devices Info page Note that the extension is irrelevant htm or txt or no extension at all may be used On some Web servers URLs are case sensitive The maintenance command file is retrieved initially after the configured poll interval in minutes is expired after boot Short poll intervals can create substantial load on a big network A value less than 15 minutes which is the default is therefore not recommended However for new devices that is devices which have been reset to factory settings and never had a successful download of a maintenance command file the command file is retrieved every minute for up to 30 minutes This is done so that a fresh device can quickly retrieve a site depending standard configuration when it is installed You can change this initial polling interval using the poll fast lt fast gt parameter this is not recommended The disc parameter can be specified to force the device to close
62. Import Export in the left menu Import Export Central Phonebook Entries Export Export phonebook Export Import Import phonebook Separator character Import file Durchsuchen Import All previous entries will be removed 4 Click Browse to locate the CSV file in the system 5 5 select the delimiter TAB comma or semicolon used in the CSV file 6 Click Import Export the Phonebook to a CSV File The complete phonebook can be exported to a CSV file for example for editing or backup reasons 1 Click Phonebook on the start page 2 Enter User name and Password and click OK 320 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Messaging 3 Select Phonebook gt Import Export in the left menu Import Export Central Phonebook Entries Export Export phonebook Export Import Import phonebook Separator character Import file Durchsuchen Import All previous entries will be removed Click Export Click Save in the dialogue window that appears Enter a name of the file and select in which folder the file should be saved Click Save yD A Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 321 Installing and operating AIWS Device Manager Figure 105 Device Manager button on AIWS start page Device Manager Device Management is the general term of managing devices Centralized Management implies that devices are managed from a
63. In Telephone Configuration on page 159 there are examples of configurations that can be made 1 Configure the telephone using the PDM AIWS see Configure a Telephone with a Template on page 149 Subscribe the telephone 1 1 Subscribe the telephone towards the DECT system The subscription procedure is described in User Manual Avaya 3725 telephone In order to easily identify the telephone both the IPDI and the User ID are shown in the telephone when initiating the subscription procedure Configure a Telephone with a Template Note Ask your supplier for example templates valid for 3725 3720 and your PBX Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 149 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones It is possible to select a telephone in PDM and directly change one or more configuration parameters It is recommended to use a template to apply configuration changes to telephones A template contains one or more parameter settings By using a template the same configuration can easily be applied to many telephones simultaneously Templates are an efficient way to give good control over which changes that are applied to each telephone This enables configuration of all aspects of a telephone from sound volume to keypad shortcuts Your supplier can provide example templates for different PBX s The telephone will have full functionality towards the PBX even without such a template By using such a template though the
64. Location ID former region ID set in the IPBS Master or Standby Master needs to correspond to one of the configured Location ID former Region IDs in the AIWS The digit treatment for a central phonebook query in the handsets will be done according to the defined rules for the Location former IP region of the IPBS Master and Standby Master the handset is connected to Multiple IPBS Masters and Standby Masters in an IP DECT system can use the same Location ID former Region ID so they will use the same digit treatment rules e Country Code The Country Code is the prefix to be used when dialling to a particular country from another country The country code is what follows after the in a telephone number The value is used to identify the country code in the number and remove it when it is not needed e National Destination Code The National Destination Code NDC is what follows after the country code in a telephone number The value is used to identify the NDC in the telephone number and remove it when it is not needed e International Prefix The International Prefix is used to dial a call from a particular country to another country This is followed by the country code for the destination country This value is used to replace the character when an international call is made e National Prefix National Prefix is used to make a call within a country from one city to another The national prefix is followed by the national
65. Log Delay Time starts ticking If the device does not log in again within that time a Status Report is sent to the Fault Log 1 DD SANA g3 91 2 9 NO Login to AIWS Click Configuration In the left pane select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration In the left pane select Device Handling Click on the device type to change settings for Enter On line Status Report Time in minutes To set the margin enter Status Log Delay Time in minutes Click Activate On line Status Report Time for portable devices in a charging unit It is possible to set how often a portable device type placed in a charging unit must log in in order to be considered on line This is called On line Status Report Time If the device has not logged in again within the On line Status Report Time it will be considered off line 1 Login to AIWS 2 Click Configuration 3 Inthe left pane select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration 4 Inthe left pane select Device Handling 5 Click on the device type to change settings for 6 Enter On line Status Report Time in minutes 7 Click Activate 376 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration Additional System Settings Unite Name Server UNS The UNS is used to resolve addresses into complete destinations The AIWS can be configured to send all requests to the local UNS stand alone mode or to forward all requests to a centralized UNS forwardin
66. Note It is not possible searching for phonebook numbers To import a number list used by the NetPage refer to NetPage Configuration on page 402 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 315 Installing and operating AIWS 3 Enter message text in the Message text field All possible characters are shown in Characters for SMS on page 173 Enter Beep code and Prio Click Send Phonebook Administration The phonebook administration in this chapter requires authentication on user level For further configuration see Central Phonebook Configuration on page 358 Figure 103 Phonebook button on AIWS start page Phonebook The phonebook makes it possible for users to search and find phonebook entries from a telephone in the system If a local phonebook is used the entries must be added either by creating them manually refer to Add Entries to the Phonebook on page 316 or importing them from a CSV file see Import Entries to the Phonebook from a CSV File on page 319 Phonebook Editing Add Entries to the Phonebook The entries in the phonebook can be filled in manually 1 Click Phonebook on the start page 2 Enter User name and Password and click OK 3 Select Phonebook gt Edit in the left menu 4 Click Add button and enter the information needed in the text fields as described in Add Entry Manually below 316 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Me
67. OS A 315 Phonebook Administration ee eee 316 Phonebook Editing o s o aa a A es a id 316 Import and Export a Phonebook 319 Device Manager 6 666 es dci 322 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 11 Contents Device Manager description 322 E AAA ee ee ee ae ew ke SS 329 Templates in Device Manager 329 UIT a ARIAS ARA ea 333 DOS a eee aa a AI O a 338 Pile management o lt lt lt rr AAA 342 Import and EXport s ss ercan hb Rae Ok a AA A 352 Other SOUINES o eos daria AAA AAA ARA 353 Close the Device Manager o 354 DECT Interfaco csore tereta Oe Se ee we Re a 355 Cordless Telephone System o 355 DECT Interface settings ios nase 356 Basic Configuration s s s saa aama marae A 358 Central Phonebook Configuration o 358 IS ANA 369 Backup the Configuration a soes eraio metea ee et 373 Restore the Configuration 374 Device Configuration s saca lt lt 1 stars 375 Additional System Settings a aoaaa 377 Absence Handlings ck ae Gee ce SESE AAA 384 Remote Management 666s 2 ED ee A Ow 384 Language and User Interface aoaaa 386 Customize the Language 2 2 ee eee eee ee es 387 Customize
68. R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Figure 23 Assigning a name username and password AVAYA IP DECT Base Station Configuration Info Admin Update NTP Logging HTTP HTTPClient SNMP Certificates General LAN 1P LDAP DECT Passwor dew ee ween UNITE Confirm Passwor d weeeeeee Administration Password options Users Device Overview Traffic Backup Update Do not all Diagnostics Additional Administrator Accounts User Name Password Confirm Password Reset Administrator Change User Name and Password The user name and password is used to access the IPBS through the web GUI 1 Select General gt Admin 2 Write a user name in the User Name text field 3 Enter a new password in the Password text field Repeat the password in the second text field 4 Click OK Name the IPBS Each IPBS can be assigned a name It is recommended to assign a descriptive name for example IPBS location 1 Select General gt Admin 2 Enter a name in the Device Name text field 3 Click OK Configure Automatic Firmware Update The IPBS can be configured to automatically update its firmware A script file must be uploaded to a suitable directory on an internal web server For information on the script file syntax see How to Use the Update Server on page 139 1 Select General gt Update 2 Enter the URL of the script file in the URL text field 3 Enter the poll interval in minutes in the Inte
69. REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ TXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is separately shown on the label Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following table Manufacturer s FIC Code SOC REN A S Network Jacks Port Identifier Code Off premises OL13C 9 0F RJ2GX RJ21X station RJ11C DID trunk 02RV2 T AS 2 RJ2GX RJ21X RJ11C CO trunk 02GS2 0 3A RJ21X RJ11C 02LS2 0 3A RJ21X RJ11C Tie trunk TL31M 9 0F RJ2GX Basic Rate 021S5 6 0F 6 0Y RJ49C Interface 1 544 digital 04DU9 BN 6 0F RJ48C RJ48M interface 04DU9 1KN 6 0F RJ48C RJ48M 04DU9 1SN 6 0F RJ48C RJ48M 120A4 channel 04DU9 DN 6 0Y RJ48C service unit If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the elephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make nece
70. Se EE ER ee a a 223 Technical Soltions ass Coa a we E a ee A 224 Requirements 2 0 eee ee 224 Installation and Configuration aaao 225 Rackmount Charger Installation 225 Rackmount Charger Configuration o 233 COMMISSIONING lt a sorrerara sesa iek ee Oe ee ee eS 234 installation test o e RR AAA AAA RA HORS a 235 GAIN 5 6 6 666 ss 6 OSS A A AAA A 235 Communication with AIWS or PDM lt lt 235 COSAS ei e e ac OS ES a AR Ry RA AS a aG 236 Charger DPS ciar ass 236 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 9 Contents LED indleatloOns ouch HEA SEK OEE TESS RASH ETE SE Sw 237 Maintenance s ec esde do o Gee ee RR we 238 ponware Upgrado oe c ce k ER a ia al a aa 238 AGMINISHAHON sco mai A AA ARA 238 Data backup i rencias ARA 238 Troubleshooting 00 de co A ARA AA AA 238 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM 239 troduction fc o a A AAA AA AS ES A a 239 How to Use this Chapter eee 240 Technical SOMO esos cc a a AA 240 Requirements ee 241 PDM description a ccc bac Pee noria 242 POM terminology gt r ecra ek eh ere eRe eee ee e 242 POM GAGE s gt soraa aaa A ARA NA ROOD A OR SOO 242 Installation and Configuration o 244 Software Installation 2 4 244 Software
71. Server AIWS Hardware should have the address 00 and other modules that are connected to the A bus must have addresses in the range 01 0F See also Message Distribution on page 447 and documentation for the System 900 Required Hardware Modifications When Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware shall control the communication on the A B bus jumper points S4 and S5 has to be soldered see figure 168 below Figure 168 Jumper points for configuring the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware unit to be a communication controller on A B bus 434 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Mounting Dimensions for installation of the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Dimensions H x W x D 275 x 130 x 60 mm A A 56 5 1112 i FP po E AA 9 9 275 188 5 Y res ES 65 a 130 E Note To facilitate service after the unit is installed we recommend a free space of about 150 mm above and 50 mm below the unit Mounting Together with Other Units 1 Remove the rectangular 1 and circular 2 covers Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide Installation 05 2010 435 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 2 The rectangular covers are used to fasten units to each other 3 and 4 3 Fasten the unit with three screws see the illustrati
72. The Battery Pack Charger CR4 shall be connected to 100 240VAC 0 7A 50 60 Hz For safety reasons e the safety covers on top of the supply voltage terminal blocks must be mounted to prevent hazardous situations like electric shock e when servicing the units the mains power supply cable must be disconnected Note the following for PERMANENTLY CONNECTED EQUIPMENT a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the building installation wiring The disconnect device shall disconnect both poles for PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT the socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible In Sweden Norway and Finland the unit must be connected to a wall outlet with protective earth safety grounding For other countries it is recommended to use a protective earth connection e Suomi Laite on liitettava suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan e Norge Apparatet ma tillkoples jordet stikkontakt e Sverige Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag 208 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Introduction Compliance Regulatory Compliance Statements EU EFTA only Permission and Conformity We Avaya GmbH amp Co KG declare that the product line Avaya Multiple Battery Charger concurs with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of EU Directive 1999 5 EU concerning radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and themutual recognit
73. Traffic Capacity of the System on page 45 full coverage can be achieved by 4 base stations This means that all cordless phones generate together 55 x 0 200 11 E while the base stations traffic capacity is only 4 x 2 7 10 8 erlang This is too little This discrepancy can be solved by adding another base station nearby the busiest part of the company Practically the total capacity offered by the cordless network is generally more than sufficient but this is from an average point of view On certain places traffic demands may vary such that locally the network is often blocking or has a lower GOS than required For instance a purchase department may easily generate 300 mE per cordless phone during busy hour thus when e g with 6 persons giving a very high load on the base station close by It may be necessary to add a base station in this area to have enough capacity for others to call as well Also think of e g canteens during lunch time etc 46 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Location of the Base Stations Location of the Base Stations Once the surroundings are analysed and the average cell size is determined an exact position for each base station must be decided The most important thing when deciding the location is to ensure sufficient coverage and traffic capacity Deciding factors when determine the location are as follows e Clients requirements see Client s Requirements on page 34 e
74. Y Synchronized v Templates Tab Select the Templates tab The view shows all templates configured at the site in a detailed list The following information can be displayed e Name the name of the template Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 251 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM e Device type the device model e Parameter Version shows the parameter version Figure 64 The Templates tab showing a list of templates in a system OurSite Ascom WinPDM File Template Options Help Devices Numbers Templates New Edit Delete Device types Search for in Name J Show all Name Device type Parameter version Desktop Charger Ad 2 0 d62 My d62 Template d62 24 7 1 item selected The New Device Wizard When a new device is received from your supplier and it is placed in the charger the New Device Wizard window opens 252 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Figure 65 New Device Wizard gt New Device Wizard Welcome to the Found New Device Wizard Ascom WinPDM has detected a new d62 device with parameter version 19 1 What do you wish to do with this device There are no compatible numbers For this device There are no compatible templates For this device Do nothing Close this dialog without any Further actions Click OK to continue In the New Device Wizard there are three
75. a code consisting of 4 to 8 numbers 0 9 1 Select DECT gt System Note To access the System tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Enter an authentication code in the Authentication Code text field 3 Click OK Set Default Language If the telephone does not send language information to the system this setting determine which language that is displayed for some text messages for example hung up and disconnected 1 Select DECT gt System Note To access the System tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Choose language in the Default Language drop down list 3 Click OK Set Frequency Band The IPBS can operate in the following frequency bands e 1880 1900 MHz Europe Africa Middle East Australia New Zeeland and Asia e 1910 1930 MHz South America e 1920 1930 MHz North America Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 111 Installing and operating IPBS 1 Select DECT gt System Note To access the System tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Select frequency area in the Frequency drop down list A Important You must select the correct frequency band for your region Otherwise you will violate local laws 3 Click OK 4 Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Enable Carriers The IPBS has 5 carriers for the North American frequency band and
76. and remove the cover 2 Figure 166 Opening the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware housing Wiring Runs The plastic partition is scored to facilitate breaking at convenient intervals Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 431 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 1 Use pliers to break off a suitable section 2 Run the wiring out through the partition Wiring can be run three ways from the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware e Remove the rectangular covers and run the cabling out through the side 1 e Break off sections at short side of case and run the cabling downwards 2 e Run the cabling through the round holes at the bottom of the case 3 3 Secure the wiring with cable straps Selection of A or B bus When modular bus cabling is used for connection of the System 900 bus the A bus is used default To use the B bus remove the 0 ohm resistors R111 and R112 from the circuit board and solder jumper points S1 and S2 R111 and R112 are situated on the bottom side of the circuit board See figure 167 on page 433 432 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation Figure 167 Jumper points for adjusting the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware unit to use the System 900 B bus instead of the A bus P Ly E T T2 S aI Biv es rs2322 RS232 1 900 96 12
77. appears 4 Find and select a file containing contacts txt Click Open 5 The contacts in the imported file are synchronized with the handset 264 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Devices A device can be a Avaya 3720 3725 DECT Telephone a Rackmount Charger or an Advanced Charger All work with devices is performed from the Devices view e Devices can be added to a site by connecting the device to the PC e Itis possible to transfer the information for a Number from one device to a new device e Devices can be reset to factory settings e Devices can be updated with new software Add Devices to a Site Note Before connecting a device to the PDM make sure the connection is set up according to the instructions in the device s Configuration or Installation Manual If a range of new devices are to be added to a site the easiest way is to 1 Create a template with all common parameter settings for the site See Create a Parameter Template on page 280 2 Add a range of Numbers and run the template See Create New Numbers on page 258 and Run a Template to Set Parameter Values on page 261 Edit the parameters and change individual settings See Edit Parameters on page 259 Comnect the physical devices one after the other and associate them with the Numbers in the site database See Associate a Number with a Device on page 262 A single device can be added in the same
78. are connected to the power supply via an AC plug A Important Disconnect the power supply connection before working on the units 1 If the additional Rack Charger has not yet been mounted on the wall do this according to figure 43 on page 214 Open the top cover of the rack charger closer to the AC power source Remove the cover which protects the unused AC output terminal block of the charger closer to the AC power source 4 Mount the cable support holder at the unused opening in the charger closer to the AC power source The cable support holder is provided in the parts bag See figure 45 216 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Figure 45 The Rectangular Cover that shall be removed and exchanged with a Cable Support Holder with a Mains power supply cord run through it 010 5 Remove the C14 connector from the additional charger Cut and strip the mains power supply cord coming from the additional charger to the length required 6 Run the power supply cord from the additional charger through the cable support holder of the previous charger see figure 46 Figure 46 Securing the mains power supply cable 008 7 Connect the power supply cord from the additional charger to the unused terminal block in the charger closer to the AC power source Note the embossed markings L earth symbol and N see figure 47 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05
79. be much difference in coverage of the internal and external antennas Some areas that are covered by the internal antennas will not be covered by the external and vice versa In an environment with low reflections the somewhat directional behaviour forward bias of the internal antennas will be noticeable see figure 11 It may be worth trying to place base stations horizontally in order to get more vertical coverage in for example stair wells Figure 11 Antenna pattern of the Internal and External Antennas Front Coverage Area Internal Antennas Coverage Area External Antennas A Base Station x x e A Do a E gt Rear 010 Base Station Seen from Above Directional Antennas It is possible to use directional antennas in small corridors and halls Give careful consideration to the type of antenna that you intend using for your application why that antenna in particular The fact is that there are many different types of antenna all with a different radiation pattern It is difficult to summarize the type of antenna and the application it is often a question of experience and empiricism It may be for example that you achieve the best result by mounting the base stations on the ceiling allowing the antennas to radiate vertically downwards It is possible that you need a beam that is very directional horizontally but has a wider radiation pattern vertically for example an extremely high hall or precisely the opposite It is ad
80. bus with Central Unit Status Function Indicator Error Relay Communication with the Cordless Green Operates Telephone System and the Central Unit Communication with the Cordless Flashing orange Released Telephone System but not with the 100ms ON 100 ms OFF Central Unit or Communication with the Central Unit but not with the Cordless Telephone System Shut down Flashing red Released 1000ms ON 3000 ms OFF Restart or reboot Flashing orange Released 100ms ON 800 ms OFF Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 417 Installing and operating AIWS AIWS connected to A bus without Central Unit or A bus not connected 100ms ON 800 ms OFF Status Function Indicator Error Relay Communication with the Cordless Green Operates Telephone System A bus connection does not change the indication No communication with the Cordless Telephone System Shut down Flashing red Released 1000ms ON 3000 ms OFF Restart or reboot Flashing orange Released For information about other LED indications see Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 421 File types In this appendix the different file extensions that are used in PDM and AIWS are explained System files are not described Not used by PDM File type Extension Description Software file devices bin Software for devices Phonebook file cpb Company Phonebook file for
81. central application The Centralized Management concept gives several advantages when administrating devices Centralized Management makes it possible to handle parameters and software for devices on site on a central workstation or remotely The Device Manager can manage large sets of devices and contains a solution for e Centralized software upgrade on a set of devices e Centralized configuration of devices e Central database storage for all device settings e Noneed to collect all devices when upgrading software or changing settings This section gives a description of the Device Manager in AIWS and how it is intended to be used In the Device Manager much of the work is done with Devices Numbers and Templates A Device can be a telephone a charger etc A Number consists of the parameters belonging to a certain device A Template can be used to set parameters that are common for several devices of a certain device type The template can later be applied to a certain Number A Important The AIWS server shall always be switched on Device Manager description Device Manager terminology This section gives a brief description of the core terminology in the Device Manager e Device can be a charger or a portable device that can be connected to AIWS 322 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Number the complete settings for a single device Also chargers have a Number Template general
82. choices e Associate with Number The associate with device dialogue opens Association means that all parameters are transferred to the device If the information There are no compatible numbers for this device is shown it means that no Numbers for that device type have been created in PDM e Run template The Run template dialogue opens The parameter values included in the template are transferred to the device If the information There are no compatible templates for this device is shown it means that no templates for that device type have been created in PDM e Do nothing The wizard closes without any action Associate with Number 1 Select Associate with number Click Next The Associate device dialogue opens with a list of numbers from the database a PA Select a number and click OK Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 253 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM 5 The parameters in the database are synchronized to the device Run template In the New Device Wizard window select Run template Click Next The Run template dialogue opens with a list of templates Select a template and click Next oo PN S The template is now applied to the device Do nothing 1 In the New Device Wizard window select Do nothing 2 Click OK 3 The New Device Wizard window closes The New Device Wizard window also closes if Cancel is clicked The New Number Wizard When
83. command gt ireset resets the device as soon it is idle reset resets the device immediately iresetn resets the device as soon it is idle only if a reset is required resetn resets the device immediately only if a reset is required ser this is a no op Often configuration changes shall be made only during certain times e g non working hours This can be achieved using the times command mod Communication Managerd UP1 times allow lt hours gt initial lt minutes gt The times command will check the current time against lt hours gt If it does not match this restriction any further processing of the command file is cancelled lt hours gt is a comma separated list of hours Only those hours listed are considered valid times for execution of the command file mod Communication Managerd UP1 times allow 12 23 1 2 3 4 The command above allows command executions only between 12 00 and 12 59 and 23 00 and 4 59 local time on a 24h clock Note that if the device has no time set all command executions will be cancelled If the initial parameter is set the no commands will be executed within the first lt minutes gt minutes after the device has been booted This is done to avoid firmware download and flashing when installing devices mod Communication Managerd UP1 times allow 12 23 1 2 3 4 initial 6 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 141 Installing and operating IP
84. connector J OfO a Error Relay connector D DECT or GSM e Tools Description Function Indicator Refer to the table Function Indicator on page 428 or Getting Started on page 412 LED6 ON Communication on Ethernet Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 515 Troubleshooting LED7 ON 100MBit s OFF 10MBit s Unlicenced mode Unlicenced mode is activated by SW3 section 5 pin 5 refer to Selection of Operating Mode on page 427 and a restart AIWS will run with full functionality for 2 hours then it stops If it works in unlicenced mode and not in normal mode you probably have a licence problem Refer to Licence on page 425 to install the valid license Variants on page 485 describes which features are supported by which kind of licenses Note Do not forget to switch back to normal mode and restart the module Advanced Troubleshooting AIWS Advanced Configuration page requires administrator or system administrator rights includes pages for advanced troubleshooting 1 2 Click Configuration on the start page The AIWS Configuration page appears Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu The AIWS Advanced Configuration page appears Click the Troubleshoot button The Troubleshoot page appears In the left menu in the Troubleshoot page there are links to pages where it is possible to view logs and find detailed i
85. customers not planning on having their certificates signed by public or private CAs Self signed certificates provide encryption but do in most cases not provide authentication For more information see Self signed Certificates on page 99 3 Certificates signed by a Certificate Authority CA Two options are possible 62 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 IP Security a Certificates signed by the customer s own CA Customers possessing the knowledge and intrastructure to house their own CA could build an internal enterprise CA enabling them to sign approve their own certificate requests This would make the customer a private CA b Certificates signed by a trusted public third party entity organization There are only about a dozen issuers who have the authority to sign certificates for servers worldwide An example is VeriSign To use a public CA for certificate approvals the IP DECT system would in most cases need to be connected to the Internet and hold a fully qualified domain name For more information see Certificate Signing Request CSR on page 101 IP DECT Administrative functions Configuration HTTP The HTTP Tab is used to configure the type of web access that should be allowed for the device includes a field for configuring https access For more information see Configure the HTTP settings on page 95 Configuration Certificates The Certificates tab lists the certificate us
86. destination code for the destination of the call This value is used for two purposes To identify the national prefix in the number and remove it when it is not needed To change a number when the destination is another city e External Line Prefix External Line Prefix is what needs to be dialled before the number to reach the public network The value is used to change the telephone number if it is identified as an external number 368 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Status Basic Configuration PBX First Prefix PBX First Prefix is what precedes an internal number to create an external number This value is used to compare with the phonebook number to decide whether the number is internal or external PBX Second Prefix Points out an additional prefix to be handled in the same way as PBX First prefix Maximum size of internal telephone numbers Used for numbers that starts with a digit instead of or If the number is longer than this value it is considered to be an external number Minimum size of global telephone numbers Used for numbers that starts with a digit instead of or If the number is equal to or longer than this value it is considered to be a global number On these pages information on active faults or stored faults can be shown Active Faults Active Faults page is where all persistent fault logs are listed For more information about
87. dialogue opens with a list of templates 4 Select a template and click Next 5 The template is now applied to the device Do nothing 1 In the New Device Wizard window select Do nothing 2 Click OK 3 The New Number Wizard window closes The New Number Wizard window also closes if Cancel is clicked Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 255 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Open the PDM 1 Inthe Start menu select All Programs gt Avaya WinPDM gt Avaya WinPDM 2 The view of the last used Site opens To open another site see Open a Site on page 257 Site Management By creating a Site for each customer installation the PDM can manage Numbers software and devices for that site The settings are saved in a database Note There is a subtle but important difference between loading and opening a site When a site is opened the Site management dialogue closes and it is possible to start working with the devices in the site when a site is loaded the Site management dialogue stays open making it possible to continue with site management tasks such as creating and deleting sites Figure 67 Site Management window Site management Name Description OurSiteZ Close Create a New Site 1 In the File menu click Site management The Site management dialogue appears 256 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Clic
88. during the installation of an base station each base station is given an extra length 5 10 metres of cable because it is possible that it will have to be moved for one reason or another Install the Base Station The base station can be mounted vertically or horizontally Mount the base station at places and positions as determined in the base station plan see Planning an IP DECT System on page 31 The base station must be placed in a way that it is not facing large metal objects such as large heating pipes Fix the Mounting Bracket to a Wall Fix the mounting bracket see figure 13 on page 65 to the wall as follows 64 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation of the Base Station 1 Hold the mounting bracket with its flat side against the wall with the text TOP upwards and mark the two holes The minimum distance between the upper hole and the ceiling or any object above the base station must be at least 65 mm see figure 13 If the distance is less than 65 mm the base station cannot be slid onto the bracket 2 When using wall plugs Drill the two holes using a 6 mm drill and insert the included wall plugs 3 Position the mounting bracket with its flat side to the wall and fasten it with the two included 3 5 mm screws Figure 13 Fixing the mounting bracket to a wall Sp 77 A J Ceiling
89. encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver IC Requirements for Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 223 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger Cet appareil num rique de la Classe B conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Technical Solution The following functionality is provided by the Rackmount Charger e Provide a means for software and parameter update of telephones e Charging of the telephone battery The Rackmount Charger has one USB connection and two Ethernet connections When using Ethernet connection it is possible to connect several Rackmount Chargers serially to the LAN If the Rackmount Charger is connected towards PDM via both USB and Ethernet the USB connection has higher priority Note Each Rackmount Charger needs an IP address See label for MAC address The Rackmount Charger is equipped with a combined reset button and embedded LED on the front Requirements Computer e Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2 SP2 or Microsoft Windows Vista Business e Sun Java Runtime Environment JRE version 6 or higher e USB port USB 1 1 required USB 2 0 supported e Ethernet port 10 100 Mbit s 224 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Mai
90. for the Device Manager that the Master is currently connected to is shown under Active Settings Click OK Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Note However if device management is used the IP Address of the AIWS needs to be configured in the UNITE gt SMS tab as well see Configure Messaging on page 122 Configure the Location In a bigger IP DECT system with offices on several locations it is possible to configure one Master Base Station on each office The location ID defined in the AIWS describes the digit handling for centralized phonebook search depending on the location of each Master Base Station For each Master Base Station and Standby Master Base Station the Location ID needs to be defined to select the appropriate digit treatment for your location The AIWS is supporting 100 Locations The location ID need to be between 1 and 250 Each Master Base Station and standby is identified towards the AIWS by a unique number The AIWS is supporting 100 Network Regions It is recommended to set a number between 1 and 100 1 Select UNITE gt SMS Note To access the SMS tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 123 Installing and operating IPBS 2 Enter a number identifying the Location in the Location ID field The region ID set in the IPBS Master or Standby Master needs to correspond to one of th
91. have selected the Standby mode enter the primary Master IP address in its text field Click OK Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Enter Admin Password 1 Select DECT gt System 2 Enter password Note It is recommended to create a backup of the IPBS configuration when the administrator password has been changed see Backup on page 129 Configure Master ID Only applicable on the Master and standby Master The Master ID configuration is only needed in a Multi Base Station Master scenario If only single IPBS Master is used Master ID 0 is recommended In a Multi Base Station Master scenario an individual Master ID for each IPBS Master in the range of 0 and 250 needs to be configured It is recommended to use Master ID 0 for IPBS Master1 which is the LDAP server of the IP DECT system All further IPBS Masters doing the LDAP replication should use a Master ID from 1 to 250 A standby Master needs to use the same Master ID as the corresponding IPBS Master Configure IP PBX Only applicable on the Master 1 Select DECT gt Master 2 Select PBX 3 Enter ARS Prefix for example 00 for calling outside the building 4 Enter International CPN Prefix for example 0046 for Sweden 114 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation 5 Enter National CPN Prefix for example 031 for Goteborg Configure Trunks 1 Enter the IP Address of the P
92. however the site contains for example two buildings and no base station in one building is possible to synchronize to any base station in the other building in this situation a Air Sync Master may be used in each building But if there is air sync coverage between the buildings only one Master is allowed in one of the buildings If two Masters are configured within the same coverage area two different sync systems will be created instead of one This will make handover and roaming between the systems impossible As a consequense the air sync slaves will loose synchronization frequently Configure Air Sync mode 1 Select DECT gt Air Sync 2 Select in the Sync mode drop down list e Master if this IPBS is the Air Sync Master e Backup Master if this IPBS is the Air Sync Backup Master e Slave if this IPBS is an Air Sync Slave 3 Click OK Enable LED Indication of Air Sync LED indication of air sync quality is enabled by marking the LED Indication check box This indication is used to indicate the air sync quality when planning or troubleshooting the system Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 119 Installing and operating IPBS Select Synchronization Source for IPBS in Slave Mode An automatic selection mode is available allowing the IP DECT base station to automatically select another IP DECT base station as a host base The IPBS automatically creates and updates a list of IPBSs within the coverage area A
93. in the next step 5 Enter the timezone string if automatically updates summer winter is desired lt String StdOffset Dst SecondOffset Date Time Date Time gt e Std Name of time zone can be freely defined Allowed characters a z A Z No numbers blanks or special characters allowed for example EST for Eastern Standard Time e Offset time difference between the timezone and the UTC Universal Time Coordinator 92 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Example 1 Eastern Standard Time EST is 5 hours behind UTC EST UTC 5 You have to input the difference between your timezone and UTC i e in this case plus 5 UTC EST 5 but wihtout the sign EST5 Example 2 Use format hh mm for timezones without full hours difference to UTC e g for Indian Standard Time IST UTC 5 30 enter 5 30 UTC IST 5 30 e Dst Name of summertime zone for example EDT for Eastern Daylight Time e Second Offset time difference between the summer time and the UTC e Date Time Date Time beginning and end of summertime date format Mm n d d day of n week in the m month time format hh mm ss in 24 hour format Note that a week always starts on a Sunday and the number for Sunday is 0 Example 1 North Carolina is located in the Eastern Time Zone Eastern Standard Time EST is 5 hours behind UTC StdOffset EST5 the Eastern Daylight Time EDT is 4 hours behind UTC D
94. installation is completed apply AC power by switching on the disconnect device 2 The LED on the front of each charger shall now light up Communication cable connection The communication cable connections are situated under the top cover of the Rackmount Charger Figure 56 Communication connections inside the Rackmount Charger bdb dj o Ethernet connections USB connection When connecting several Rackmount Chargers over Ethernet it is possible to connect them in series using the two Ethernet connections Power over Ethernet is not supported 1 Open the top cover see figure 52 on page 229 232 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Connect the communication cable s to the connections shown in figure 56 Let the communication cables run on top of the cable support holders see figure 54 on page 231 4 Close the top cover The USB Interface supports USB 2 0 Full speed One Mini B Receptacle USB connector is used The USB connection is used for communication with a PC Power over USB is not supported The USB connection is used for connecting the Rackmount Charger directly to a PC or toa LAN for the purpose of upgrading or configuring the Rackmount Charger itself or telephones placed in the charger Software installation The charger software is pre installed Updates can be performed by using PDM or AIWS For PDM details see Installing and operating the Portable
95. is connected to PDM AIWS In PDM or the Device Manager in AIWS click on the Numbers tab Select the Rackmount Charger device that you want to change parameters for In the Number menu click Edit The Edit parameters window opens Edit the parameters you want to edit Click OK oa F amp O N Rackmount Charger does not appear in AIWS If the Rackmount Charger does not appear in the AIWS Device Manager the Service Discovery might not be working in the customers network setup In this case connect the Rackmount Charger to PDM and edit the following parameters e Service Discovery Enabled No e DH IP address one DH only Enter AIWS IP Address Note Service Discovery might not work if the Rackmount Charger is not in the same subnet as the AIWS Commissioning The commissioning includes the following e Installation test e Charging e Communication with Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS or Portable Device Manager PDM 234 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Commissioning Installation test For Installation test see chapter Installation test on page 228 or 235 Charging To verify that the charging works follow these instructions 1 Check that the LED on the front of the charger s is lit 2 Place a telephone in a charging slot Start of charging may be indicated differently depending on telephone model Communication with AIWS or PDM See figure 56 on page 232 to see the
96. label on the backside The hexadecimal numbers xx xx xx xx xx xx represent the MAC address 74 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Configuration Note In order to determine the IP address using this method it is necessary to have a PC with MS Windows It must be connected to the same LAN broadcast domain as the IPBS Determine the IP address following the steps below Note If the IPBS has been used before it must be restored to factory default settings by performing a long hardware reset see Reset Using the Reset Button on page 136 Then remove the power supply cable and connect it again 1 Open a command window in windows by selecting Start gt Run and enter Communication Managerd in the Open text field 2 Enter the following commands C nbtstat R C nbtstat a ipbs xx xx xx Where xx xx xx should be replaced with the last 6 hexadecimal digits of the MAC address 3 The IP address is displayed in the command window see the white frame in figure 20 Figure 20 Determine the IP address ca C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe C gt nbtstat R Successful purge and preload of the NBT Remote C onbtstat a iphs 66 9f h2 Local Area Connection Node IpAddress 172 20 14 281 Scope Id NetBIOS Remote Machine Name Table Status lt BB gt UNIQUE Registered lt BB gt UNIQUE Registered 4 Enter http xxx xxx xxx xxx where xxx xxx xxx xxx is the determined IP address in the browse
97. limit of a Call ID range Messages sent to Call IDs out of this range are cancelled An empty field means no upper limit Note If an upper and or lower limit for the Call ID range is set messages using an Alias Call ID will not be sent anymore The Alias value will not pass the limit check in this case e User login required No or Yes Sets whether a login is required for NetPage If an ESS module is used as User Server users configured in the ESS can also log in This parameter shall be set to no for the default GUI index3 If index4 is used the Message History section must be included Refer to Customize the User Interface GUI on page 391 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 403 Installing and operating AIWS e Automatic logout when idle minutes Sets how long a user can be idle before being logged out To prevent automatic logout leave this field empty If the parameter User login required is set to No leave this field empty e Messaging rights Choose between Call ID range and User rights to determine how NetPage shall verify Call IDs Call ID range means that Call IDs are verified according to the Call ID range limit settings This setting shall always be used for systems without Ascom Enhanced System Service ESS module User rights means that Call IDs are verified according to the settings in the ESS This requires that the parameter User login required is set to Yes e Number list source
98. lt lt eh Saw we Ee ER ee ES Oe RES SG A ES Oe a 421 FCC Compliance Statements for Class A Digital Device 422 EU Compliance Statements for Class A Device 422 Board Description i 6 lt b k e a e a 423 General Informations es da arenas ee we o ee ee a 425 LIA ce be a ARA A Sb a ra 425 Power Down and Restart of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 425 OPENS Modes 000050 Ie 426 Selection of Operating Mode o 427 Function Indicator cece no padie i ados 428 Administration and Authentication 429 INStHIAWOR 22 20 cb cee aaa rara a AAA A 430 Opening the HOUS s ss cora 5420 ais 431 Wining RUNS ace esrara riesa RA AA RARA Oe A 431 Selection of A or B buS mo o oeaoeoeooa 432 Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware controlling the Communication on the A B bus 433 a API S a a a A 435 Mounting Together with Other UnitS a 435 System 900 Addressing aoaaa ee ee 436 Connection of System BuS aaa aa 2 2 437 Connection of Supply Voltage o 439 Additional Connections scoe ss sra os 439 Activation of Battery gt gt id nia era Kee ee RH Ow 442 Connection of Ethernet a a a a 443 Setup of Network Parameters 444 Installation Test Procedure 445 Clock Synchronisa
99. match the new parameters Example If a parameter version for the Number is 2 5 then a parameter definition file with a version between 2 0 and 2 5 is required Import package files Updated package files including new software and parameter definition files are distributed by your supplier A package file can also contain template files To import a package file please follow the steps to import parameter definition files see below or Import new Software for Devices on page 270 Note Parameter definition files def and software files bin may be included in package files pkg or delivered as separate files Import Parameter Definition files Updated parameter definition files are distributed by your supplier 1 Inthe File menu click File management The File management window opens 2 Click on the Parameter definition tab 3 Click Add The Import files window opens 4 Select the definition files to be imported Only files with a corresponding extension are shown such as def and pkg Click Open Check that the newly imported definition files appear in the list Click Close en Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 269 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Figure 75 File management window Parameter definition tab File management Parameter definition Software Language Phonebook Device type Revision Parameter version File Desktop Charger Adva
100. of general rules to consider when placing a base station e Install a base station in line of sight The base station sees the user e tis possible to increase the number of base stations at those locations that are important to the client but the speech quality can deteriorate in other places in the hall because the cordless phone has to carry out more handovers e Place the base station at a minimum height of 3 metres as otherwise it is highly possible that something will be placed in front of the base station and this prevents the materials and machines in the hall reflecting the signal e Ensure that the distance between the base station antennas and a metal wall is at least 30 centimetres to avoid interference with the impedance of the antennas Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 41 Planning an IP DECT System All these considerations of course depend on the dimensions of the hall and the type of antenna which you are using 42 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Determine the Average Cell Size Determine the Average Cell Size To satisfy coverage and traffic demands the site must be surveyed in order to determine the number and position of base stations To do a site survey a site survey tool and ground plans of the floors are required Samples must be taken to determine an average cell size With the average cell size base station positions can be indicated on the map
101. on page 198 to see the connections to the charger Follow these instructions to start PDM or AIWS In the case of Portable Device Manager PDM 1 Check that the charger is connected to your PC via USB 2 Start PDM 3 Go to the Devices tab and verify that the Advanced Charger is online Figure 39 Desktop Charger in PDM Y OurSite Ascom WinPDM File Number Settings Help Devices Numbers Templates a a aX New Edit Delete Device types Search For in Number v Show all Number Device type Parameter version 2 0 Device ID Online Status Saved Last ru Desktop Charger Ad A Synchronized z A In the case of Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS 1 Check that the charger is connected to the LAN 2 Start AIWS 3 Goto the Devices tab and verify that the Advanced Charger is online it may take up to 15 s Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 201 Installing and operating the Advanced Charger For instructions on how to verify that the charger parameter setting works and for further instructions please see Device Manager on page 322 Maintenance Software Update The charger software is pre installed Updates can be performed by using PDM or AIWS For PDM details see Upgrade a Device with new Software on page 274 or for AIWS details see Upgrade a Device with new Software on page 349 202 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenan
102. or rack charger connected to AIWS not needed if an over the air connection is used Navigate to the Numbers tab in AIWS Device Manager The new telephone now has the same User ID as the old telephone It will automatically be synchronized and data and parameter settings from the old telephone will be transferred to the new telephone The synchronization will take a while if the Contacts in the original telephone contains a large number of contacts Telephone replacement with AIWS Scenario 2 1 Make a note of the IPDI of the new telephone It is found by pressing 06 on the telephone 156 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Maintenance 2 Insert the new telephone into a desktop charger or rack charger connected to the AIWS and navigate to the Numbers tab in the Device Manager in AIWS 3 Select the old telephone in the list and make a right click Click Associate with device Select the device with an IPDI that matches your new telephone from the list that appears The new telephone is automatically synchronized and all data and parameter settings will be transferred to the new telephone The synchronization will take a while if the Contacts in the original telephone contains a large number of contacts 4 Subscribe the new telephone Replacement of the telephone with the PDM To see which data that is replaced during this process see Data included in a replacement transfer on page 155
103. other dial codes will be forwarded to the Call Manager This needs to be configured on Master and Standby Master 1 Select DECT gt Suppl Serv Note To access the System tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Select the Enable Supplementary Services check box to activate the supplementary services below The default Activate feature code is preset Note To disable a specific service mark the Disable check box in front 3 Enter the Message Center Number in the Fix Message Center No field 4 Click OK 5 Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Figure 29 Supplementary services AVAYA IP DECT Base Station Configuration System Suppl Serv Master Trunks Radio Radio config PARI SARI Air Sync General Supplementary Services LAN E Enable Supplementary Services IP LDAP Disable Activate DECT Logout User 11 S UNITE Voice Mail Administration Message Center No ES Device Overview Traffic Backup Update Diagnostics Reset The IPBS can operate in four different modes Master Standby Master deployment and off Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 113 Installing and operating IPBS 1 Select DECT gt Master 2 Select in the Mode drop down list e Off if this IPBS is radio only e Active if this IPBS is the Master e Standby if this IPBS is the Standby Master e Deployment 3 If you
104. place two base stations close together separate them with at least 30 Communication Manager Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 49 Planning an IP DECT System e Ensure that during the installation of a base station the base station is given an extra length 5 10 metres of cable because it is possible that it will have to be moved for one reason or another Making a Base Station Plan Once the average cell size is found according to Determine the Average Cell Size on page 43 do the following 1 Make a sketch of all base station positions on the ground plan 2 Indicate the expected speech and air sync coverage for each base station on the map 3 Verify with the site survey tool that the real speech coverage is as expected 4 Verify with the site survey tool that the air sync coverage is as expected Make sure that air sync coverage is sufficient even considered a worst case scenario that is with all doors windows etc closed See Installing and operating IPBS on page 51 5 It is strongly recommended that each IPBS is able to synchronize with at least two other base stations 6 Especially verify coverage in difficult areas such as lifts stair houses and discontinuity in construction 7 If weak areas are found try if re positioning base stations solves it otherwise plan an extra base 8 Select which IPBS should be assigned the role as master The master should ideally be centrally located
105. portable devices Parameter Definition file def type for a certain version Including all possible settings for a certain device and template files tpl Software file AIWS eas Used for package upgrade of AIWS Not used by PDM Image file img Used for complete image upgrade of AIWS Not used by PDM Language file Ing Language file for portable devices Package file pkg Archive that can include different file types such as parameter definition files def software files bin 418 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 File types Site file ste Storage for site specific data These files may not be edited manually Used only by PDM Template file tpl Contains one or more exported templates Number file xcp Exported Numbers Translation file xml eXtensible Markup Language Language file for PDM and AIWS Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 419 Installing and operating AIWS 420 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Introduction The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware AIW hardware can be used as a platform for a wide range of applications It can be used as an interface between systems for example a TCP IP network and the System 900 The licence is application dependent and therefore described in the application documentation The parameter set
106. shall close after clicking Create or if it shall still be open If the bar code reader does not send carriage return click Create Repeat 4 to 6 if more devices are to be created otherwise click Close Assign a Number It is possible to assign a Number to a device that has not yet been assigned a Number in PDM This feature can be used if parameters have been changed on the device prior to connection to PDM Assign shall not be done on a device that already has a device ID See also Associate a Number with a Device on page 262 1 Select the Devices tab Select the device you want to assign a Number for In the Devices menu select Assign number The Assign number to device dialogue opens 4 Enter a new number in the New number field New prefix is optional Click OK Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 267 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Figure 74 The Assign number to device dialogue 5 Assign number to device Assign number to device New prefix New number Cancel 5 The new Number appears in the list in the Devices tab Factory Reset Factory reset means that the device parameters will be reset to factory settings The Number in the database that is associated with the device will not be affected Note The device must be online Select the Devices tab Select device s to be reset In the Device menu click Factory reset Alternatively
107. shock and danger to personal health Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge ESD Integrated circuits are sensitive to ESD To avoid damage caused by ESD service engineers and other people must handle equipment and boards carefully Electronic equipment has become more resistive to ESD but we see an increase of situations where static electricity can build up This is caused by an increasing application of man made fibres like nylon acrylic etc which are capable of generating ESD of 10 000 Volts and more Walking across a nylon carpet even for a few feet could cause a person to be charged up to more than 10 000 Volts Under these conditions if a system board or a C MOS device is touched it could easily be damaged Although the device may not be totally defective it is often degraded causing it to fail at a later date without apparent reason To make sure that equipment and parts are well protected during shipment special packaging materials are utilized System boards will be shipped in anti static bags and C MOS devices and other sensitive parts in small shielded boxes Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 57 Installing and operating IPBS ESD Handling In the interest of quality and reliability it is advisable to observe the following rules when handling system parts e Keep parts in their protective packaging until they are needed e When returning system parts like EEPROMS to the fac
108. template editing windows the following colour coding is used Colour Context Description Black General Normal Dark blue For templates and parameter editing Parameter has been edited during the current session Purple For templates The parameter is included in the template checked Red For templates and parameter editing Value not valid Turqoise For templates and parameter editing The value differs from the default value Navigation For keyboard shortcuts see PDM Keyboard shortcuts on page 286 Tabs The information in PDM is shown in different views or tabs e Devices tab e Numbers tab e Templates tab In each of these tabs specific information is shown in lists about devices Numbers or templates Some of the information overlaps for example Device ID which is tied to both a specific device and to a specific Number The operations that can be done in the Device Manager are done from these tabs and from the menu Different menues are accessible in the diffferent tabs Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 249 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Devices Tab Select the Devices tab The view shows all devices configured at the site in a detailed list The following information can be displayed Device ID the unique identifier of the device Device type the device model Software version the version of the software in the device Parameter version the ver
109. the synchronization between the device and the PDM was not successful If this is the case the PDM should be updated with new software and definition files provided by your local supplier See Import Parameter Definition files on page 269 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 509 Troubleshooting Software Upgrade Fails Verify device is still online Handset needs to be plugged into the Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger Chargers need to be connected via USB to the PC If device is still online try to restart the software upgrade again 510 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS General Troubleshooting Log files When troubleshooting AIWS it is always a good idea to examine the log files since they provide additional information that may prove useful When reporting an error to your supplier always include the appropriate log file To find logs 1 On the AIWS start page click on Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens 2 Inthe left pane click on Other settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page opens Click on Troubleshoot Click on View Info Log View complete Log or View Error Log AIWS Device Manager does Not Start To use the AIWS GUI the computer must fulfill the requirements listed in Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS on page 4
110. the English text see example below Add Group will become Add Group Your translation b Save the file Open the receive html file in a text editor for example Wordpad a Add the translation inside the quotation marks after the English text see example below PARAM NAME English text VALUE Your translation b Save the file Upload paste the files to the FTP area refer to Upload the Files to the AIWS FTP Area on page 399 Refresh the page and check the result All buttons except the Administration buttons will expand decrease when the text is translated The width of the Administration buttons is fixed but can be altered in the HTML file admin html Upload the Files to the AIWS FTP Area Upload paste all updated AIWS files including GIFs and CSS to the AIWS FTP area 1 Log on to AIWS with an FTP client When secure mode is enabled see Web access security settings on page 307 only secure access via HTTPS and FTPES is allowed HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS and FTP access is not allowed The FileZilla Client freeware not included supports FTPES Log on with ftpuser The default password is changemetoo Copy the files and paste them into the FTP area When secure mode is enabled see Web access security settings on page 307 only secure access via HTTPS and FTPES is allowed HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS and FTP access is not allowed The FileZilla Client freewa
111. the http sessions used immediately When the maintenance command file is retrieved the commands found in the file are executed in sequence Theoretically all commands which can be typed in to a telnet session to the device or which appear in a config file can be used in the maintenance file However in most cases you will use config change commands and commands to the UPO UP1 modules Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 How to Use the Update Server The command file is executed every time it is retrieved depending on the poll interval However in most cases you don t want it to be executed each time but only once For example if you are about to deploy a certain configuration change to all IPBSs then you want this change to be done once per IPBS only This can be achieved by the check command mod Communication Managerd UP1 check lt final command gt lt serial gt The devices maintain an internal variable UPDATE CHECK which is initially or when the device is reset to factory settings empty The check command will compare the lt serial gt parameter with the UPDATE CHECK variable If it is equal any further processing of the command file is cancelled If it differs the remainder of the file will be processed and after the last command is executed the UPDATE CHECK variable will be set to lt serial gt and the lt final command gt will be executed The following commands are useful values for lt final
112. the router can use ToS priority control Hexadecimal octal or decimal values can be used 0x10 020 and 16 are all equivalent There are two fields for ToS priority one for RTP Data and one for VoIP Signalling Other types of traffic for example http and Idap are not prioritized and use 0x00 Note Remember that the same value should be set in the ToS field for all devices RTP ports If the ports fields are left blank the ports 16384 to 32767 will be used 1 VoIP Signalling includes roaming handover registrations towards the IP PBX etc Select IP gt Settings 2 Enter the ToS priority value recommended value is 0xb8 in the ToS Priority RTP Data text field 3 Enter the ToS priority value recommended value is 0x68 in the ToS Priority VoIP Signalling text field 4 Select which ports to use for RTP traffic by entering the first port in the First UDP RTP Port text field Enter the number of ports to use in the Number of Ports text field Click OK Routing View the IP routing by Select IP gt Routing Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 105 Installing and operating IPBS LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP protocol is required for systems in which the server and a replicating client access a joint user database All IPBSs in the system have access to the database one of the IPBSs can be configured to be the LDAP server The j
113. this instruction 1 On the AIWS start page click on Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens 2 Inthe left pane click Other settings gt Advanced configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page opens 3 Inthe left pane under Certificates click on Create The Create Self Signed Certificate page opens 310 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 AIWS General Figure 99 The Create Self Signed Certificate page Create Self Signed Certificate The operation will take about 20s This will overwrite existing certificate EN Validity 10 Common Name Organizational Unit Organization Locality State or Province Country 4 On the Create Self Signed Certificate page enter valid parameters for your certificate file Validity and Common name are mandatory Due to security reasons some characters in the ASCIl table are not allowed to use in the fields Common Name Organization Unit Organization Locality State or Province and Country when creating a certificate Among these are 5 8 1 1 gt lt An Wr 5 Click on Create Certificate A certificate file is saved and the web server is restarted Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 311 Installing and operating AIWS AIWS Setup Wizard and Configuration Basic Configuration Steps Figure 100 Setup Wizard button on AIWS start page Setup Wizard K The first time and as lo
114. to each other This makes it possible to fulfil the CAP standard and to use the existing portables One IPBS is configured as a synchronization master From this sync master all other IPBSs adjust there internal crystal oscillator to have the same frequency drift as the master This does not mean all IPBSs need to be within coverage of the master base a IPBS running in slave mode can synchronize to another IPBS in slave mode It is not needed to configure what IPBS to synchronize to This is handled automatically by introducing a proprietary message sent from the IPBSs called air sync hop Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 23 System Description Figure 6 Air and speech sync radius e e i s F r o 80 dBm a i S a i 68 dBm vi 1 l ni l i e 1 l E X x ae qe E a pa 68 dBm aa Z f 3 80 dBm va X x e N Se x A ol Air Sync Coverage Speech Coverage 005 As a single IPBS failure may spread to other IPBSs it is needed for critical systems to install the IPBSs to always be within coverage of at least two alternative IPBSs receiving sync from It is also possible to configure one backup sync masters in case of failure of the sync master Speech radius the radius of the circle circular radiation patterns of the IPBS antennas are assumed around a particular IPBS in which portable parts can communicate with that IPBS
115. used to get a basic understanding of the work flow and is not intended to be followed in work Import a parameter definition file of the corresponding device type to AIWS Create a template from the parameter definition file Add a device to AIWS Create a new Number for the corresponding device type Associate the Number with the device Refer to the following chapters for a description The Device Manager AIWS is opened in a web browser by typing the IP address of AIWS in the address bar Then click Device Manager to reach the Device Manager GUI Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 323 Installing and operating AIWS The Device Manager window consists of three areas Menu Toolbar and Work Area The Toolbar has three tabs Devices Numbers and Templates When one of these tabs is selected the available devices types will be shown in the left hand pane of the work area The right hand pane shows the devices numbers or templates which have already been configured In the upper part of the Work area there are search fields where different search criteria can be selected depending on which tab that is displayed Figure 106 Device Manager window areas Avaya WSM OB Menu File Device Devices Numbers Templates Toolbar 5 k Device types Search for in Device ID v Show all Device ID Device type Software version Parameter version Upor Online Latest 00013e0108de Desktop Charger Advan
116. way Note It is not possible to change model of a device already added to the site Instead a new device of the desired model must be added to the site and the parameters set to the correct values Synchronize a Device When a device is connected it is synchronized with the associated Number in the PDM When parameters have been changed in a device the device can be synchronized with the Number saved in the database When a device is being synchronized parameters that have been changed in the device are uploaded to the PDM and parameters that have been changed in the PDM are sent to the device If a parameter has been changed in both the device and the PDM the setting made in the PDM will take precedence Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 265 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM 1 Select the Numbers tab 2 Connect a device to the computer running the PDM If the Number is saved and it has a parameter definition the device is automatically synchronized While synchronizing a progress bar and a text is shown Delete a Device in the Site Database 1 Select the Devices tab 2 Select the device you want to delete The selected row is highlighted 3 Inthe Device menu select Delete or right click and select Delete 4 Inthe Delete Device dialogue click Yes The dialogue closes and the device is deleted from the list Note You cannot delete a device that is online Repl
117. will be a strange roaming behaviour in the handset that could cause some undefined side effects Additionally the battery standby time will be reduced if the parameter is set to On This parameter was introduced for the hotfix Version 2 8 30 in the 3725 Handset only to improve the idle roaming behaviour in this load as a short term fix The handset will search every few seconds for the IPBS with the best signal strength In later handset releases a more optimized idle roaming behaviour was introduced which is always active for 3720 as well and has much less impact on the battery standby time The parameter has to be kept in the parameter definition to be able to set it to Off in case of updating the handset from the hotfix release 2 8 30 to a later release where this parameter is not needed anymore Site Survey Tool This feature is included in 3725 not in 3720 Protect registration from user deletion It is possible to protect or unprotect a registration from deletion via the telephone menu by altering the parameter Protected flag In a template Number in PDM AIWS the parameter is found at Systems gt System X gt Registration data Emergency Call Number This is a phone number for emergency calls It is always possible to call this number regardless of whether phone lock or key lock are active or not The Parameter is found in a template Number in PDM AIWS in the Settings folder 166 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Main
118. with dispersion in cables and fibres This means that the radio signal can travel by various paths to reach the user because the signal can reach the user directly but also via reflections These possibilities are illustrated in the figure below 40 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Base Station Coverage Figure 9 Time delay spread Reflecting wall A The base station at corner A reaches the cordless phone at corner B by means of a direct signal signal 1 and by means of a reflected indirect signal signal 2 Generally there are many reflected signals reaching the cordless phone In general the paths travelled by these signals are not equal which means in turn that they will arrive at the cordless phone at different times A DECT signal consists of frames of 420 bits transmitted every 10 ms The bit length for DECT is 0 868 us Mutes Interruptions in your conversation and clicks on the line will occur if the time difference between the various received signals is of the order of 1 10 bit length If this occurs the receiver has difficulty in distinguishing between the different transmitted bits Therefore the base stations in a metal hall must be sited in a way that the time delay spread is minimized This means in turn that you must locate the base stations such that the number of reflections is minimized 008 Locations for Base Stations in Metal Halls Apart from the time delay spread there are a number
119. x YYYY MM DD Y HH MM SS Y HEEEREEEE EE 00 00 4 Enter time settings 5 Click Activate The following parameters can be set via the Advanced Configuration page Some of these parameters can also be set in the Setup wizard e Time source e Time server address e Fault log e Time zone e Auto DST adjust e Date format 380 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration e Date separetor e Time Format e Time push time For additional information see also Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 421 Set time If Web browser has been selected as time source the time must be set manually Otherwise this setting shall not be done 1 Under Time click Set time The Set Date and Time page appears Figure 143 The Set Date and Time page Set Date and Time Current date is 2009 06 02 Current time is 06 59 18 reload Please Note The time cannot be set from here unless the Time source parameter in Time Settings is set to Web Browser Local PC Date 2009 06 02 EX los Local PC Time 10 59 48 ES ES 2 Enter date and time Click Submit time Date and time can also be set in the Setup wizard Network Settings 1 Click Configuration on the start page The Configuration page appears 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu on AIWS Configuration page The Advanced Configuration page appears
120. 05 2010 Communication Manager system administration Communication Manager system administration The configuration and administration for IP DECT on Communication Manager 6 0 is now part of the Communication Manager documentation So please refer the following documents e Avaya Aura Communication Manager Feature Description and Implementation e Administering Avaya Aura Communication Manager e Avaya Aura Communication Manager Screen Reference For previous versions of Avaya Communication Manager as Communication Manager 3 1 Communication Manager 4 and Communication Manager 5 you can find the system administration described below The required settings for DECT R4 are highlighted in the screenshots All other settings in the screenshots are only exemplary and dependent on the customer demands Changing all of them to the screenshot values could cause some trouble The special application SA8567 and optional SA9004 needs to be enabled in the license file For Communication Manager 4 and Communication Manager 5 display system parameters special applications Page 4 of El SPECIAL APPLICATIONS SA8481 Replace Calling Party Number with ASAI ANI SA8500 Expanded UUI Display Information SA8506 Altura Interoperability FIPN SA8507 H245 Support With Other Vendors SA8508 Multiple Emergency Access Codes SA8510 NTT Mapping of ISDN Called Party Subaddress IE SA8517 Authorization Code By COR SA85
121. 1 Change trunk configuration on IPBS Master gt DECT gt trunk use same ports on IPBS Master and Communication Manager side both directions Make sure that the port on the Communication Manager side is exclusively used by this signaling group 2 Busy out the configured signaling group on the Communication Manager side wait until trunk in IPBS Master is down release signaling group on Communication Manager side trunk on IPBS Master comes back to active PBX out of service disappears on handset display Enter PIN code Phone lock is activated Enter the required PIN code If the PIN code has been lost enter a new PIN code via PDM AIWS Battery low charge now The battery level is low 3725 Charge the telephone or replace or charge the battery 3720 Charge the battery while the battery is inserted in the telephone or replace the battery Central phonebook is not available at the moment The Central phonebook does not respond or is not activated Verify Central phonebook configuration in the AIWS Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 503 Troubleshooting Display shows Probable cause Action or comment Voice mail number not There is no Voice mail Define a Voice mail number defined number defined in the via the PDM AIWS telephone Systems gt System A gt PBX Settings gt Numbers Could not encrypt connection The parameter Encrypt
122. 1 Currently only auto setting is available 2 The IP address is only valid if DHCP Enabled is set to No Follow this instruction to set Advanced Charger parameters it may be necessary to import a new parameter definitions file 1 Check that the Advanced Charger is connected to PDM AIWS In PDM or the device manager in AIWS click on the Numbers tab Select the Advanced Charger device that you want to change parameters for In the Number menu click Edit Edit the parameters you want to edit Click OK oa fF ON Advanced Charger does not appear in AIWS If the Advanced Charger does not appear in the AIWS Device Manager the Service Discovery might not be working in the customers network setup In this case connect the Advanced Charger to PDM and edit the following parameters e Service Discovery Enabled No e DH IP address one DH only Enter AIWS IP Address Note Service Discovery might not work if the Advanced Charger is not in the same subnet as the AIWS Security information regarding software security N A 200 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Commissioning Commissioning Follow these instructions to verify that the charging works 1 Connect the charger according to chapter Advanced Charger Installation on page 198 2 Place a telephone in the charging slot to start charging The telephone indicates the charging progress see respective user guide for details See figure 37
123. 18 Automatic Callback with Called Party Queuing SA8520 Hoteling Application for IP Terminals SA8558 Increase Automatic MWI amp VuStats S8700 only SA8567 PHS X Station Mobility over IP SA8569 No Service Observing Tone Heard by Agent SA8573 Call xfer via ASAI on CAS Main SA8582 PSA Location and Display Enhancements SA8587 Networked PSA via QSIG Diversion SA8589 Background BSR Polling SA8608 Increase Crisis Alert Buttons S8700 only SA8621 SCH Feature Enhancements Bess ss ew BP eses ssa 5S Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 177 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager Since Communication Manager 4 0 3 and Communication Manager 5 1 Change system parameters specia l applications ECIAL APPLICATIONS IP Softphone Lamp Control panded Public Unknown Table sing special coverage point n Bridged Appearance Labels with EC500 Extension Number SP SA8896 SA8911 Ex SA8917 LSP Redirect u SA8928 Display Names o SA8931 Send IE SA8944 Multiple L SA9004 Multi Location ogins for Single IP Address Call Routing for IP Trunk Page 7 of 7 5305505005 178 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Communication Manager system administration Configure maximum number of DECT R4 X Mobile stations It s not possible to configure X
124. 2010 217 Installing Multiple Battery Charger Figure 47 The mains power supply connection ON 1 e i 006 Mount the safety cover and fasten it with one screw Secure the mains power supply cable with two screws 2 which are provided in the parts bag see figure 46 10 Replace the top cover see figure 44 11 Fasten the power cord to the wall depending on local regulations 12 If more rack chargers shall be connected repeat the above steps 1 12 for the next unit Installation test 1 When the fixed installation is completed apply AC power by switching on the disconnect device Place a battery in the charging slot 3 A yellow LED indicates that charging starts while a green LED indicates a fully charged battery Commissioning The commissioning includes the following e Installation test e Charging Installation test For Installation test see chapter Installation test on page 218 or 213 218 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Charging To verify that the charging works follow these instructions 1 Place a battery in a charging slot 2 A yellow LED indicates that the charging has started while a green LED indicates a fully charged battery Operation When the charger is connected to external power supply normal operation is done as fo
125. 25 IP Statistics o ee e 517 PO as Coed ert eh 172 PEIA get serie en OS te Ba a 172 L Language Call services 0 161 LDAP Parameter Setup 361 LED a ay Bt a 204 237 LED indications 172 e a cig Se wets AE eee eed oh Bh 308 382 LOGE Abe oh eS We halk Ghost aM a 516 LOGGING s ab a eda bed 379 M MAC Address 2 ee 308 Module Fault List 2 2 ee ee ee 517 Module Key 2 ee ee 308 Mounting o 212 226 295 Multiple WSM 0 296 My Groups o 405 N Netpage o 402 Network Settings 2 2 ee 381 Numberlist 2 o o 404 NUMbers 0 20 pi aoa Gaede os Gor Andel oro ind ae 327 05 2010 525 Index O U Open Access Protocol 410 UNS att tye Be i AND Ghee beh ie 377 Operatingmode 4 377 Upgrade atelephone 0 152 Own Line Settings 0 163 USB pOr hocico ii acd 240 509 Owner identification 168 Usar lD ta to las e 172 P W parameter conflict ooo 263 web messaging o oo os oao e wee 402 parameter definition fle 268 parameters ii hag A 233 241 Phonebook o 273 Phonebook Administration 316 physical portable 265 Power td A ders Me Shan o RI 71 Power DOWN 295 Prot s e ba it bith ee a 8 168 Protect registration
126. 3 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 293 Installing and operating AIWS Installation and Configuration After installing the AIWS the basic configuration is easily done with the help of a setup wizard The wizard includes all basic settings needed to get the AIWS up and running Required Information Make sure the following information is available Information required for the Installation e MAC address found on the licence certificate enclosed in delivery e An IP address is needed see leaflet or Getting Started on page 412 Information required for the Configuration e Licence number found on the licence certificate enclosed in delivery e Network parameters ask your network administrator e Type of connected wireless phone system e P address to connected system if connected via IP e Other messaging systems to send messages to optional e LDAP properties if an LDAP server is used for Central Phonebook requests optional Hardware Installation and Configuration For information on installation and configuration Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware see Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 421 Note Attach the ferrite bead on the power supply cable Follow the enclosed assembly card for EMC protection M0271500 Software Installation For information on the software installation see Maintenance Information on page 449 Also see Getting Started on page 412
127. 3 0 2 0 pdm_DC4_p2 0_d3 00 d62 38 03 19 1 pdm_d62_p19 01_d38 Import new Software for Devices Updated software files are distributed by your supplier 1 NP oF N In the File menu click File management The File management window appears Click on the Software tab Click Add The Import files window opens Select the software files to be imported Click Open Check that the newly imported software files appear in the list Click Close 270 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Figure 76 File managing window Software tab File management Parameter definition Software Language Phonebook Device type Version File ADC_0p43p8N bin Charger_Advanced_v0 50 5E bin Import Language files Note There is a difference between Language files Ing described in this section and Translation files xml that are described in Language settings on page 246 Import of translation files are done via the Options menu Updated language files are distributed by your supplier 1 Inthe File menu click File management The File management window opens 2 Click on the Language tab 3 Click Add The Import files window opens 4 Select the language files to be imported Only files with a corresponding extension are shown such as Ing Click Open Check that the newly imported language files appear in the list Click Close a Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Mainten
128. 4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Figure 53 The Rectangular Cover that shall be removed and exchanged with a Cable Support Holder with a Mains power supply cord run through it 010 5 Remove the C14 connector from the additional charger Cut and strip the mains power supply cord coming from the additional charger to the length required 6 Run the power supply cord from the additional charger through the cable support holder of the previous charger see figure 54 Figure 54 Securing the mains power supply cable 008 7 Connect the power supply cord from the additional charger to the unused terminal block in the charger closer to the AC power source Note the embossed markings L earth symbol and N see figure 55 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 231 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger Figure 55 The mains power supply connection en 006 Mount the safety cover and fasten it with one screw Secure the mains power supply cable with two screws 2 which are provided in the parts bag see figure 54 10 Replace the top cover see figure 52 11 Fasten the power cord to the wall depending on local regulations 12 If more rack chargers shall be connected repeat the above steps 1 12 for the next unit Installation test 1 When the fixed
129. 83 If you do not have the correct software versions Java runtime environment installed contact your system administrator AIWS Device Manager does Not Start with Firefox Browser If you are using Firefox as your default browser you will not be able to open AIWS Device Manager You have to set the proxy settings in the Java Control Panel manually 1 Open the Java Control Panel 2 Select General tab 3 Press Network settings button 4 Mark radiobutton Use Proxyserver or checkbox Direct connection Your browser s proxy settings will be automatically copied in the text fields Address and Port 5 Save the settings with OK button Firewall issues or No Indication of Connected Device If there is a firewall between AIWS and any devices the firewall may need some configuration to allow communication Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 511 Troubleshooting Device Does Not Show up in AIWS Device Manager Check if AIWS IP Address is configured in the IPBS see Configure Messaging on page 122 If a connected device does not show up as connected in the Devices view check the status of the interface Starting up mode is indicated during start of applications or if an application has lost connection to a required resource On the AIWS start page click on Configuration then click on Other settings gt Advanced Configuration On the Advanced Configuration page click on Troubleshoot on top of th
130. 8521 st ES Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware controlling the Communication on the A B bus Depending on the software application on the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware it can be used to control the communication on the A bus i e the Central Unit is not used for communication control This can be useful when System 900 is not used for messaging but only to communicate with for example an Alarm Module or Output Module The same information that can be received when the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is connected to an A bus with Central Unit can also be received when it is controlling the communication Examples of information is input activity and pagings from the Alarm Modules see respective software application documentation for more information about the possibilities Alarms and Mobile data from cordless telephones can be transferred from the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware to modules connected to the A bus The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware does not have any other of the Central Unit functionality for example the possibility to address Pocket Units over the A bus or handle absence information received from Charging Racks Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 433 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware System Installation When the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware controls the communication on the A bus a maximum of 15 modules can be connected to the A bus The Elise 2
131. 9 for information on how to save a configuration 1 2 3 4 Select Update gt Config Click Browse and browse to the saved configuration Click Upload Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Update Firmware The software can be updated Follow the steps below to update IPBS with the firmware Download firmware from the IP DECT system provider pe ES Note If this operation is interrupted the firmware in the device will be defect If a firmware upload is for any reason interrupted the firmware must be uploaded again Do not execute a reset before the firmware upload is complete For information on how to load new firmware if the IPBS is unreachable through the web GUI see Troubleshooting IP DECT Base Station IPBS on page 496 Select Update gt Firmware Click Browse and browse to the firmware file Click Upload Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Update the Boot File 1 2 3 4 Select Update gt Boot Click Browse and browse to the boot file Click Upload Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 130 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Diagnostics Logging The IPBS can generate a number of logs which can be useful when supervising and troubleshooting the IP DECT system For information on how to collect the log files see Configure Logging on page 93 F
132. AIWS on page 289 For PDM see Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM on page 239 Preparing PDM AIWS for handling of 3725 3720 If the parameter definition file def file for the telephone is not present in the PDM or AIWS it can be added by following the procedure below The parameter definition file and software files are delivered as a package file with the extension pkg Note that template files tpl may also be included in a package file 1 Open PDM or AIWS 2 In the File menu select Import gt Packages 3 Select the package and click OK The package will imported and the files will be created one definition file with the extension def and one software file with the extension bin Template files may also be created File extensions are further explained in an appendix in Installation and Operation Manual PDM see File types on page 288 and Installation and Operation Manual AIWS see File types on page 418 Installation of a new Telephone The installation basically contains three steps e Subscription towards the DECT system needed to be able to make calls and send messages Mandatory Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 147 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones e Create an identity for the telephone in the PDM AIWS needed to be able to configure the behavior of the telephone and take backups of the telephone configuration Recommended e Co
133. AVAYA Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Administration Manual 21 603363 05 2010 Issue 4 Copyright 2010 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Warranty Avaya Inc provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty In addition Avaya s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product while under warranty is available through the following Web site http www avaya com support Preventing Toll Fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Be aware that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support in the United States and Canada call the Technical Service Center s Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 Disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original publish
134. After the the application service that should take care of the data is specified Below is an example that describes how to distribute data from an Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware software application to an Alarm Management Server e Addressing of an Alarm Management Server XXX XXX XXX xxx EventHandler First the Alarm Management Server IP address is defined After the the application service EventHandler is specified Note For AMS version 3 00 and 3 10 the service cannot be used Instead the correct port on the AMS port number 10010 has to be used for addressing i e XXX XXX XXX O 10010 448 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Maintenance Information Unite Name Server UNS The UNS is used to resolve addresses into complete Unite destinations The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware can be configured to send all requests to the local UNS stand alone mode or to forward all requests to a centralised UNS forwarding mode In forwarding mode the local UNS will only be used if the centralised UNS cannot resolve the address Maintenance Information Replacement of the Compact Flash Note Only Compact Flashes supplied by Ascom Tateco can be used 1 Remove the cover see Opening the Housing on page 431 Perform a power down of the unit see Power Down and Restart of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 425 Remove the circuit board see Circuit Board Replacement on page 452 N
135. BS The command above suppresses any command file processing within the first six minutes after each boot of the device If initial is set new devices or those that have been reset to factory settings the command file will be retrieved even if it normally would be suppressed by the allow parameter This allows new devices to retrieve a site specific standard configuration quickly Setting the UPO Parameters To perform a firmware update use the following command mod Communication Managerd UPO prot lt url gt lt final command gt lt build serial gt The command above downloads the new firmware from lt url gt and flash it to the device then lt final command gt is executed The IPBSs maintain an internal variable UPDATE PROT which is initially or when the device is reset to factory settings empty The prot command will compare the lt build serial gt parameter with the UPDATE PROT variable If it is equal no firmware will be loaded or flashed If there is no UPDATE PROT yet like for a new device lt build serial gt is compared against the build number of the current firmware After a successful download UPDATE PROT is set to lt build serial gt Note that lt build serial gt is not checked against the firmware version actually loaded It is your responsibility to keep this consistent If lt url gt ends with a slash then a default firmware filename is added to the URL depending on the type of the device e g ipb
136. BX in the Communication Server CS IP Address field and the port of the PBX in the Communication Server CS Port field 2 Enter port address of the IPBS in the Local Port field Note If there is a mismatch in Local Port of the IPBS web page and the Far end listen port of the signaling group in the Communication Manager the trunks state is shows as active but only one way communication is possible Figure 30 Trunks AVAYA IP DECT Base Station Configuration System Suppl Serv Master Trunks Radio Radio config PARI SARI Air Sync General Status Inquiry LAN IP Period sec 10 LDAP Trunk List DECT m Primary trunks prioritized Supervision Timeout sec 60 Activate Primary Trunks UNITE Administration ieg Primary Trunks 5 Name Local Port CS IP Address CS Port Status Delete Device Overview Trunki 5000 192 168 42 20 5000 Down o Traffic Backup Update Diagnostics Redundant Trunks Reset Name Local Port CS IP Address CS Port Status Delete Red1 5097 192 168 42 20 5097 Active o There are two kinds of Trunks Primary and Redundant One or more Primary Trunks can be configured They are used in the first place One ore more Redundant Trunks can be configured They are only used if not any Primary Trunk is in Active mode That is all Primary Trunks must be in Down mode Load Balancing There are possibilities to configure several Primary trunks and Redundant trunks for the communication between the IPBS master and the Communicat
137. Both the old telephone and the new telephone must be of the same device type 3725 or 3720 The same extension number is assigned to the new telephone The new telephone should not be subscribed towards the PBX yet 1 Perform a factory reset see Perform a Factory reset on page 152 if the new telephone has been previously used 2 Make sure that the old telephone is saved in the PDM by starting PDM and navigating to the Numbers tab There shall be a tick in the Saved column for the old telephone If the telephone is not saved insert it into an Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger connected to the PDM and perform a save Note If it would be impossible to save the old telephone settings stop this replacement procedure Instead register the new telephone and follow the instructions for installing a telephone see Installation of a new Telephone on page 147 The following steps are described in two different scenarios check which one suits the best before proceeding Telephone replacement with PDM Scenario 1 Subscribe the new telephone with the same extension number as the old telephone During the subscription procedure the PDM identity User ID will automatically be set to be the same as the extension number Note The User ID can be viewed by navigating to the menu Admin menu gt Device info gt User ID Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 157 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones 1 Inse
138. CFR 47 Part 15 Compliance to Australian regulations and standards Product marking C Safety IEC 60950 1 EMC EN 55022 class B EN61000 4 3 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 475 Technical Data Basic Charger Physical Dimensions x w x h 95 x 95 x 55 mm Weight 170 g excl power adapter Material Case PC ABS Rubber feet Colour Charcoal grey Functional Supply voltage 100 240 V 50 60 Hz AC adapter 5 V DC charger Charge current 0 65 A Environmental Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C Storage temperature 20 C to 65 C Enclosure protection IP30 IEC EN60529 Immunity to electromagnetic fields 3 V m EN61000 4 3 Immunity to ESD 4 kV contact discharge and 8 kV air discharge EN61000 4 2 Compliance to European regulations and standards EU directives 2004 108 EC EMC Product marking CE Safety EN60950 1 EMC EN 55022 class B EN61000 4 3 Compliance to US regulations and standards Product marking 57 Safety UL 60950 1 EMC FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Compliance to Canadian regulations and standards Product marking 476 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Charger Safety CSA 60950 1 EMC FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Compliance to Australian regulations and standards Product mark
139. Check that the battery is properly inserted in the charger Check the AC power supply connection 506 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Rackmount Charger Rackmount Charger For general LED indications see also LED indications on page 237 Status LED on the charger is not lit Check that power is supplied If power is supplied and the status LED is still not lit the probable cause is a software error Connect charger to PDM via USB and check if charger goes online If yes check software version of the charger Send charger for service Status LED on the charger is fixed red Connect charger to PDM via USB and check if charger goes online If yes check software version of the charger Send charger for service Status LED is flashing red for 3s then green A factory reset has been performed It may be necessary to set parameters from PDM AIWS Status LED is flashing red 100 ms on 800 ms off for more than 3s An error occurred during Easy Replacement Remove portable from charger Status LED is flashing red 100 ms on 800 ms off for more than 3s If the error occurred during Easy Replacement remove the portable from the charger The charger should return to normal operation Otherwise send charger for service Charging does not start Check that the telephone is properly inserted in the charger Rackmount Charger does not appear in PDM AIWS Check that the communication cable USB or Ethernet
140. Class B device or E NS fy This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference from Information Technology Equipment VCCI If this is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment it may cause radio interference Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual TORE IRA a BERR VCCI o MEITIES lt 7IFAB WRITE CT COMBI ZERK CHA FET RIE LIVES CORBRIVAROTVEV ave HCL TER ANS e RRA ZII ET PEA To CIE LUE Ve LT FAV Sef Dut Downloading documents For the most current versions of documentation see the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Contents System Description 4c06 beeen eee dea ed eee ss 17 Introduction s e ie a ew BO ke RE a a em a 17 Avaya IP DECT System Overview 1 aa et 17 Supported Standards ee 18 System Functions s gt s so ara ee RE eR Ee A 18 DECI FURGHONS c e amaia h oi kA e Eee EEA Ww EES 19 LAM MON 6 4 6 006 28668 E24 Shoe So OBL SESS AA 19 LOOR a ie ty aie Re ee AR Fol el he es le ee Se A 19 TCP IP and UDP IP Port Documentation 0 008 eee eee 19 P DECT INEM errar irradia 20 PUCCIO y ti 6 ee a a AA 20 Synchronization y s e gt s AAN AAA AA A 23 IP DECT System Management ee 25 VolP Signalling Protoc ls cc ra a a oe ore 26 e AER 26 IP DECT Planning and De
141. Configuration 244 Opora 4 a cow ee eRe AA AAA a A a 248 The POM OUl cake a a a si e ho e 248 The New Device Wizard e eee 252 The New Number Wizard 2 e 2 254 Open the PDM 5 4 6240 aa A AR RA a 256 Site Management sas 6 4 nee ee eK ra da 256 ol ui aiia Se che AA AS Pe ee 258 Devices Hee ee EON OAT HOE PAOD eS eS 265 File management o ss ck se VAR ER EH Ce ew AAA 268 IMPOR and EXPO ssi ca oca ee hw eS ww 276 Close the PDM 2 sce hea RR Ow EDD ewe eK Ge SS HOw 278 AQMINISTAON cn how ee ew ARA AAA 279 a AAA A A E 279 Templates caia ia atada A SMBS SE 279 Troubleshooting s gt erto OH OR eS SHOES ED OH OE wR DO 284 Uninstall the POM o shes size a ee ope he A a a ae we oh a Oe ee oe k 285 PDM Keyboard shortcuts a a i ee ee ek ee ee ew 286 Generale ss he we me me ee ee me Bm we ae a he Sr we 286 SS ek dekh ds ae ee ene ae Ae eh de ne te E 286 NUMDES io ded cee a AA KDE OES EDS De Dad 286 Templates 2 6 cba ee ee SKB a AAA AA 287 10 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Contents PUGS s ara area SS ESKER AEA io 288 Installing and operating AIWS eee 289 INMOGUCHION sas be iad eed C4 SO e AAA 289 EM a Sh ke ee ae ee hr eee ee a ke oh ee ay oe 290 CUT y deh eee A Re eh A AA a a a 290 How to Use this Chapter 291 Included in the delivery o
142. Coverage and traffic capacity see Base Station Coverage on page 35 e Synchronization see Synchronization on page 47 e LAN Access see LAN Access on page 47 e Power the base stations see Power the Base Stations on page 47 e Different types of antennas see Antennas on page 48 Synchronization Air Sync Coverage Each IPBS must be placed within the air sync coverage of at least one other base station Since the air sync cover radius is somewhat larger than the speech radius it is often enough to consider the speech coverage when placing the base stations Always ensure that all IPBS are able to synchronize with preferably two but at least one other base station LAN Access Access to the LAN must be considered when placing the IPBSs it should be placed as close as possible to existing LAN ports The cable length limitation of the ethernet 802 3 10 100base T is 100 meters Power the Base Stations Another aspect of base station planning is powering of the base stations The various ways of powering and the requirements on the power supply are described in the Installing and operating IPBS on page 51 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 47 Planning an IP DECT System Antennas This section describes the behaviour of the different types of antennas Internal and External Antennas In an environment with much reflections such as most office environments there will not
143. DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 447 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware e No module addressing 127 0 0 1 S900 The data is sent to the System 900 interface in the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware which sends the data on the A bus without the module address defined The Central Unit in the system has to be configured to distribute the data to a module It is also possible to address the System 900 interface on another module by entering its IP address instead of 127 0 0 1 localhost e Module addressing 127 0 0 1 S900703 The data is sent to the System 900 interface 127 0 0 1 S900 in the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware and is then sent to the module with address 03 in the system It is also possible to address the System 900 interface on another module by entering its IP address instead of 127 0 0 1 localhost e System and module addressing 127 0 0 1 S900 00103 The data is sent to the IMS System 900 interface 127 0 0 1 S900 and is then sent to the module with address 03 on the A bus 00103 within the system with address 00 Addressing another Unite compliant module on the LAN The addressing includes the IP address that the data should be distributed to and also which service on that address that should take care of it How a unit is addressed is described in each units documentation e Addressing of another Unite compliant module XXX XXX XXX XXX Service First the IP address of the module is defined
144. Data Restriction n NCA TSC Trunk Member Send Name n y Format unk pvt UUI IE Treatment service provider n Send Calling Number y Send EMU Visitor CPN n 1 QSIG TRUNK GROUP OPTIONS SBS n QSIG Value Added n Replace Restricted Numbers n Replace Unavailable Numbers n Send Connected Number y Network Call Redirection none Hold Unhold Notifications n Send UUI IE y Modify Tandem Calling Number n Send UCID n Send Codeset 6 7 LAI IE y display trunk group 9 Page 4 of 21 188 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Communication Manager system administration display trunk group 9 Page 5 Of 21 TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 1 10 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Total Administered Members 10 Port Name Night 1 T00051 IP _DECT Tr 2 T00052 IP DECT Tr 3 TO0053 IP DECT Tr 4 T00054 IP _DECT Tr 5 T00055 IP _DECT Tr 6 TOOO56 IP _DECT Tr 7 TO0057 IP_DECT_ Tr 8 T00058 IP _DECT Tr 9 TOOO59 IP DECT Tr 10 T00060 IP _DECT Tr Ls 12 13 14 15 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 189 Configure the station Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager The DECT station administration Type should be XMOBILE the XMOBILE Type is DECT and the Configuration Set should be blank The Avaya 3720 3725 DECT sets support ICON Message Waiting therefore Message Lamp Ext h
145. Environmental Operating temperature 10 C to 55 C Storage temperature 40 C to 70 C Relative operating humidity 15 to 90 non condensing Relative storage humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Enclosure protection IP20 IEC EN60529 Functional Operating voltage 21 to 56 Vdc Power consumption between 1 2 W and 2 0 W depending on the number of calls active RF output power e r p between 20 dBm and 25 dBm depends on direction due to external antenna characteristics Receiver sensitivity at least 86 dBm at B E R 10 3 462 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Base Station RM637 BS340 Compliance to regulations and standards CE regulation 1999 5 EC Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Directive 89 336 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive EMC 73 23 EC Low Voltage Directive LVD Conformity marking cea DECT standard EN 301 406 2001 DECT EN 300 444 2001 TBR22 GAP Safety standard EN60950 1 2001 EMC standard EN301489 6 2002 Accessories Directional single antenna Directional dual antenna Omnidirectional single antenna Outdoor housing Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 463 Technical Data Avaya 3725 DECT Telephone Physical Dimensions x w x d 134 x 53 x 26 mm Weight 130 g
146. Error message field Examples of Settings e Active directory 2003 Figure 127 Settings for Active directory 2003 LDAP Server or Proxy Address Port Number Authentication Method User name Password Search Base DN Number Attribute Type of Name Attribute s Name Attribute s Error message Digit Manipulation Digit Manipulation Enabled Country Code National Destination Code International Prefix National Prefix External Line Prefix PBX First Prefix PBX Second Prefix Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide Phonebook 172209219 389 Simple i ldap user kn Users dc smallbusiness de telep honeNumber given Name sn Separate attributes for first and family name v Unable to reach LDAP database HBHRREREEBHBEH AAA BRBEE Ee 05 2010 363 Installing and operating AIWS TFTP Parameter Setup If TFTP is selected it means that phonebook searches will return entries from the Avaya PBX via TFTP To do settings for TFTP do as follows 1 oD DN OT Pw On the AIWS start page click on Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens Click on Other settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page appears In the left pane click on Phonebook The Phonebook page appears Click the TFTP settings link Enter the IP address to the TFTP
147. Galvanic isolation of the inputs and outputs is provided by using a separate power supply When galvanic isolation is not needed supply voltage can be taken from the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware circuit board by connecting J16 1 to J5 3 and J16 6 to J5 4 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 441 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Figure 176 Connection of inputs and outputs External 12 V IN1 IN2 i External ee A The inputs IN1 and IN2 are active when they are connected to 12 V When the output OUT1 is active the potential in point A in figure 176 will be close to 0 V The same applies for a similar connection for OUT2 OUT2 1 2 3 4 OUT1 5 6 External GND Activation of Battery Activate the real time clock backup battery by closing jumper J1 on the circuit board Jumper pin 2 3 to activate Figure 177 Battery placement J11 i RS232 1 442 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation The backup battery is a 3V lithium battery At any interruption in the ordinary power supply the real time clock will be supplied by the battery Battery Data Current consumption real time clock Typical Maximum 3V battery 3 pA 40 pA Battery life battery connected Typical Minimum Power not connected 6 year
148. I Received Signal Strength Indication FER Frame Error Rate a value between 0 and 100 Should be below 80 to be able to keep the synchronization Traffic Traffic information is displayed in the Traffic sub menu For the Master the traffic information for the IP DECT system is displayed as well as traffic information for the Radio itself if this Radio is enabled Display All Ongoing Calls in the System All ongoing calls in the IP DECT system can be displayed by selecting Traffic gt Master Calls in the Master See the table below for information about the different statistics fields Master Calls In The number of incoming calls to the Master Calls In Delivered The number of connected incoming calls in the Master Calls Out The number of outgoing calls in the Master Handover The number of handovers in the Master Handover Canceled The number of failed handovers in the Master Abnormal Call Release The number of abnormal call terminations Display Calls All ongoing calls on an IPBS can be displayed by selecting Traffic gt Radio Calls See the table below for information about the different statistics fields Radio Calls In The number of incoming calls to the Radio Calls Out The number of outgoing calls from the Radio 128 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Handover The number of handovers in the Radio Handover Cance
149. ITE gt Status Log 2 Enter the address to the server where the Status Log should be sent in the Unite IP Address text field 3 Enter the Resource Identity Service in the Unite Resource Identity text field If this field is left emply then the default will be UNA Unite Node Assistant Users This section describes the Users sub menu and how to do the following 124 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation e Add a user e Search for user information e Show all registered users in the IP DECT system Add a User For information on how to add users to the IP DECT system see Add Users on page 87 Search for User Information It is possible to search for users registered in the system by name or extension number Search for a user following the steps below 1 Select Users gt Users 2 Enter the name or number to search for in the text field It is possible to enter only the beginning of the name or number 3 Click show Show all Registered Users in the IP DECT System 1 Select Users gt Users 2 Click show Note Only the first 12 digits of IPEI IPDI of the cordless telephone will be shown in the IPBS users tab even if all 13 digits needed to be entered when cordless telephone is subscribed 13th digit is the checksum Show Anonymous The IPEI number is displayed on anonymous registrated telephones 1 Select Users gt Anonymous Unsubscribe Users 1 Select Users gt
150. IWS is not configured the setup wizard will start automatically How to Use this Chapter This chapter is used for the installation and configuration of the product as well as for the administration and daily operation Note that AIWS is a complex system and that there are many alternatives when setting up a system Therefore the manual describes the possible settings and how to set them In order to simplify for example an installation use the following steps Installation and Setup e For installation and basic configuration refer to chapters Installation and Configuration on page 294 AIWS Setup Wizard and Configuration on page 312 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 291 Installing and operating AIWS Charger Installation Follow the instructions in the chapter for the charger Recommended Work Flow for telephone installation The recommended work flow depends on what type of telephones that are used e DECT telephones when adding new telephones e DECT telephones when telephone is up and running Recommended work flow when adding new DECT telephones 1 Install and configure AIWS see Installation and Configuration on page 294 2 Create a template with settings common for all devices at the site see Create a Parameter Template on page 329 3 Add a range of Numbers to the site see Create New Numbers on page 333 Run the template 4 Connect the telephone to
151. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver IC Requirements for Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 209 Installing Multiple Battery Charger Cet appareil num rique de la Classe B conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Technical Solution The following functionality is provided by the Multiple Battery Charger e Charging of the Avaya DECT telephone battery 210 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Installation and Configuration Multiple Battery Charger Installation General A Important The unit shall be installed by authorized personnel only e The units shall be placed in a dry environment with a temperature range from 5 C up to 40 C 41 F to 104 F e The units shall be mounted on a vertical wall e Avoid mounting the Multiple Battery Charger in a sunlit place This can affect the charging capacity e The unit shall be mounted on concrete or plaster walls only e If the Multiple Battery Charger is connected to a power supply via an AC wall plug se
152. Import Phonebook files It is possible to import a phonebook file for later use see Company Phonebook on page 159 1 Inthe File menu click File management The File management window opens 2 Click on the Phonebook tab 3 Click Add The Import files dialogue opens 4 Select the phonebook files to be imported 5 Click Open 6 Check that the newly imported phonebook files appear in the list 7 Click Close Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 347 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 121 File management window Phonebook tab File management Parameter definition Software Language Phonebook Filename Entries MyPhonebook cpb Upload a Language It is possible to upload a language to portable devices that support Language Upload Upload of languages is not available in unlicensed mode This feature requires a licence valid for file upload 1 Select the Devices tab 2 Select the device s to upload a language to It is possible to select several devices but only devices of the same Device Type can be selected In the Device Menu select Upload Language The Upload Language dialogue opens Select which language to upload Click OK The language is uploaded to the device Upload Phonebook It is possible to upload a phonebook to portable devices that support this feature Upload of Company Phonebook is not available in unlicensed mode This feature requires a licen
153. K ROSES SE OS 519 Related DOCUMENTS c ccc ee CNSR ESE HED RASS e HERTS ESO 523 o EE Ge ees oe Ce ee es ee a ee ee te oe eS 525 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 15 Contents 16 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 System Description Introduction This chapter gives a general description of the Avaya IP DECT System an IP based cordless telephony and messaging system for connection to private telephone exchanges The IP DECT system supports the DECT standard which gives a full integration of messaging and voice functions The DECT system can be integrated with external applications such as different alarm systems This gives features such as messages to telephone alarm from telephone message acknowledgement and absent handling Avaya IP DECT System Overview The Avaya IP DECT System enables extended sales opportunities for on site wireless communication For example IP DECT enables cost efficient smaller systems with modularity up to very large installations feature rich distributed system installations local office site and a wide variety of modern connection possibilities The Avaya IP DECT system is built up by the following components e DECT Cordless Telephones e IP DECT Base Station IPBS e Avaya Aura Communication Manager e Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS optional Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 17 System Description Figu
154. Language 163 Customize the GUL ccana i Gee ninia a e a 164 Clear Lists when inserted in Charger lt lt 164 Disable Homebase GAP Registration 165 Require Encrypted Base Station 165 QUESTIANOS DEED ek ca ee o de A a a ia eee AA 166 Handset idie RAMOS ear ee Se SO 166 Site Survey TOO scese sarate ee ee Oe ee OH ee ee 166 Protect registration from user deletion 166 Emergency Call Number 002 ee eee eee 166 Audio adjustment woe Oe Ee SE A a a ew ere 167 Headset configuration orar ee Ti we ee WN ew eee 167 Owner identification in the idle display lt lt 168 an ANTE a ae es 168 Import Contacts carr rara et ETRE EKO RET OES Hews 168 SNOMCUIS AAA 169 RARAS ON ax ras ev Se Sia ae den vd oe ee e ed de we 170 Admin Menu Tree socorro 170 Quick Access to the telephone s Device Information SST Menu 172 LEDINdICAIONS se o scce moia e d A a a 172 Characters for SMS 2 0 02 2 ee ee 173 Troubleshooting cca co ae amp amp a Oe SOE Oe ae we we ee ee 173 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager 175 General usage and Important Notes 175 Communication Manager system administration 177 Distributed Office DO Communication Manager Branch Edition Com
155. Master IPBS is based on H 323 with some minor differences called XMobile such as e Noneed to register the DECT Wireless Terminal with the Gatekeeper no RAS procedure neccessary e Shared trunk between the IP PBX and the Master IPBS where all telephony signalling is going 26 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 IP DECT Planning and Deployment for the IP DECT System IP DECT Planning and Deployment for the IP DECT System Each unit provides radio access within a pre defined area called a cell To enable seamless handover for the mobile devices cell planning is of most importance when deploying the IP DECT System Refer to the documentation from the DECT supplier and Planning an IP DECT System on page 31 Avaya IP DECT System Components The Avaya IP DECT system is created using Avaya developed products as well as third party products This section gives a brief description of the components needed DECT Cordless telephones The DECT Cordless telephones are available in a two versions Avaya 3720 DECT Telephone with basic functionality and Avaya 3720 DECT Telephone with advanced functionality The IP DECT system has support for all Avaya DECT cordless telephones No changes of the telephone is needed IPBS The IPBS has eight channels used for speech and messaging it also has one channel which is reserved for broadcast messages For more information on the IPBS see Installing and operating IPB
156. Mobile DECT stations if the max number is set to 0 If the special application SA8567 is not available the number of XMOBILE stations will remain 0 For Communication Manager 4 Platform Maximum Maximum Off PBX Telephones Maximum Off PBX Telephones Maximum Off PBX Telephones Maximum Off PBX Telephones Maximum Off PBX Telephones NOTE You must logoff amp login to effect display system parameters customer options Page 1 OPTIONAL FEATURE G3 Version V14 Location 2 RFA System ID SID 1 Platform 7 RFA Module ID MID 1 USED Ports 900 69 Maximum Stations 450 7 Maximum XMOBILE Stations 100 18 EC500 O 0 OPS 0 0 PBFMC 0 0 PVFMC 0 0 SCCAN 0 0 the permission changes of 11 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 179 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager Configure the node name and IP Address for the IP DECT system This is the name and IP Address of the DECT R4 system Master IPBS For Communication Manager 4 and Communication Manager 5 display node names ip IP NODE NAMES Name IP Address ACommunication Manager2 192 168 0 1 Master IPBS 192 168 0 104 default 0 0 0 0 procr 192 168 0 200 4 of 4 administered node names were displayed Use list node names command to see all the administered node names Use change node names ip xxx to change a node name xxx or add a node name
157. N bus in out Pins 3 and 4 can be used for connection of other LON devices for example SLA See figure 182 below Figure 182 Cabling of screw connector J1 J1 123 4 OVOW Max 2 x 0 8 mm wire at each connector Strip 10 cm XX retecane M LON 033 6 Replace all removed connectors 7 Close the cover and restart Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware see Power Down and Restart of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 425 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 455 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 456 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Technical Data Introduction This chapter shows you technical specifications for the following IP DECT equipment and accessories e IP DECT Base Station IPBS e Base Station RM627 BS330 e Base Station RM637 BS340 e Avaya 3725 DECT Telephone e Avaya 3720 DECT Telephone e Advanced Charger e Basic Charger e Multiple Battery Charger e Rackmount Charger e Portable Device Manager PDM e Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS e Omnidirectional single antenna e Directional dual antenna e Directional single antenna e Outdoor housing DECT base stations Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 457 Technical Data IP DECT Base Station IPBS Versions IPBS with internal antenna IPBS with external antenna DECT frequencies IPBS Standard for use with DECT in
158. Note If you cannot find your device type and or parameter version in the list PDM needs to be updated with new parameter definition files see Import Parameter Definition files on page 269 280 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Administration Figure 83 Edit Template parameter view Edit template MyTalkerTemplate Device type d62 Talker Parameter version 25 2 Identification Selected Name E Systems H Settings w Connections Profiles H Shortcuts H Audio 1 Customization E Cancel 4 Select the parameters you want to be saved in the template by selecting the checkbox to the left of each parameter Change the parameters to the desired values 5 Click OK Create a Parameter Template from a Number It is also possible to create a template from a cordless telephone in the PDM 1 Select the Numbers tab 2 Mark the Number you want to use 3 Right click on the Number and select Use as template The Enter template name dialogue appears Enter a name for the template Click OK The Edit template dialogue opens Continue with 4 to 5 in Create a Parameter Template on page 280 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 281 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Note When the Edit template window is opened from the Use as template command an extra drop down list Select is shown in the bottom left corner This setti
159. OK NN Store the Syslog Entries in a Syslogd 1 Select General gt Logging Select SYSLOG in the Type drop down list Enter the IP address of the syslogd in the Address text field Enter the desired syslogd message class in the Class text field Click OK HR Store the Syslog Entries on a Web Server 1 Select General gt Logging 2 Select HTTP in the Type drop down list 3 Enter the IP address in the Address text field 4 Enter the relative URL of the form programme on your web server in the Path text field 5 Click OK Note The IPBS will make an HTTP GET request to the web server on the registered URL followed by the URL encoded log entry Example Enter the value cdr cdrwrite asp in the URL Path field if a page is on the web server with the name cdr cdrwrite asp with a form that expects the log message in the msg parameter In this example the IPBS will make a GET cdr cdrwrite asp event syslog amp msg logmsg request to the server Forward Alarms and Events It is possible to forward alarms and events to an external server destination 1 Select General gt Logging 2 Enter the IP Address of the IPBS where you want to have an overview of all faults in the External HTTP Server Address text field Enter the HTTP server port in the External HTTP Server Port text field The default value is 80 94 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Configure the HTTP settings Traditional
160. P support master and slave AIWS configuration fully web based System Capacity Max No of Devices in an Avaya IP DECT System Cordless telephones 2000 IP DECT Base Stations 1000 IPBSs Traffic Capacity Speech calls 10 000 hour SMS 10 000 hour 28 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 System Capacity Speech Channels per single device IP DECT Base Station 8 simultaneous calls IPBS Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 29 System Description 30 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Planning an IP DECT System Introduction This chapter gives a description on how to plan the IP DECT system The IP DECT is an IP based cordless telephony and messaging system for connection to private telephone exchanges The IP DECT system supports the DECT standard which gives a full integration of messaging and voice functions The DECT system can be integrated with external applications such as different alarm systems networks and e mail This gives features such as messages to cordless telephones alarm from cordless telephones message acknowledgement and absent handling Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 31 Planning an IP DECT System Wired LAN Backbone Requirement It is highly recommended that a Network Assessment of the LAN is carried out before an installation or when new applications and or u
161. PS check box to allow only HTTPS sessions and all HTTP requests are redirected as HTTPS requests e Select the Disable HTTP basic authentication check box to require all administrative and programmatic clients to support HTTP digest authentication e Select the Password protect all HTTP pages check box to password protect all HTTP pages e Enter Port number in the Port text field The IPBS is by default administered over the network via the TCP port 80 http If port 80 is not to be used another port can be set Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 95 Installing and operating IPBS 2 up for access Set this value to 0 to disable http traffic recommended Attempts to contact the device using the http protocol will result in an Unable to connect message e Enter HTTPS Port in the HTTPS Port text field To access IPBS securely use the TCP port 443 https Set this value to anything except zero 0 to enable https traffic The default value is 443 The value zero 0 disables https traffic which is not recommended e Enter Network Base Adresss Network Base Mask in the Allowed stations text fields to only allow access only from matching network for example 172 16 0 0 255 255 0 0 e Inthe Active HTTP sessions field all ongoing HTTP traffic is displayed Click OK Configure the HTTP Client settings A list of URL that require authentication can be specified 1 2 3 4 SNMP Select General gt HT
162. Radio coverage verification tests The Radio coverage verification consists of two tests e Base station operation test e Coverage area test 136 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Commissioning Note Be sure that the battery in the cordless phones are charged before executing the tests Base Station Operation Test The purpose of this test is to check if all base stations are operational 1 Use the base station plan see Planning an IP DECT System on page 31 to localize the installed radio base stations Open the Master IPBS web interface Device Overview gt Radios to get a list of all IPBS radios connected to the IP DECT system The RFPI of each radio base station is the unique identifier On a DECT phone enter the Admin menu see Admin Menu Tree on page 170 go to Dect Info gt Link In the first line you can find the signal strength SS xx dBm of the connected base station The PARI is a unique identifier of the connected base station Move close to each base station Verifiy lower led is steady green and upper led is either steady green or off Check if the DECT phone is connected to it The PARI in the link display needs to match with the RFPI of the device overview radio list After having checked that all base stations are operational proceed with the coverage area test Coverage Area Test The purpose of this test is to verify that there is satisfactory field strength to enabl
163. Relay Output A relay output on connector J14 is used to indicate Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware malfunction and can also be used to indicate other errors See application documentation for more information about functionality Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 439 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Figure 172 Jumpering that decides when the error relay output is active either when the relay operates or is released o A The jumpering J15 decides if the output shall be active when the relay is operating or released 1 2 selects operating and 2 3 selects released In figure 172 the relay is released and as the jumpering is set to 1 2 the circuit is open and the error relay output is inactive At power up or restart of the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware the relay is released until the applications are working properly If the relay is released longer Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is malfunctioning RS232 Communication with External Unit The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware has three identical RS232 connectors J7 J8 and J11 Depending on software application the RS232 ports can be used or not How to connect external equipment to the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is described in the documentation of the software application In figure 173 the RS232 connectors on the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is described Figure 173 Description of the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware
164. S on page 51 Communication Manager The Communication Manager Avaya Communication Manager is a private branch exchange that switches calls between VoIP users on local lines while allowing all users to share a certain number of external phone lines The Communication Manager can also switch calls between a VoIP user and a traditional telephone user Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 27 System Description With a Communication Manager no separate networks are necessary for voice and data communications It employs converged data and voice networks This means that Internet access as well as VoIP communications and traditional telephone communications are all possible using a single line to each user Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS The Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS offers wireless services in IP DECT such as SMS cordless telephone cordless telephone sending text messages from a web browser and access to a central phonebook It also acts as a messaging and alarm gateway between open messaging communication protocols and IP DECT telephones The AIWS is based on Linux and runs on a highly reliable solid state appliance Available functionality depending on variant see Variants on page 485 are as follows Sending messages cordless telephone cordless telephone Access to built in central phonebook Access to external directory over LDAP OAP messaging and alarm protocols NT
165. Set UNS Default Category for messaging to function In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Other gt UNS gt Default category Enter the IP address and name of the messaging handler here 192 168 0 3 and DECT Click Activate Disable the DECT interface on the AIWS1 because it s not used If the DECT interface is disabled the AIWS will not show any error logs because of an non connected DECT interface Select advanced configuration general settings view advanced parameters Set DECT interface to disable e AIWS2 Standard In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Device Management Remove all IP addresses Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 299 Installing and operating AIWS Set UNS Default Category for messaging to function In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Other gt UNS gt Default category Enter the IP address and name of the messaging handler here 192 168 0 3 and DECT Click Activate Disable the DECT interface on the AIWS1 because it s not used If the DECT interface is disabled the AIWS will not show any error logs because of an non connected DECT interface Select advanced configuration general settings view advanced parameters Set DECT interface to disable Figure 91 Setting UNS UNS Operating Mode ES Forwarding Y IP address of forward destination UNS EN 192 168 0
166. Site Survey tool menu 77 LED indications The following table shows the LED indications that are used for 3725 3720 LED indication None Green fixed Green flashing Orange fixed Description Switched off Telephone fully charged and in charger Switched on but not in charger Charging 172 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Troubleshooting Orange flashing 1000 ms on 1000 ms Software download off Orange flashing 100 ms on 800 ms Change phone indication during Easy off Replacement Red fixed Software error Service needed Red flashing 100 ms on 800 ms off Error indication during Easy Replacement Put back old portable in charger Red flashing 800 ms on 100 ms off Error during Easy Replacement Service needed for both portables See also LED indications in Easy Replacement on page 153 Characters for SMS For SMS from handset to handset only the following characters will be supported by the SMS protocol Figure 35 SMS Characters ASPO P p _ 1AQaq 0 2BRbr Tf3CScseAnaDTdt nS 5EUeui Tlls o6rvf viWY 7GNgwol BHXhxCcO0 9 y LF JZ2jz201 KAkioR lt L lSGCRe MNm RASB nid 0Soa wW VH Yi N Troubleshooting See Avaya 3720 3725 DECT Telephones on page 500 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 173 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones 174 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenanc
167. Station Master Configuration AITU OS sod o ds A a eh e LogoutLogin USAS escri AAA SE OEE OE Operon is a car AAA AAA AAA OW a a ee E ee eee e e eS a e A we 6 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 47 47 47 48 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 55 56 57 57 58 58 59 60 60 62 63 64 64 64 71 73 73 73 76 82 83 84 86 87 89 90 90 05 2010 Contents Parar Adra 105 LL did o a e cd a dr Ee ee ww a ke eee Ee 106 DECT 6 256 244 SE R CS OWES a a EKG OP OE OWES 109 UNIE ok BAS kee ok ND Oa AAA A we we ee 122 WAS he ae es ae as es ee Se Ge 124 Device OvervieW ee 126 WTC rra ARA Re ee Re oe we ee i em E 128 Backup 4 Had dee oO 9S HOP ee AR Pp wo Pw El a 129 Update crat eb d me ES ae Se A ODS oe SSS 129 DRONOS S 002506 ee AA A AA A A 131 Rosolo ee Rk me Ek Rw RRA ee ws RO ow Ge a 135 Reset Using the Reset Button 136 QUIE ONAN cata eck o a a A A ds e a AA 136 COMMISSIONING ere re A RA AA AA AAA 136 Radio coverage verification tests 136 Cordless Extension Number Test o 138 Troubleshooting a AN AA AAA A AA A AAA 139 How to Use the Update Server 0 139 UI i ee Ds e a ec e e a er a a ee es ee Se 139 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones 145 MESURA a a ee Re a E a ee A 145 Getting started with Configuration of the 3725 3720 Teleph
168. TP Client Enter the URL in the URL text field Enter User and Password in the User and Password text fields Click OK A new row will be shown and more URLs can be added Faults can be reported in the IP DECT system via the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The SNMP framework has three parts An SNMP manager the system used to control and monitor the activities of network hosts using SNMP An SNMP agent the software component within the managed device that maintains data for the device and reports data as needed to managing systems A MIB The Management Information Base MIB is a virtual information storage area for network management information The agent and MIB reside on a network device for example router access server or switch To enable the SNMP agent on the IPBS the relationship between the manager and the agent must be defined 96 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Figure 26 Configure the SNMP settings AVAYA IP DECT Base Station Configuration Info Admin Update NTP Logging HTTP HTTP Client SNMP Certificates General ee ee ee a a ES LAN Community public IP Device Name LDAP Contact E PESI Location UNIE Authentification Trap Administration Trap Destinations Users Device Overview Allowed networks Traffic Address Mask Backup Diagnostics l Reset 1 Select General gt SNMP 2 Enter a name in the Community fi
169. Update of AIWS Update of software is done via the web interface There are two choices Install software and Install image If new software is installed by doing an update of AIWS using an eas file information stored in the database will not be overwritten Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 295 Installing and operating AIWS If a new image file is installed using an img file the database information is deleted and software and definition files are removed For instructions on how to upgrade both eas and img files see Updating Application Software on page 449 It is recommended to do a backup before upgrading Make sure no Device Manager client is open during an update of the AIWS It is also important that no ftp client is logged in to the AIWS If the Microsoft Internet Explorer is used as ftp client close it before upgrade Note Customized NetPage GUI will be overwritten when upgrading See also Update the User Interface after a new AIWS Release on page 401 Multiple AIWS configuration For some situations there is a need to configure more than one AIWS in a system This chapter presents examples for multiple AIWS configuration Examples of functionality distributed on different AIWS s are Device Management Central Phonebook and Netpage Messaging For detailed instructions on how to do these settings refer to the corresponding chapters in this manual Functionality distributed
170. WS Variants Avaya AIWS Basic Build in Central Phonebook SMS Handset to Handset Basic Web Messaging Telephone configuration via Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger or OTA 1 gt max 32 devices This licence cannot be used in a multi AIWS configuration Avaya AIWS Basic Build in Central Phonebook SMS Handset to Handset Basic Web Messaging Software download via Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger or OTA gt max 32 devices Telephone configuration via Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger or OTA gt max 32 devices Avaya AIWS Standard Build in Central Phonebook Access to Corporate LDAP Directories for phonebook enquiries SMS Handset to Handset Advanced Web Messaging Max No of predefined messages 30 common messages max 20 kB in total 30 local messages max 4 kB in total Software download via Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger or OTA Max 120 devices Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 485 Technical Data Telephone configuration via Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger or OTA Max 120 devices Avaya AIWS OAP Build in Central Phonebook SMS Handset to Handset Basic Web Messaging Messaging protocols OAP Avaya AIWS Enterprise Man agement Build in Central Phonebook SMS Handset to Handset Basic Web Messaging Softwar
171. a User data sent from telephones in the Cordless Telephone System e Location Special Location information from telephones in the Cordless Telephone System This information can be used to track the route of a telephone in a building Note The Special Location can be sent every time a cordless telephone gets a new location code from a location device in the system This requires configuration both in the telephone and in the location device Also called Immediate Alarm Transmission e Availability Includes absence information i e if a telephone is placed in Charger The addressing of the receivers is described in Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 421 Basic Configuration The basic configuration requires system administrator or administrator rights With user rights you will only be able to access and configure the Phonebook Refer to Authentication Levels and Default Passwords on page 305 Central Phonebook Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of the AIWS Central Phonebook 358 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration The AIWS Central Phonebook gives the possibility to search for phone numbers in a local database or in an LDAP server If the search is to be forwarded to an LDAP server the LDAP parameters need to be configured as described in LDAP Parameter Setup on page 361 For information on phonebook administration see Phonebook
172. a new device that has a new Number is received the New Number Wizard window opens Figure 66 The New Number Wizard New Number Wizard Welcome to the Found New Number Wizard Ascom Win PDM has found a new Desktop Charger Advanced device with number 6606607 What do you wish to do with this number O Store ir Store the parameters in the local database to enable offline editing Edit parameters Edit the parameters without saving them to the local database Run template Run a template on this number Do nothing Close this dialog without any further actions Click OK to continue In the New Number Wizard there are four choices 254 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation e Store in database The Number with its parameters is stored in the database e Edit parameters A window opens where it is possible to edit parameters for the new Number e Run template The Run template dialogue opens The parameter values included in the template are transferred to the device e Do nothing The wizard closes without any action Store in database 1 Select Store in database 2 Click OK 3 The Number all parameters is stored in the database Edit parameters 1 Select Edit parameters 2 Click Next 3 The Edit parameters window opens See Edit Parameters on page 259 Run template 1 In the New Device Wizard window select Run template 2 Click Next 3 The Run template
173. ace a Device If a device shall be replaced with a new device it is possible to transfer its associated Number to a new device The new device must be of the same model as the old one 1 If the device to be replaced is still working make sure that it is synchronized 2 Connect the new device to the PDM 3 Associate the new device to the Number associated to the old device according to the instructions in Associate a Number with a Device on page 262 The Number will no longer be associated to the old device Create new Device It is possible to enter several new Device ID s in advance into PDM for later association In order to simplify input when handling many devices it is possible to use a bar code reader The bar code reader should send a carriage return after each item but it is not necessary If carriage return is not sent it is necessary to click Create after each read item 1 Select the Devices tab 2 Inthe Device menu select Add device The Create devices dialogue opens 266 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Figure 73 The Create devices dialogue Create devices Device type dez i 7 o L Parameter version 24 7 Device 1D Continuous registration Select device type and parameter version Enter a Device ID for the device manually or by using a bar code reader The Continuous registration box can be used to select whether the Create devices dialogue
174. ache nbtstat R Empty the nbtstat cache e Restart the WEB browser Select supplementary services see Configure Supplementary Services on page 113 Assign PARI see PARI on page 118 Enter SARI see SARI on page 118 Enter AIWS IP address see Configure Messaging on page 122 Device Management on page 123 and Configure the Location on page 123 Configure air synchronization see Configure Air Synchronization on page 119 Enter the Time Server address see Configure the NTP Settings on page 92 Reset in order to make the configuration changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Configure the Standby Master It is recommended to have a Standby Master in the IP DECT system This section describes how to configure a Standby Master Each configuration step is briefly described in the step list below for more detailed information see the corresponding subsection in Operation on page 90 Note Make or change configuration of the Standby Master only when the Master is running Determine the address and access the GUI see Access the GUI on page 73 Change the default password see Change the Default Password on page 76 Configure LDAP replicator enter the IP address user name and password to the LDAP server Alternative LDAP server must not be entered Select the Enable check box see Configure LDAP Replicator on page 107 Set a static IP address and set DHCP to off see Set a Static IP Address on page 103 A
175. age and User Interface Figure 146 Translation page in normal view Translation Existing languages English Each language can be exported as an XML file To create a new language or update an existing click a language link above to download the file If a new language should be created change the language indication in the language tag Translate Update the text within translation and helptext tags and save the file Import the XML file Import language file Browse _ Enable translation mode Apply in Translation mode all text will be exchanged with the identification in the language file This can be used to identify where a text is displayed in the GUI All the labels on the pages are shown see example below Figure 147 Translation page in translation mode TEXT_TRANSLATION_TITLE TEXT_TRANSLATION_LANGUAGE_TEXT English TEXT_TRANSLATION_EXPORT_TEXT TEXT_IMPORT_LANGUAGE BUTTON_IMPORT_LANGUAGE TEXT_TRANSLATION_CHECKBOX_CAPTION BUTTON_SAVE MOPTION_DESIGN_MODE TEXT_TRANSLATION_SAVE_TEXT To return to standard view 2 Clear the OPTION_DESIGN_MODE box 3 Click BUTTON_SAVE Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 389 Installing and operating AIWS Import Translation files When the file is translated it must be imported to the AIWS 1 On the AIWS start page click on Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens 2 Inthe left pane select Other settings gt Set
176. ake a few seconds to synchronize the date and time during start up It also takes a few seconds if the server parameters changes to another server When the time is changed in the time server it takes different long time to synchronize the time depending on how the modules are set up and how they are connected together If a module does not have a time server licence it takes about 15 minutes to update its clock A module with a time server licence takes about 30 minutes to update Message Distribution In the administration pages there are distribution lists that are used to distribute incoming information to other modules If a module is to be connected to several carrier systems for example both System 900 and a Cordless Telephone System distribution of incoming data from the different systems has to be configured independently The distribution of Status Logs and Activity Logs are configured separately Advanced activity settings for activity logs are described in the Function Description Activity Logging in Unite TD 92341GB The addressing is described in the examples below Addressing a module on the System 900 A bus When a specific module on the A bus is addressed the data will be transferred directly to that module It is however not necessary to address a specific module on the A bus as the Central Unit in the System 900 can distribute the data to a module Note that this requires configuration of the Central Unit Avaya
177. alling Number Service Link Mode as needed Multimedia Mode basic Audible Message Waiting y MWI Served User Typ AUDIX Name Coverage After Forwarding s Multimedia Early Answer n Emergency Location Ext 5012 display station 5012 Page 3 of 4 STATION Bridged Appearance Origination Restriction n ENHANCED CALL FORWARDING Forwarded Destination Active Unconditional For Internal Calls To n External Calls To n Busy For Internal Calls To n External Calls To n No Reply For Internal Calls To n External Calls To n Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 191 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager display station 5012 Page 4 of 4 STATION Headset n Speaker n Mounting d Floor Cord Length 0 Building Set Color ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl List2 List3s HOT LINE DESTINATION Abbreviated Dialing List Number From above 1 2 or 3 Dial Code Line Appearance call appr 192 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Distributed Office DO Communication Manager Branch Edition Communication ManagerBE System Administration Distributed Office DO Communication Manager Branch Edition Communication ManagerBE System Administration Start the Distributed Office Local Manager DOLM and set the Master IPBS IP address on the System Parameters gt General gt Localization tab under Site Para
178. alogue GY Create site Site name o Description Cancel Note One site needs to be present for the PDM to be able to run 4 Click OK 5 Click Close Definition files This chapter describes how to import definition files for first use See also File management on page 268 1 Inthe File menu select File management The File management window opens 2 Inthe File management window click on the Parameter definition tab 3 Click Add The Import files window opens You may have to contact your supplier for the latest updates Note Definition files can also be distributed as package files including different types of files See chapter Import package files on page 269 4 Inthe Import files window select the files to be imported and click Open The files are imported to PDM 5 Click Close How to import parameter definition files is described in Import Parameter Definition files on page 269 Language settings Note There is a difference between Translation files xml described in this section and Language files Ing that are described in Import Language files on page 271 Import of language files are done via the File menu If you want to change the language to be used in PDM and there are Translation files available it is possible to change the language used in PDM to another language 246 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configurati
179. ameters y Video PHB Value 26 802 1P Q PARAMETERS Call Control 802 1p Priority 6 Audio 802 1p Priority 6 Video 802 1p Priority 5 AUDIO RESOURCE RESERVATION PARAMETERS H 323 IP ENDPOINTS RSVP Enabled n H 323 Link Bounce Recovery y Idle Traffic Interval sec 20 Keep Alive Interval sec 5 Keep Alive Count 5 n display ip network region 1 Page 3 of 19 Inter Network Region Connection Management src dst codec direct WAN BW limits Video Dyn rgn rgn set WAN Units Total Norm Prio Shr Intervening regions CAC IGAR 1 1 L y NoLimit n arta oF WN 11 12 13 14 15 182 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Communication Manager system administration Configuring the dial plan The TAC you enter on the Trunk Group screen must match the format you have administered for a DAC on the Dial Plan Analysis Table For Communication Manager 4 and Communication Manager 5 display dialplan analysis Page 1 of 12 DIAL PLAN ANALYSIS TABLE Percent Full 0 Dialed Total Call Dialed Total Call Dialed Total Call String Length Type String Length Type String Length Type 0 l fac HE 3 ext 2 4 ext 3 4 ext 4 4 ext 5 4 ext 9 3 dac ES 3 fac 3 fac Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 183 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager Configuring the signaling group The IP trunk s signaling g
180. an DHCP server 1 Select LAN gt DHCP Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 103 Installing and operating IPBS 2 Select Client in the Mode drop down list 3 Click OK 4 Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Note If the DHCP lease time is shorter than the time to live of the name IP address association in the Windows Internet Name Service WINS server it may cause a mismatch and a wrong device may be reached if its WINS name is used Link The link setting should be set to auto under all normal circumstances Configure VLAN Identity and priority settings for VLAN are done in the LAN gt VLAN sub menu Note It is necessary to have a VLAN with the same ID as configured in the IPBS otherwise it will not be possible to access the IPBS Note If VLAN 0 Quality of Service QOS is inactive according to 802 1q It is also recommended to avoid VLAN 1 as it often is used as a default VLAN setting View LAN Statistics To view statistics of LAN events Select LAN gt Statistics To reset the ethernet statistics counters Click the clear button 104 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation IP Configure IP Settings The following settings can be done in the IP settings sub menu ToS priority RTP Data and VoIP Signalling Determines the priority from the ToS field in the IP header This function can be used if
181. ance Guide 05 2010 271 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Figure 77 File management window Language tab File ma nagement Parameter definition Software Language phonebook Device type Language File Swedish Ing Upload a Language It is possible to upload a language to portable devices that support Language Upload 1 Select the Devices tab 2 Select the device s to upload a language to It is possible to select several devices but only devices of the same Device Type can be selected 3 In the Device Menu select Upload Language The Upload Language dialogue appears Figure 78 The Upload language dialogue Upload language Device type d62 Talker Imported Available files 4 Select which language to upload 272 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 5 Operation Click OK The language is uploaded to the device Import Phonebook files It is possible to import a phonebook file for later use 1 2 3 4 En In the File menu click File management The File management window opens Click on the Phonebook tab Click Add The import files dialogue opens Select the phonebook files to be imported Only files with a corresponding extension are shown such as cpb Click Open Check that the newly imported phonebook files appear in the list Click Close Figure 79 File management window Phonebook tab File mana
182. and DECT Radio One IPBS must be assigned the role as master this IPBS can also act as a DECT Radio and will have an active DECT Radio and an active DECT Master software component All other IPBS will only have the software component DECT Radio active The software component DECT Master will only be active in the Master in all other it will be deactivated Multiple site installation The layout as in a single site can also be used for customers with an installation on several sites The sites may have one DECT Master per site and one or several IPBSs at each site The Communication Manager is centrally located may be one of the sites see figure 5 Figure 5 Multiple site layout with one IP DECT Master per site J CM E RO Mos Site 1 i 22 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 IP DECT System The lines displayed between the Communication Manager respective the DECT Master and the DECT Radios in figure 5 are used to indicate the logical connection between the software modules Note The figure shows the software components An IPBS includes both the software components DECT Master and DECT Radio External handover is only possible to do within each site not between them Synchronization Synchronization within the IP DECT system is done by e Air synchronization IPBS Air Synchronization IP DECT base stations uses the DECT air interface to synchronize
183. anguage Note Three clients can be logged in at the same time but to avoid conflicts make sure that only one at a time is updating Numbers Start a Web Browser Type the IP address for AIWS Click on Device Manager Select User ID and enter password see Authentication Levels and Default Passwords on page 305 4 Click OK The Device Manager starts Templates in Device Manager Create a Parameter Template It is usually desirable to create a customized parameter template that can be applied to all devices of a certain device type 1 Select the Templates tab 2 Inthe Template menu click New The Create Template dialogue appears Figure 110 Create Template dialogue D Create template Device type 3725 Parameter version 25 2 Name 3 Select device type and parameter version type in a name for the template and click OK The view switches to the Edit Template parameter view Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 329 Installing and operating AIWS Note If you cannot find your device type and or parameter version in the list the Device Manager needs to be updated with new parameter definition files see Import Parameter Definition Files on page 343 Figure 111 Edit Template parameter view Edit template My3725Template Device type 3725 Parameter version 25 2 Identification Selected Name fH Systems HE Settings H Connections H Profile
184. anning There are various ways of providing coverage for a stairwell Either the base station is installed directly in the stairwell as a dedicated base station for the stairwell or it is installed in the close vicinity of a stairwell The method depends on the type and location of the stairwell is it an open or closed stairwell is it sited in a corner of the building or in the centre and so on Toilet Rooms Toilet rooms are generally in awkward positions for a site survey behind or next to lifts in or next to stairwells or in a corner of the building A base station installation in the toilet room itself can be considered If placed outside the toilet room it should be placed in the vicinity of the toilet room in a location where the base station can see as much as possible of the toilet room preferably the entrance because doors are generally made of wood and these damp the signal less than the walls If the base station is placed in the vicinity of the toilet room locate it in a way that it provides coverage for as much of the rest of the floor as possible 1 see there are as few obstacles as possible such as walls etc between the base station and the lift Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 39 Planning an IP DECT System Maintenance Shaft In larger buildings there is usually the requirement that coverage also be provided in maintenance rooms The most common are the rooms for the lift and v
185. ardware power supply and licence WSM MVS AIWS Standard including Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware power supply and licence WSM MVP AIWS OAP including Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware power supply and licence WSM MVE AIWS Enterprise Management including Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware power supply and licence Included accessories Power Supply AC cord for EU UK US Australia Build inCentral Phonebook Number of entries 500 editable or 2000 view only csv format import and export Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 483 Technical Data External Central Phonebook Supported protocols LDAP Supported LDAP servers Active Directory in Windows 2000 Server Active Directory in Windows Server 2003 Cisco Call Manager 4 2 Time Synchronisation Time server ability Yes Automatic daylight saving adjustment Yes Date and time format Adjustable to commonly used formats Time sources NTP server NTP v4 compatible with NTPv2 and NTPv3 Other Unite module with time server ability Manual setting Messaging IP DECT Max capacity 4 000 messages hour Supported special characters Swedish Norwegian Danish Finnish and German language Supported Telephone Systems DECT IP DECT 484 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya In Building Wireless Server AI
186. are merged The Company Phonebook entries are locked and cannot be edited in the telephone Create a company phonebook file The company phonebook file cpb is normally created from an Excel file using a script to extract the information and create the company phonebook file cpb The Excel file Company Phonebook xls is delivered from your supplier Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 159 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones The format of the rows in the phonebook file is lt Name gt lt tab gt lt phone number gt followed by additional rows for each entry The telephone supports a maximum length of 24 characters in each field additional characters are truncated when the phonebook file is created The following characters are accepted in the telephone number field in the phonebook file but are ignored when the phonebook file is created and space Upload a company phonebook file In PDM or the Device Manager in the AIWS go to the devices tab and select device s In the Device menu select Upload phonebook Note Uploading a new company phonebook will delete the existing company phonebook in the phone The local contacts will not be affected See also Upload a Phonebook on page 273 or Installing and operating AIWS on page 289 Call Services Call services is a configurable menu in the telephone The purpose of the Call services menu is to provide a user friendly access to syst
187. are http 192 168 0 10 Worf4 GAP R4H s2 The command above specifies the url to the RFP firmware to use mod Communication Managerd RFP_UPDATEO select 0x2753 Specifies which RFPs to update using a hex encoded bit mask Each bit represents an RFP port starting with port 1 at the LSB 0x0001 up to port 16 0x8000 0x2753 specifies RFP 1 2 5 7 9 10 11 14 to be updated mod Communication Managerd RFP_UPDATEO schedule DD MM YYYY HH MM Specifies when the update shall start If no date is provided the update will be immediate when the start command is issued mod Communication Managerd RFP_UPDATEO start idle Starts the update or activates the schedule Normally the idle command is selected and an update starts only if the RFP is idle If multiple RFPs are selected for update they will be updated one at a time If sequence command is used Example IPBS This example shows an update file for the IPBS mod Communication Managerd UPO prot http 172 20 8 128 ascom firmware ireset 1 0 0 mod Communication Managerd UPO boot http 172 20 8 128 ascom boot ireset 412 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 143 Installing and operating IPBS Configuration File Backup To make a backup of the configuration file use the following command mod Communication Managerd UPO scfg lt url gt lt final command gt lt save serial gt force lt hours gt The scfg command uploads the current configuration
188. as to be set to the station number and Length of Display is 16x2 For the Mobility Trunk Group select the appropriate Trunk group Cell Phone Number needs to be set to the station number and Mapping Mode to both Note If the feature Redirect in charger should be used in Page 3 of 4 No Reply For Internal External Calls has to be set to Y For Communication Manager 4 and Communication Manager 5 display station 5012 Extension 5012 Type XMOBILE Name IPDECT 5012 STATION OPTIONS XMOBILE Type DECT Display Module y Display Language english Mobility Trunk Group 9 Configuration Set CELL PHONE NUMBER MAPPING Dial Prefix Cell Phone Number 5012 Mapping Mode both Page 1 of STATION Lock Messages n BCG Security Code TN 1 Coverage Path 1 COR Coverage Path 2 COS Hunt to Station Time of Day Lock Table Message Lamp Ext 5012 Message Waiting Type ICON Length of Display 16x2 Calls Allowed all 0 1 1 190 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Communication Manager system administration display station 5012 Page 2 Of 4 STATION Frj EATURE OPTIONS LWC Reception spe LWC Activation LWC Log External Calls CDR Privacy n Data Restriction Call Waiting Indication Att Call Waiting Indication Bridged Call Alerting y Distinctive Audible Alert Switchhook Flash y Ke La KKK 5D Per Station CPN Send C
189. ase prensa ms Radio ha Y Radio IPBS Signaling IP Trunk 1 Radio IPBS J he jandsets can oam between A P ps Locations IPBS Master1 Se Serve Signaling mm Media Stream IPBS communication IPBS LDAP This is a common scenario at a customer with multiple offices running one common IP DECT system It is recommended to have one IPBS Master at each location coverage area The coverage areas of different locations must not overlap The IPBS Master1 in the main location holds the DECT database including the system information data as System name password SARI and user subscription data The IPBS Master 1 is the LDAP server of the IP DECT system The IPBS Master2 is a LDAP Replicator of the DECT database It is recommended to grant write access to the LDAP database for the IPBS Master2 LDAP Replicator Otherwise roaming between the locations will not be possible The write access is also required to be able to subscribe handsets and modify user data in the Branch office New users can only be created on the database server IPBS Master1 in the Main Location Roaming between the different locations is possible for all the handsets Remember handover will not be possible between the two locations if you have overlapping coverage areas Handover is only possible within the same IPBS Master Beside other basic configuration for the IPBS Master the following steps are recommended for a Multi Base Station Master sy
190. aster 1 Inthe Air Sync Master IPBS select DECT gt Air Sync 2 Enter the alien RFPI in the Alien RFPI text field 3 Enter an alternative alien RFPI in the Alt Alien RFPI text field optional 4 Click OK Configure Air Sync Backup Master An backup Air Sync Master may be configured to take over the Air Sync Master role in case of failure or power down of the original Air Sync Master The Backup Master must be placed close to the original Sync Master The Backup Master will start to operate as a Sync Master in case the Sync Master has not been heard within 5 minutes As soon as the Sync Master is heard again the Backup Master will start to operate as a sync slave Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 121 Installing and operating IPBS Note If the IP DECT system is configured to synchronize to another DECT system this synchronization will be lost during the time the original Air Sync Master is not operating A Backup Master is normally not needed for short interruptions on the Sync Master restart software upload etc Normally no RFPI needs to be configured when using an Backup Master but if it is configured this must be the RFPI of the Sync Master Configure Air Sync Slave Normally no configuration is needed for the air sync slaves The air sync slaves can be configured to synchronize to a specific IPBS a specific sync RFPI in the IP DECT system This is normally not needed but if a sync RFPI is confi
191. ation Under Security select Password policy The Password Policy page opens 306 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 AIWS General Figure 94 The Password Policy page Password Policy Minimum length Number of character types Number of previous passwords not allowed Repeated characters Not allowed Y Sequential characters Not allowed activate a 5 Select password policy 6 Click Activate It is also possible to select previous or factory settings Web access security settings When secure mode is enabled recommended only secure access via HTTPS and FTPES is allowed HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS and FTP access is not allowed The web access security level can be set as follows 1 Login to AIWS 2 Click on Configuration 3 Inthe left pane select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration 4 Under Security select Web access The Web Access Security page opens Figure 95 The Web Access Security page Web Access Security Secure Mode EN Enabled Previous Factory cancel activate 5 Select if Secure Mode shall be enabled or not 6 Click on Activate It is also possible to select previous or factory settings Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 307 Installing and operating AIWS Configuration Page Figure 96 AIWS Configuration from AIWS start page Configuration In order to reach the AIWS Config
192. ation gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt DECT Interface gt IP DECT Click Factory to remove IP addresses Click Activate Figure 89 Removing DECT IP addresses DECT Interface DECT IP Address E CN Previous Secondary DECT IP Address EN D Factory Multiple IP Network Regions cancel For settings in the added AIWS see above Functionality distributed on three AIWS modules A system configuration with three AIWS s is required when the following three conditions exist e there are more than 120 cordless telephones simultaneously in the system e anexternal application is connected for example using OAP e Central Phonebook with LDAP TFTP or Netpage Advanced is used An example presenting a distributed solution is shown in figure 90 298 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Figure 90 Example of a multiple AIWS solution with functionality distributed on three AIWS s WSM1 WSM3 Device Manager WSM Enterprise WSM OAP WSM Standard Basic configuration for the setup The basic configuration for this setup is described below e AIWS1 Enterprise In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Device Management Replace the address of AIWS2 192 168 0 2 DECT with the IP address of AIWS3 plus DECT that is if AIWS3 has the address 192 168 0 3 change to 192 168 0 3 DECT
193. aya 3725 3720 telephones A Important Never remove a telephone from the charger until the instructions in the display or the LED tells you to do so see status on the LED if the display is broken If there is an error indication it may be allowed to remove the phone see troubleshooting Avaya 3720 3725 DECT Telephones on page 500 for further instructions A Important After the old telephone has been in the charger the new telephone needs to be placed in the charger regardless if the replacement was successful or not Failing to do so may result in malfunction and the new telephone will need to be sent for service 1 Start the procedure with the new telephone The telephone shall be switched off Press and hold the Off hook key and in the mean time put the new telephone in the charger In charger is displayed Hold the key for at least 3 seconds until Start phone replacement is displayed The telephone LED changes to flashing orange Press Yes 2 Press OK when the text Follow the instructions Each step can take several minutes appears in the display 3 When the telephone is ready the text Please insert old phone in charger appears The charger LED changes to quick orange flashing Remove the new telephone from the charger The text Please insert this phone in charger when old phone is ready appears 4 Put the old telephone in the charger the telephone can either be switched on or off After a few seconds the text Saving
194. bar gt Ye New Device types Search for in Number v Show all all mber Device type Parameter version d Last ru 987 Desktop Ch 2 0 123456 Desktop Ch 2 0 DOO13ED1 Y Synchronized Ni Save Desktop Charger Ad 654 Desktop Ch 2 0 A A z gt Y Temprock Work area Sort the List By default the lists in Devices Numbers and Templates are sorted by Device ID Number and Name respectively To sort the list by any other column click on the appropriate column heading To reverse the sort order click on the column heading again The sort order is indicated by an up or down arrow in the column heading Secondary sorting order can be done by pressing Ctrl and clicking on the column heading Filter the List By default the list in each tab shows all available Devices Numbers or Templates It is possible to filter the list by selecting the desired device type in the Device types column in the left pane 248 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Colour coding General colour coding This colour coding is valid for the lists under the tabs elf the version number is shown in red PDM has found no parameter definition files supporting that device type e Ifthe version number is shown in dark red the parameter definition file is compatible but does not have exactly the same version as the device Colour coding for parameter and template editing In the parameter and
195. ble in 8 steps of 3dB each Maximum sound ring signal level 88 dBA 10 Communication Manager Loudspeaker Duplex loud speaking function Settings Languages 19 Czech Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Greek Hungarian Italian Norwegian Polish Portuguese Brazilian Portuguese Russian Slovakian Spanish Swedish and Turkish Central Phonebook Maximum name and number length 40 characters in a name and 20 digits in a number Company Phonebook Maximum name and number length 24 characters ina name and 24 digits in a number 1 number per name Entries 1000 Local Phonebook Storage of contacts e 250 contacts e 48 character name e 24 digit work number e 24 digit mobile phone number e 24 digit other number e Aselectable ring tone Telephony Indication 14 ring signals flashing LED and vibrator Answer call Button press or auto answer Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 465 Technical Data Call list storage capacity 25 received dialled and missed calls with time stamp Messaging Maximum message length 160 characters Storage capacity 30 received sent messages gt 20 000 characters Radio Receiver sensitivity 93 dBm Automatic DECT protocol detection Automatic detection and configuration for US DECT and EU DECT at first registration Frequency range
196. bove Example 1 The query is within the same local exchange Queried number 551234 Digit treatment identifies 55 as the local exchange prefix and strips 55 from the number Resulting number 1234 Example 2 The query is within the same city area code but outside the local exchange Queried number 031612500 Digit treatment identifies 0 as National Prefix and 31 as National Destination Code strips 031from the number and adds 00 for external line Resulting number 00612500 Example 3 The query is within the same country but not in the same city Queried number 035158115 Digit treatment identifies 0 as National Prefix and 35 as National Destination Code and adds 00 for external line Resulting number 00035158115 366 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration Example 4 The query is within another country Queried number 4781530555 Digit treatment identifies 47 as an international call skips the and adds 00 for external line prefix and 00 for international prefix Resulting number 00004781530555 Example 5 Size of internal number Queried number 1234 Digit treatment identifies that the number of digits in the telephone number is equal to the number of digits entered as maximum size of internal phone numbers Resulting number 1234 Example 6 Size of global number Queried number 47815305555 Digit treatment identifies that the number of digits in the telephone nu
197. by the web browser Figure 153 Example on comments in a JavaScript function sendform addCallNo document testform callno value it the user forgot to press add tmplist document testform callnolist En Buttons for example the To button that opens the phonebook can also be hidden directly in the code To do this insert hidden double quotation marks both before and after hidden as input type as follows document write lt input type button value will become document write lt input type hidden value Note To change the user interface index4 it is necessary to open and change one or more of the files send htm1 receive html and admin html Note If changes to the phonebook access To button beep codes or priority settings are made it is also necessary to change the files editpagtext html and leditpagtext html to get a consistent user interface Note In order to be able to restore the default GUI make a backup before changes See Backup and Restore of NetPage files on page 408 Translation of the User Interfaces The texts presented in the user interfaces can be translated The translation is entered differently depending on the example user interface that is used The HTML files index_template and index1 index2 and index3 are translated in the HTML code The NetPage user interface index4 on the other hand is translated in the language js and receive html file where
198. ce Connect charger to PDM via USB and check if charger goes online If yes check software version of the charger Status LED is flashing red for 3s then green A factory reset has been performed It may be necessary to set parameters from PDM AIWS Status LED is flashing red 100 ms on 800 ms off for more than 3s An error occurred during Easy Replacement Remove portable from charger Status LED is flashing red 800 ms on 100 ms off for more than 3s If the error occurred during Easy Replacement remove the portable from the charger The charger should return to normal operation Otherwise send charger for service Charging does not start Check that the telephone is properly inserted in the charger Advanced Charger does not appear in PDM AIWS Check that the communication cable USB or Ethernet is connected If charger doesn t appear in the AIWS device manager when connected via Ethernet you might have to configure the AIWS IP address with the PDM tool refer to Advanced Charger does not appear in AIWS on page 200 Easy replacement does not start Check that the handsets are of the same device type Check the handset software version refer to the configuration manual for details Check that the Advanced Charger software version is at least 1 3 7 see Software Update on page 202 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 505 Troubleshooting Multiple Battery Charger Charging does not start
199. ce Guide 05 2010 Operation Operation Charger operation Operation when charger is connected to power supply When the charger is connected to external power supply the following normal operation can be done Telephone charging 1 Connect the charger to the AC power supply 2 Place a telephone in the charging slot to start charging Telephone disconnection 1 First tilt the telephone forwards 2 Then lift the telephone upwards Note Do not try to lift the telephone upwards before tilting it forwards Easy Replacement The Advanced Charger supports the Easy Replacement feature Easy replacement is performed via the telephone display and does not involve PDM or AIWS The Advanced Charger only needs a power connection to support easy replacement A connection to PDM WSM is not needed See the Configuration Manual for your cordless telephone for details Note The Advanced Charger software needs to be of version 1 3 7 or higher Operation when charger is connected to PDM AIWS When the charger is connected to a PDM AIWS the following additional operations can be done e Software upgrade of charger or telephone e Parameter editing of charger or telephone e Phonebook upload Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 203 Installing and operating the Advanced Charger e Language upload See Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM on page 239 or AIWS Device Manager on pa
200. ce Guide 05 2010 131 Installing and operating IPBS Alarms All active alarms are displayed here An alarm is a fault that affects the normal service of the IP DECT system and may require action from personnel to correct it An IP DECT Master can collect alarms from Radios and it can display all active alarms in the system If an object is removed from the system object related alarms are automatically cleared after a timeout period of 30 minutes Active alarms are also cleared if the related object is restarted For a description of the attributes see the table below Attribute Description Time The date and time when the alarm is issued Code A unique number that identifies the alarm Click the code to get more detailed information about the alarm For a list of possible codes and their descriptions see Fault Code Descriptions on page 496 Severity It has three possible states e Critical Immediate action is required It is displayed for example if a managed object goes out of service e Major Urgent action is required It is displayed for example if the capability of the managed object is severely degraded e Indeterminate Level of severity cannot be determined Remote The IP Address of the object that reported the alarm Click the IP address to access the object Source The software module that reported the alarm Together with the code it uniquely identifies an alarm Description A textua
201. ce valid for file upload 348 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager 1 Select the Devices tab 2 Select the device s to upload a company phonebook to It is possible to select several devices but only devices of the same Device Type can be selected 3 Inthe Device Menu select Upload Company Phonebook The Upload Phonebook dialogue opens Select which phonebook to upload Click OK The phonebook is uploaded to the device Upgrade a Device with new Software It is possible to upgrade the software in a device Upgrade of device software is not available in unlicensed mode This feature requires a licence valid for file upload 1 Connect a device to the system 2 Select the Devices tab 3 Select from the list the device s that are to be upgraded The selected row is highlighted It is possible to select several devices but only devices of the same Device Type can be selected Note A software upgrade from AIWS should be done on one device to start with If successful the remaining devices can be updated in one operation Viv AK Tip By using Ctrl and or Shift it is possible to select several devices simultaneously 4 Click Upgrade in the Device menu Alternatively right click and choose Upgrade double click on the desired device or click the Upgrade button in the toolbar 5 The view changes to the Upgrade software dialogue Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintena
202. certificate file 3 Click the Upload button to upload the file to the device Note The Upload function requires a previously issued CSR to exist Default Device Certificate This section corresponds to option 1 in Certificate Handling Options on page 62 If the default device certificate is missing for the device it will be generated together with a key pair when the IPBS is upgraded to version R3 The default certificate contains the MAC address of the device and will be valid for 10 years If the self signed certificate is deleted and the device is restarted a new certificate and key pair will be generated HTTPS is deactivated during the generation creation of the certificate The default certificate is a self signed certificate This means that certificates cannot be verified and thus the user administrator will be prompted by the web browser to accept the certificate before it can be used From this point on within the browser session as long as the certificate is not changed communication between the browser and the device is possible without further accept operations from the user administrator If the device certificate is replaced or regenerated the user administrator has to manually accept the new certificate Self signed Certificates This section corresponds to option 2 in TLS Certificates on page 62 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 99 Installing and operating IPBS 1 Se
203. cessor ethernet for the trunk connection to the Master IPBS This requires Communication Manager 5 2 or higher For DECT R4 users the same features are available as for DECT R2 and previous IP DECT users The available features and feature operation is the same as for analog station users but interactions with Multiple Locations feature set is limited Roaming users have to follow the actual location rules for dialing and for feature activation deactivation Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 175 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager Since Communication Manager 4 0 3 and Communication Manager 5 1 the optional feature Location Based Routing for IP Trunks was introduced which is important for Multi Location configuration For Communication Manager versions below Communication Manager 6 0 the SA field SA9004 Location Based Routing for IP Trunks on page 7 of the system parameters special applications form needs to be enabled Since Communication Manager 6 0 Location Based Routing for IP Trunks is part of the general Communication Manager features hence SA9004 is not available any more The Avaya 3720 3725 user should use FACs feature access codes programmed via PDM for in call menu and or call services menu in the phone for activating deactivating Communication Manager features if the station s COS has the Console Permission turned off set to n 176 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide
204. commended to backup these files on a regular basis see Backup the Configuration on page 373 304 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 AIWS General AIWS General Authentication Levels and Default Passwords Figure 93 AIWS start page Send Message Phonebook O E Device Manager Configuration Setup Wizard E a E AIWS has different authentication levels e Using the Send Message function i e creating and sending messages can be done default be done by any user in the system and requires no password However NetPage can be password protected e User rights is required for the administration of the phonebook Default user name and password are user and password e Administrator rights is required for the setup the configuration and administration of AIWS simple troubleshooting and changing passwords except for the sysadmin password Default user name and password are admin and changeme e System Administrator rights is used for advanced troubleshooting gives access to all administration pages and the permission to change all passwords Default user name and password are sysadmin and setmeup e Auditor rights gives basically the same access as Administrator rights but without permission to alter values There is no access to the Setup Wizard or the Device Manager Default user name and password is auditor and readonly For information about passw
205. communication connections to the charger Follow these instructions to start PDM or AIWS If you are using AIWS 1 Check that the Rackmount Charger is connected 2 Start AIWS 3 Go to the Devices tab and verify that the Rackmount Charger is online it may take up to 15 sec If you are using PDM 1 Check that the Rackmount Charger is connected to your PC 2 Start PDM 3 Go to the Devices tab and verify that the Rackmount Charger is online For instructions on how to verify that the charger parameter setting works and for further instructions please see Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM on page 239 or Devices on page 338 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 235 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger Operation Charger Operation When the charger is connected to external power supply normal operation is done as follows Telephone charging 1 Connect the charger to the AC power supply 2 Place a telephone in the charging slot to start charging Telephone disconnection 1 First tilt the telephone forwards 2 Then lift the telephone upwards is not try to lift the telephone upwards before tilting it forwards If the charger is connected to PDM AIWS the following operations can be done e Software upgrade of devices e Parameter settings for devices See Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM on page 239 or Devices on page 338
206. connect up to four Rackmount Charger to one single LAN outlet Figure 48 Rackmount Charger This chapter is intended as a guide for installation maintenance and troubleshooting purposes Power Supply for Rackmount Charger Supply voltage 100 240 VAC 0 7 A 50 60 Hz Building fuse for fixed installation 10 A maximum Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 221 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger Installation alternatives e The Rackmount Charger as delivered can be installed as a single unit When installed as a single unit the power cord with the C14 connector may be used with a suitable extension cord to be plugged into a wall outlet Up to four single units may be connected to one single LAN outlet e f more than one Rackmount Charger is used in a serial configuration a fixed installation must be made For safety reasons it is not allowed to supply more than one unit by the power cord with the C14 connector When units are supplied in series the installation must be made by an authorized electrician and the C14 connectors must be removed Maximum five units may be connected in serial power supply but LAN serial connection is limited to four units In Sweden Norway and Finland a connection to protective earth safety grounding must be provided Safety The Rackmount Charger is connected to 100 240VAC 0 7A 50 60 Hz For safety reasons e the safety covers on top of the supply voltage term
207. cted template Ctrl F Find a template Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 287 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM File types In this appendix the different file extensions that are used in PDM are explained System files are not described File type Software file devices Phonebook file Parameter Definition file Language file Package file Site file Template file Number file Translation file Extension bi cpb def n Ing pkg ste tpl xcp xml Description Software for devices Company Phonebook file for portable devices Including all possible settings for a certain device type for a certain version Language file for cordless telephones Archive that can include different file types such as parameter definition files def software files bin and template files tpl Storage for site specific data These files may not be edited manually Used only in the PDM not in AIWS Contains one or more exported templates Exported Numbers eXtensible Markup Language Language file for PDM 288 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installing and operating AIWS Introduction Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS is a server for handling wireless services and messaging It is running on a solid state Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware AIWS hardware This chapter describes the installation and configuration of AIWS plu
208. ction gt xa i i m i i We baudrate No connection with NSS ISC_ main board Normal operation Connection with NSS ISC main board LON Protocol running S Each segment 250 ms Installation of LPB A Important Always follow the instructions in Power Down and Restart of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 425 when disconnecting the power to the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 1 Remove the cover from the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware see Opening the Housing on page 431 2 Perform a power down of the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware see Power Down on page 425 3 Lift off the screw connector J1 from the LPB 454 Avaya DECT RA Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 LON Piggy Back Circuit Board LPB 4 Attach the LPB on the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware circuit board Carefully line up the male connector pins of the LPB with the female connector of the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware then press the LPB down firmly To avoid misalignment the pin 12 on the J3 connector of the LPB is cut off and the corresponding hole on the J9 connector of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware plugged See figure 181 below Figure 181 Mounting of LPB on Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware circuit board 5 Connect cables to the screw connector J1 Use max 2 x 0 8 mm wires per connector Strip the outer sheath of the cables to a length of about 10 Communication Manager Only use pins 1 and 2 for connection of the LO
209. ctor MCX male connector at the end of a1 m Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide RG316 coaxial cable minimum bending radius 20 mm 05 2010 487 Technical Data Radiation pattern 488 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Directional dual antenna Directional dual antenna General Manufacturer Huber Suhner Product code manufacturer SPA 1900 85 8 0 DS Physical Size 101 h x 95 w x 32 d mm Weight 0 11 kg Material colour housing ASA and aluminium light grey RAL 7035 radome ASA dark grey RAL7042 Environmental Operating and storage temperature 40 to 80 C Functional Specs Frequency range 1850 to 1990 MHz Nominal impedance 50 ohms VSWR 1 5 Polarization dual linear 45 slant Gain 8 dBi Radiation in horizontal plane beam width H plane at 3 dB 85 Radiation in vertical plane beam width E plane at 3 dB 75 Down tilt 0 Front to back ratio 12 dB Isolation between ports 30 dB Maximum power 75 watts CW at 25 C Connector MCX male connector at the end ofa 1m ENVIROFLEX 316D coaxial cable Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 489 Technical Data Radiation pattern Typical radiation in horizontal plane Typical radiation in vertical pla
210. d n Calls Share IP Signaling Connection n RRQ Required n Media Encryption n Bypass If IP Threshold Exceeded n H 235 Annex H Required n DTMF over IP out of band Direct IP IP Audio Connections y Link Loss Delay Timer sec 90 IP Audio Hairpinning n Enable Layer 3 Test y Interworking Message PROGress DCP Analog Bearer Capability 3 1kHz 05 2010 Communication Manager system administration Since Communication Manager 4 0 3 and Communication Manager 5 1 The Location for Routing Incoming Calls parameter is only visible when SA9004 field is ON and group type is H323 The setting for Location Routing Inc Calls provides the location from where the call is being initiated over the Signaling Group If Location Routing Inc Calls field of Signaling Group is blank default value the location of CLAN s cabinet or the location of the Processor Ethernet PE is is taken for routing the call depending on whether CLAN or PE is being used to carry that H 323 signaling channel Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide Group Number 110 Group Type h 323 Remote Office n Max number of NCA TSC 5 SBS n Max number of CA TSC 5 IP Video n Trunk Group for NCA TSC 110 Trunk Group for Channel Selection 110 X Mobility Wireless Type DECT TSC Supplementary Service Protocol a T303 Timer sec 10 Location Routing Inc Calls xxx H 245 DTMF Signal Tone Duration msec Near end No
211. d Maintenance Guide 05 2010 43 Planning an IP DECT System 2 Walk away from the base station with the cordless phone Also enter rooms to the left and right 3 Determine the edge of the cell by means of the limit warning or by looking to the Link Info display and listening to the sound quality Do the same in the opposite direction This is the horizontal coverage on the floor of the base station Measure horizontal range on floor above see 2 in figure 10 Go to the floor above leaving the base station on its current location and measure the horizontal coverage here Measure Horizontal Range on floor below see 3 in figure 10 Go to the floor below leaving the base station on its current location and measure the horizontal coverage again Note If the building is transparent to radio signals the vertical coverage can reach to yet another floor above and below In this way the horizontal and vertical coverage of a single base station in a typical area is found see figure 10 The cell size found can be taken as an average used to calculate the total number of base stations Depending on the size of the building and the type of construction one or two more random checks in typical areas can be done to verify the first measurement The typical cell size is determined by averaging the values 44 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Traffic Capacity of the System Traffic Capacity of the Syste
212. d by time 180 h during optimal condition Charge time lt 4h Discharge charge cycles gt 65 capacity left after 500 full charge discharge cycles Connectors Multi purpose connector For battery charging software download and configuration Headset connector User interface Standard 2 5 mm Display w x h 112 x 115 pixels with white LED back light Indicator LED on top front for visual indication of incoming call The LED may also be used for visual indication of normal function Vibrator Incoming call Keypad e Soft keys e Hook off e On hook and Power On Off on the same key e Four way navigation key e Numerical keys Audio 470 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya 3720 DECT Telephone Ring signal Adjustable in 8 steps Earpiece Adjustable in 8 steps of 3dB each Maximum sound pressure level 88 dBA 10 Communication Manager Loudspeaker Duplex loud speaking function Settings Languages 6 English French German Italian Russian Spanish and 13 downloadable Central Phonebook Maximum name and number length 40 characters in a name and 20 digits in a number Company Phonebook Maximum name and number length 24 characters in a name and 24 digits in a number 1 number per name Entries 1000 Local Phonebook Storage of contacts e 250 contac
213. d your managers Base the fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired knowledge and resources from a variety of sources including but not limited to Installation documents System administration documents Security documents Hardware software based security tools Shared information between you and your peers Telecommunications security experts To prevent intrusions to your telecommunications equipment you and your peers should carefully program and configure Your Avaya provided telecommunications systems and their interfaces Your Avaya provided software applications as well as their underlying hardware software platforms and interfaces Any other equipment networked to your Avaya products TCPIIP Facilities Customers may experience differences in product performance reliability and security depending upon network configurations design and topologies even when the product performs as warranted Product Safety Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following international Product Safety standards as applicable IEC 60950 or IEC 60950 1 including all relevant national deviations as listed in the IECEE Bulletin Product Category OFF IT and Office Equipment CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 UL 60950 or CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 UL 60950 1 This product may contain Class 1 laser devices Class 1 Laser Product Luokan 1 Laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat Electromagnetic Compatibil
214. de Name aled S85 CLAN 1 Far end Node Name Master IPBS Near end Listen Port 5210 Far end Listen Port 5210 Far end Network Region 1 LRO Required n Calls Share IP Signaling Connection n RRQ Required n Media Encryption n Bypass If IP Threshold Exceeded n H 235 Annex H Required n DTMF over IP out of band Direct IP IP Audio Connections y Link Loss Delay Timer sec 90 IP Audio Hairpinning n Enable Layer 3 Test y Interworking Message PROGress DCP Analog Bearer Capability 3 1kHz 05 2010 185 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager Configuring the signaling group for LSP setup After adding first page of the signaling group on the main server as mentioned in the heading Configuring the signaling group now go to the page 2 of the signaling group and configure the page as below Note Note Below page will display only with Communication Manager 5 2 or later version and with PE configuration only change signaling group 2 Page 2 of 6 LIMIT SIGNALING GROUP USAGE Enable on the main Processor s y Enable on Survivable Processors ESS and LSP all 186 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Communication Manager system administration Configuring the trunk group Set for the Signaling Group the related signaling group number used for DECT R4 trunk or if the Member Assignment Method is manual the related Signaling Group has to be set for each trunk group member Set the TAC Tru
215. dited Click OK The Edit template window closes 282 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Administration Delete a template 1 Select the Templates tab Select the template you want to delete The selected row is highlighted In the Template menu select Delete or right click and select Delete or press the Delete button The Delete template dialogue opens 4 Click Yes The Delete template dialogue closes and the template is deleted Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 283 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Troubleshooting See Portable Device Manager PDM on page 509 284 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Uninstall the PDM Uninstall the PDM In the Windows Start menu select your PDM application Select Uninstall The PDM application is uninstalled Open the Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs Mark Unite Host Router and click Add Remove Unite Host Router may have left configuration files If you want to remove these files you can remove that folder oF oe eS Note The Unite Host Router may be used for other programs on your computer 6 Open the installation folder for the Unite Host Router C Program Files ASAB and remove the Unite Host Router folder manually Figure 84 Selected elements in the installation folder File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sac Q a ya Search E Folders EE Addres
216. dmin 3 Select Enter the following settings Field name Description e Device Name Enter a description for the device e User Name Enter a login user name e Password Enter a password e Confirm Confirm the password Password Note Only changing the password will not result in the settings being saved For the settings to be saved both user name and password must be updated at the same time Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 79 Installing and operating IPBS 4 Click OK Additional Administrator Accounts The Additional Administrator Account section the lower part of the page displays a list of existing additional system administrator accounts Create An Additional Account To create an additional administrator account do the following 1 Login as system administrator see Login as System Administrator on page 78 2 Select Configuration gt General gt Admin 3 On the next free account row Enter User Name Enter Password Enter Password again Select Administrator for System Administrator or Auditor in the drop down list See Access Levels on page 76 for a description of access levels 4 Click OK The account row is created Modify An Additional Account To modify an additional administrator account do the following 1 Login as system administrator see Login as System Administrator on page 78 Select Configuration gt General gt Admin On an exis
217. e configured Region IDs in the AIWS The digit treatment for a central phonebook query in the cordless telephones will be done according to the defined rules for the region ID of the IPBS Master or Standby Master the telephone is connected to IPBS Masters and Standby Masters can use the same IP Region ID so they will use the same digit treatment rules 3 Click OK Service Discovery If no Device Manager e g AIWS has been selected to be used in the Avaya IP DECT system see Device Management on page 123 then the Master will automatically search for an existing Device Manager on the network To set the Master to search in a specific domain on the network or to stop the search follow the steps below 1 Select UNITE gt Service Discovery Note To access the Service Discovery tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Doone of the following To stop the Master to search for a Device Manager select the Disable check box To setthe Master to search for a Device Manager in a specific domain on the network enter the domain id in the Domain ID text field The domain id must be the same as the one entered in the Device Manager 3 Click OK Send Status Log It is possible to send alarm and event reports to the Unite system For example directly to the ESS fault handler or to the UNA Unite Node Assistant which in turn forwards the alarm event according to distribution lists 1 Select UN
218. e page and then System information in the left pane The System Information page opens Check system status Check if handset is online Admin Menu gt Centr Management DECT online gt If handset is connected over the air Eth USB Online if handset is connected to the Advanced Rack charger Check in AIWS advanced configuration AIWS start page configuration other settings advanced configuration in the device management the local AIWS IP Address 127 0 0 1 DECT should be configured If the IP Address point to another AIWS in the network the devices will appear in this AIWS Device manager Check if Advanced Rack charger is online LED on charger needs to lit green ping to the IP address of the Advanced charger check DHCP sever for IP Address or use static IP address if configured on the charger Software in Portable Not Recognised Synchronization Fails A device might have software with a parameter set that is newer than the version recognized by the PDM The PDM will then be unable to send parameters to the device An unknown parameter version will be highlighted in red letters in the Parameters column for the selected device It indicates that the synchronization between the device and the AIWS DeviceManager was not successful If this is the case the AlWS DeviceManager should be updated with new software and definition files provided by your local supplier See Import Parameter Definition Files on page 343 Device So
219. e 1 Phone number 1 First name 2 Surname 2 Phone number 2 If you later want to edit the number list the uploadednrlist js file is accessible with the ftp client and can also be modified manually Test that the number list works as desired Make a backup of the uploadednrlist js file see further in Backup and Restore of NetPage files on page 408 Note When the number list has been updated be sure to clean the cache memory on the web browser Predefined Groups Note My Groups are created from the NetPage and are not to be mistaken for the groups created from the Configuration page in AIWS This functionality is only accessible from index4 see figure 154 on page 398 Common Groups Common Groups can be used by all NetPage users It is possible to create up to 30 predefined Common Groups with up to 50 Call IDs in each These groups are stored on the FTP area My Groups My Groups are stored locally and can only be accessed or changed from the PC where they are stored Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 405 Installing and operating AIWS There is a limited storage area This means that for groups with approximately 20 characters name and Call ID the following applies Amount of Groups Group Members 10 19 15 7 20 2 Create Groups in My Groups 1 2 3 4 o Click My groups button in NetPage Click Add group Enter a name for the group in the Na
220. e 155 The Messaging Tool page Messaging Tool EN Messaging Tool Previous Factory cancel 4 Enter text to be shown as the title Click Activate NetPage Configuration Configure NetPage messaging The following settings are applicable for NetPage web messaging To set messaging properties 1 Click Configuration on the start page The AIWS Configuration page appears 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu on AIWS Configuration page The AIWS Advanced Configuration page appears 402 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Messaging Tool Configuration 3 Select Web Messaging in the left menu The Message page appears Figure 156 The Message configuration page Message max length b ez o Call ID range Lower limit Call ID range Upper limit User login required Automatic logout when idle minutes 0 Messaging rights Call ID range BERBERE Number list source Local de Activate 3 4 Enter values for messaging 5 Click Activate The following parameter can be set e Message max length Sets the maximum number of characters that can be forwarded to a unit Messages longer than the set value are truncated e Call ID range Lower limit Sets the lower limit of a Call ID range Messages sent to Call IDs out of this range are cancelled An empty field means no lower limit e Call ID range Upper limit Sets the upper
221. e GUI see Access the GUI on page 73 Change the default password see Change the Default Password on page 76 Configure LDAP user name and password mark the Write Access check box see Configure LDAP Server on page 106 Set a static IP address and set DHCP to off see Set a Static IP Address on page 103 Set the mode to Master see Select Mode on page 113 Perform a reset to restart the IPBS in Master mode see Reset on page 135 Select DECT gt System and enter password Select system name and password see Change System Name and Password on page 110 Set default language see Set Default Language on page 111 Select supplementary services see Configure Supplementary Services on page 113 Set frequency band see Set Frequency Band on page 111 82 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Configuration Configure the Master ID see Configure Master ID on page 114 Select PBX see Configure IP PBX on page 114 Set the Master IP address to 127 0 0 1 see Enter IP Address to the Pari Master on page 117 Perform a reset to restart the IPBS in Master mode see Reset on page 135 If problem to access the Master from a certain PC after the reset e Open a command window in windows by selecting Start gt Run and enter Communication Managerd in the Open text field e Enter the following commands arp d Delete the arp c
222. e Guide 05 2010 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager General usage and Important Notes For releases before Avaya Aura Communication Manager Communication Manager 6 0 the special application SA8567 PHS X Station Mobility over IP is mandatory to be installed to enable the IP DECT capability on Communication Manager Since Communication Manager 6 0 IP DECT is part of the general Communication Manager features hence SA8567 is not available any more The communication between the Communication Manager and the IP DECT system is done via IP Trunks using the H 323 X Mobile protocol One or more fixed IP trunk connections are required between an IPBS Master and Communication Manager The Radio IPBS are controlled by the IPBS Master they do not register to the Communication Manager system Several Master IPBS can be connected to the Communication Manager building one common IP DECT system while one main Master IPBS holds the DECT user database Users can roam between these IP DECT masters using one single subscription with the system A separate IPBS Master needs to be configured for a site which has survivability for the Communication Manager system The primary trunks of this IPBS master will be configured to the Communication Manager in the main location Redundant trunks will be configured to the local LSP that will take over if the connection to the main location fails This LSP can only take over if the main location uses PE pro
223. e added inside the tags Below is an example of a language file just showing two buttons with helptext for simplicity Figure 145 Example of a translation file lt xml version 1 0 encoding I1SO 8859 1 gt lt translations gt lt language id English type complete gt lt app id Alarm Manager gt lt text id ACTION_TYPE_SELECTOR gt lt translation gt Action Type lt translation gt lt helptext gt Select which type of action to take lt helptext gt lt text gt lt text id ACTIVATE_EHCONF_OK gt lt translation gt Activation of configuration OK lt translation gt lt text gt lt text id ALARM_TYPE_SELECTOR gt lt translation gt Alarm Type lt translation gt lt helptext gt The alarm type that should be triggered lt helptext gt lt text lt app gt lt language gt lt translations gt Show Pages in Translation Mode 079 All texts buttons menus etc are identified with labels for example TEXT_TRANSLATION_TITLE With the translation mode function it is possible to view the label for each button menu etc This can be helpful when translating the language file For not losing one s bearings during the translation it is a help to open two windows and view one of them in translation mode and the other in normal mode 1 Select the Enable translation mode check box in the Import Export Language page and click Apply 388 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Langu
224. e base station must be able to see as much as possible of the outdoor area to be covered that is there must be as few obstacles as possible between the base station and the covered area Ensure that a measurement is carried out in order to check how much coverage a base station provides to the outdoor area the intention is not to install all the base stations in front of windows since this is not the ideally position to provide indoor coverage normally 1 2 base stations are sufficient Type of glass Range in meters Normal glass 150 300 Surface coated float glass 30 50 Wired glass fine mesh 0 20 Lift If coverage in lifts are desired locate the base station close to the lift preferably at the front in a way that the base station can see the front This is because a lift is usually surrounded on three sides by a reinforced lift shaft with the only opening being at the front Locating a base station in front of a lift is usually not the most ideal position for the planning as a whole It is usually the case that one or more extra base stations will be required to provide coverage for a lift The base station will generally also provide coverage for the storey above and below the floor on which it is installed Stairwell The major problem with stairwells is that they are often sited in a corner of the building Coverage is not a problem in itself but it must be seen in the context of the overall pl
225. e download via Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger or OTA Max 1 000 devices Telephone configuration via Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger or OTA Max 1 000 devices 1 only with AIWS SW release above 2 32 2 multi AIWS configuration supported same as in Avaya AIWS Standard 3 AIWS Standard OAP and Enterprise Management can be combined in the same system 4 Cookies have to be enabled 486 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Omnidirectional single antenna Omnidirectional single antenna General Manufacturer MAT Equipment Product code manufacturer MA430X14 Physical Height 375 mm above wall mounting bracket Weight 0 2 kg excl pole mounting bracked of 70 grams Mounting stand off 71 mm wall to back of antenna Weight 0 82 kg Material colour shroud glass fiber greyupper cap plastic black base plastic blackwall bracket glass fiber greypole mounting clamp stainless steel Environmental Operating temperature 33 to 55 C Functional Specs Radiation in horizontal plane Frequency range 1880 to 1920 MHz Nominal impedance 50 ohms VSWR lt 1 7 Polarization linear vertical Gain at connector level 4 8 dBi 0 3 dBi omnidirectional within 0 3 dB Radiation in vertical plane beam width E plane at 3 dB 24 Maximum power 10 watts Conne
226. e good speech quality everywhere within the covered area rooms lift shafts staircases This test is executed with two cordless phones and requires two persons 1 2 3 Open the adminstrator menu in the DECT telephone see Admin Menu Tree on page 170 Go back to idle and make a call to the 2nd telephone Select softkey More gt DECT Info gt Link In the first line you can find the signal strength SS xx dBm of the connected base station The PARI is a unique identifier of the connected base station One user of the cordless telephone should now start moving around the covered area Both users must check that a good speech quality is maintained everywhere Special attention should be paid to areas such as edges of the building and areas behind metal structures where there is a possibility of reduced speech quality Check signal strength should be better than 68 dBm speech will get affected at about 75dBm Mark areas where cracking sounds or mutes are heard Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 137 Installing and operating IPBS Evaluation After having performed the coverage area test the results should be evaluated If the coverage is not sufficient you should review the planning and move or add equipment Cordless Extension Number Test This test checks for each cordless phone the complete connection from the IP DECT system to the PBX Furthermore it checks that the cordless phones number
227. e of replication in the destination directory Three states are possible Stopped Active Completed e Notify Number of change notifications sent to the server e Add Number of locally added objects e Del Number of locally deleted objects e Modify Number of locally modified objects e Pending Number of local objects waiting to be sent to the server Expert tool The Expert function should only be used after consultation with Avaya Technical Support DECT This section describes how to do the following configurations and settings Change DECT user name and password Change Subscription Method Configure Authentication Code Set Default Language Set Frequency Band Enable Disable Carriers Configure Coder Configure Supplementary Services Select Master Mode Configure Trunks Enable Disable Radio Multiple Radio Configuration Assign PARI Enter SARI Configure Air Synchronization Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 109 Installing and operating IPBS Figure 28 The DECT System configuration page AVAYA IP DECT Base Station Configuration System Suppl Serv Master Trunks Radio Radio config PARI SARI Air Sync General LAN System Name Viking IP Frankfurt Lab IP Password lecccccce LDAP Confirm Password TT BEST Subscriptions with System AC y ARTE Authentication Code 1234 SAL He Default Language English y Users Frequency Europe Device Overview E E EE E E T e a 9 raffic
228. e station planning are as follows 1 Find out the client specific requirements see Client s Requirements on page 34 2 Determine the average cell size using the site survey tool see Determine the Average Cell Size on page 43 Decide base station positions see Location of the Base Stations on page 47 Make a base station plan see Making a Base Station Plan on page 50 Perform a measurement using the site survey tool to confirm that speech and air sync coverage is as expected Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 33 Planning an IP DECT System Client s Requirements The most important thing when planning an IP DECT system is that the system meets the needs and requirements of the customer Discuss with the customer where high quality is of absolute necessity and whether there are areas where it is sufficient for people to be available but with lower sound quality for example outdoors or in a production hall Also discuss whether special areas such as lifts stairwells basements indoor car parks toilets maintenance shafts and so on should be covered In some areas and departments for example sales purchase technical support departments canteens a higher traffic capacity is needed Consequentially these areas requires additional base stations see Traffic Capacity of the System on page 45 for information how to calculate traffic capacity Discuss with the customer where a higher traff
229. e stations Outdoor housing DECT base stations Physical Dimension 389 w x 170 d x 440 h mm Weight 5 kilogram base station not included Material glass fibre reinforced polyester Colour grey RAL 7036 Environmental Check the environmental conditions of the base station to be used Follow these conditions Branding Compliance to regulations and standards Not branded Electrical safety IP66 according to IEC 529 Approvals UL CSA and Australian UL CSA and Australian Optional Pole mounting set can be ordered seperately Dimension The flexible mounting strip enables mounting on a pole with a circumference up to 750 mm Material stainless steel aluminium and zinc plated metal Weight ca 1 5 kilogram Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 493 Technical Data 494 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Troubleshooting Introduction This chapter provides steps to follow in the event of a failure of one of the following devices IP DECT Base Station IPBS Avaya 3720 3725 DECT Telephones Advanced Charger Multiple Battery Charger Rackmount Charger Portable Device Manager PDM Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 495 Troubleshooting IP DECT Base Station IPBS The IPBS is unreachable by web GUI If the firmware is corr
230. e the systems To see the occupied system IDs of other Avaya IP DECT systems within the coverage area perform an RFP scan see Backup on page 129 1 2 SARI Select DECT gt PARI Select a number between 1 and 35 If this is not done the IPBS will randomly select a number Click OK Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 The SARI is the system broadcast identity which uniquely identifies an IP DECT system It is needed to make the IP DECT system operate The SARI is added in the Master 118 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Note When changing the SARI the subscription data of all subscribed cordless telephones will get invalid even if they are shown as subscribed in the User tab So they have to be unsubscribed manually and subscribed again Select Dect gt SARI Enter the licence number delivered by your supplier in the SARI text field Click OK Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 D w a a Configure Air Synchronization This section only applies to the IPBS IPBS System The IPBSs uses the DECT interface to synchronize one IPBS is assigned the role as Air Sync Master It is not necessary to configure which IPBS to synchronize with this is handled automatically For more information on air synchronization see System Description on page 17 Normally only one Air Sync Master is allowed in one site If
231. e type 3725 Parameter version 24 4 fH Systems Hf Settings H Connections H Profiles H Shortcuts My Favourites w Diagnostics w Audio w Customization FileDownload Note When you save the parameters they are automatically sent to the device if it is online Run a Template to Set Parameter Values If a template has been created for a device type it can be used to set the parameter values for a range of devices or a single device The command to use is Run template 1 Select the Numbers tab The Number view opens 2 Select the Number s you wish to run the template on Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 335 Installing and operating AIWS 3 In the Number menu click Run template Alternatively right click on the Number in the Number list and select Run template from the menu that appears The Run template window appears Figure 115 Selected template to run on one or several Numbers Y Run template Device type 3725 Parameter version 25 2 Name Device type Parameter version i Cancel 4 Select a template from the Template list Note If multiple templates are selected only one of them will be executed 5 Click OK If the parameters in the database have been edited but not yet sent to the device it is indicated with Not synched or Updated queued If the Number has not been associated with a device it is now possible to do so Connect a
232. e used to connect the next rack charger or battery pack charger The Power Supply module connects to 100 240VAC 0 7A 50 60 Hz When working with the units the mains power supply cable must always be disconnected The safety covers must be mounted on top of the power supply terminal blocks to prevent hazardous situations like electric chock Figure 51 Examples of how Rackmount Chargers can be mounted and connected to a power source to outlet to outlet 009 Opening the top cover 1 Open the top cover by first pressing on the sides of the top cover then lifting it upwards 228 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Figure 52 Opening the top cover of the Rackmount Charger Fixed installation in detail Fixed installation of the first charger or single unit with fixed electrical installation 1 Remove the C14 connector from the power cord Measure cut and strip the power cord to be connected to the disconnect device 2 Connect the mains power supply cord to the disconnect device The IEC colour code is used in the power cord supplied IEC Brow Blue Gr Ye Colours US Black White Green Old Red Black Gree Load Active Neutr al Earth Also called Line Hot Return Cold Grounded connector Ground Safety Earth Earth Ground Grounding conductor Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 229 Instal
233. ed xcp 3 Click Open 4 The Number files will be saved Import Templates Updated Template files may be distributed by your supplier 1 In the File menu click Import gt Templates A File Browser window appears 2 Select the Template files to be imported tpl 3 Click Open Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 277 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM 4 The Template files will be saved Export Templates It is possible to export template files One or several templates can be exported 1 Select the Templates tab The Templates view appears 2 Select the template or templates to be exported 3 Inthe Template menu click Export The Export templates dialogue appears By default the file will be saved in the My documents directory or last used directory with the name Templates tpl You can select another name and directory 4 Click Save Close the PDM In the File menu click Exit The PDM shuts down 278 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Administration Administration Data Backup All settings in the PDM such as the configuration the sites and the templates are stored as database files It is recommended to do backups on a regular basis When a backup is done as in 4 1 1 the following data is included device software definition files templates devices and Numbers including parameters Backup PDM Database Files 1 C
234. ed at the site in a detailed list The following information can be displayed e Number the unique identifier of the Number The identifier is unique for that device type e Device type the device model the Number is intended for e Parameter version shows the version of the parameters in the Number e Device ID the unique identifier of the device that the Number is associated to e Online shows if the device the Number is uploaded to is connected to the PC running PDM The icon indicates a connected device e Status shows the parameter synchronization status A Number can also be queued for synchronization Several different indications are used for example Synchronizing Sync queued Save queued Synchronized etc When the Number is offline the database status is shown Synchronized or Not synched e Saved shows if the Number s parameters have been stored in the database The icon indicates that the parameters have been stored e Last run template indicates which template that was last run for that Number Figure 63 The Numbers tab showing a list of Numbers in a system OurSite Ascom WinPDM File Number Options Help Devices Numbers Templates FAA amp New Device types Search For in Number v Show all All Number Device type Parameter version Device ID Online Status Saved Last ru Desktop Charger Ad 73456 d62 24 7 Synchronized Y 3 po 6606641 Desktop Ch 2 0 00013801
235. ed by web browsers to authenticate the identity of the device Web server For more information see Certificates on page 97 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 63 Installing and operating IPBS Installation of the Base Station This section describes how to install the IPBS The base station can be fixed to a wall a ceiling a pole or a beam by means of the mounting bracket included When fixing the base station to a wall or ceiling the included plugs and screws must be used When fixing it to a pole or beam a strap or a flexible metal band must be used this is not included Note Fixing the base station to metal surfaces requires special consideration and is not recommended for several reasons If this is unavoidable try to ensure a distance between the base station and the metal surface of preferably 1 meter If this is not possible to achive the best option to use is a base station with internal antennas Base Station Cabling If not using the wall outlet and the patch cable included in the box the recommended base station cable is a standard CAT5 unshielded ethernet cable with minimum 26 AWG copper conductors this cable is also used for powering the base station It is assumed that installation personnel know how to crimp RJ45 connectors to a cable Note Since the distance between the base station and the wall is limited a RJ45 modular jack without cable retention must be used Note Ensure that
236. ed version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya Customer and or End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya Avaya s agents servants and employees against all claims lawsuits demands and judgments arising out of or in connection with subsequent modifications additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by the Customer or End User How to Get Help For additional support telephone numbers go to the Avaya support Web site http www avaya com support If you are Within the United States click the Escalation Contacts link that is located under the Support Tools heading Then click the appropriate link for the type of support that you need Outside the United States click the Escalation Contacts link that is located under the Support Tools heading Then click the International Services link that includes telephone numbers for the international Centers of Excellence Providing Telecommunications Security Telecommunications security of voice data and or video communications is the prevention of any type of intrusion to that is either unauthorized or malicious access to or use of your company s telecommunications equipment by some party Your company s telecommunications equipment includes both this Avaya product and any other voice data video equipment that could be accessed via this Avaya product that is networked equipment A
237. eld if you are not using the standard community name public The community text string acts like a password to regulate access to the agent on the Base Station 3 Enter a device name in the Device Name field This field is optional and serves only informational purposes 4 Enter the name and phone number of the contact person in the Contact field This field is optional and serves only informational purposes 5 Enter a location in the Location field This field is optional and serves only informational purposes 6 Select the Authentification Trap check box to enable the sending of authentification traps Access via SNMP is only possible if the correct Community Name is entered If enabled a trap will be generated in the event of access with an incorrect Community Name 7 Enter the IP address of the desired trap destinations in the Trap Destinations field SNMP traps will be sent to all destinations 8 Enter the IP address and mask of the networks that are allowed to send SNMP requests All networks are allowed if the field is empty 9 Click OK Certificates The Certificates tab is part of IP Security in IP DECT For more information on IP Security see chapter IP Security on page 60 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 97 Installing and operating IPBS Select Configuration gt General gt Certificates AVAYA Configuration General LAN IP LDAP DECT UNITE Administration Users Dev
238. elect IP DECT under DECT Interface IP DECT for single Base Station Master Standby Master configuration e DECT IP address Since the IP DECT Master is connected over the LAN the IP address of the IP DECT Master has to be entered e Secondary DECT IP address If a Standby Master is configured in the IP DECT system the IP address of the Standby Master needs to be entered e Set multiple Locations former IP regions to No IP DECT for a multi Base Station Master Standby Master configuration 1 Remove the DECT IP address since there are several Master Base Station in the same system now 2 Remove the secondary DECT IP address 3 Set multiple Locations former IP regions to yes Message Distribution The DECT Interface has distribution lists that define where incoming data from telephones for example alarms and user data should be sent The following information is supported Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 357 Installing and operating AIWS To find settings for DECT Message Distribution do as follows 1 On the AIWS start page select Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page opens 3 Onthe AIWS Advanced Configuration page select Messaging Distribution under DECT Interface e Alarm Personal alarms with location information from telephones in the Cordless Telephone System e Mobile Dat
239. em dependent functionality such as Absence handling and Call Diversion The settings for the Call services menu are system dependent The menu is described in User Manual Avaya 3725 telephone Besides the default Call services functions it is possible to define 10 extra system specific call services by codes The codes can be programmed with pause P and auto disconnection H Hook Both Name and Data must be defined for the option to be displayed Possible values Digits 0 9 P pause H hook The programming of the menu is done with PDM or AIWS For instructions on how to edit parameters with PDM see Edit Parameters on page 259 or with AIWS see Edit Parameters on page 334 Using the PDM and the Edit template feature the parameter can be found at Systems gt Common gt Call Services gt General Service X 160 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Telephone Configuration Figure 32 Examples for Call services settings El Systems System A System B System C Data 11 O System D O System E O System F O System G O System H B Common Call Services General service 1 General service 2 General service 3 General service 4 General service 5 General service 6 General service 7 General service 8 General service 9 General service 10 CallForwardAll a Dobe ee e e8 88 6 Note Changing the language
240. emplates and parameter editing Parameter has been edited during the Purple Red Turqoise Navigation current session For templates The parameter is included in the template checked For templates and parameter editing Value not valid For templates and parameter editing The value differs from the default value For keyboard shortcuts see Device Manager Keyboard Shortcuts on page 415 Tabs The information in AIWS is shown in different views or tabs e Devices tab e Numbers tab e Templates tab In each of these tabs specific information is shown in lists about devices Numbers or templates Some of the information overlaps for example Device ID which is tied to both a specific device and to a specific Number The operations that can be done in the Device Manager are done from these tabs and from the menu Different menues are accessible in the diffferent tabs Devices Tab Select the Devices tab The view shows all devices configured at the site in a detailed list The following columns are displayed on each row Avaya DECT R4 Device ID the unique identifier of the device Device type the device model Software version shows the version of the software in the device Parameter version shows the version of the parameters in the device Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 325 Installing and operating AIWS e Upgrade status show one of the following icons o s
241. end carriage return click Create Repeat 4 to 6 if more devices are to be created otherwise click Close Assign a Number to a device It is possible to assign a Number to a device that has not yet been assigned a Number in AIWS This feature can be used if parameters have been changed on the device prior to connection to AIWS Assign a Number to a device shall not be done on a device that already has a number 1 2 3 Select the Devices tab Select the device you want to assign a Number for In the Devices menu select Assign number The Assign number to device dialogue opens Enter a new number in the New number field Click OK Note The prefix is not used in Avaya systems Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 341 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 118 The Assign number to device dialogue e Assign number to device Assign number to device New prefix New number 5 The new Number appears in the list in the Numbers tab Note Some devices need to be restarted for the new numbers to be shown Factory Reset Factory reset means that the device parameters will be reset to factory settings The Number in the database that is associated with the device will not be affected Note The device must be online Select the Devices tab Select the device s to be reset Click Factory reset in the Device menu Alternatively right click on the device and select Factory re
242. enient point at about 30 Communication Manager from the base station If for some reason the base station drops it is secured by the cable Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 67 Installing and operating IPBS Pinning 1 Cut the cable to the correct length and connect the cable to a RJ45 modular jack 2 For information on the pinning of the data jack see the following e IPBS Pin the IPBS Cable on page 68 Do not plug the connector in the base station yet Note Since the distance between the base station and the wall is limited a RJ45 modular jack without cable retention must be used Pin the IPBS Cable Figure 16 Connector pinning of the LAN PoE connector power feed over the spare cable pairs RJ45 modular jack Figure notes Tx Transmitter data pair Rx Receiver data pair Pwr Power pairs 68 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation of the Base Station Figure 17 Connector pinning of the LAN PoE connector power feed over the Rx Tx data cable pairs RJ45 modular jack Tx Pwr n Tx Pwr Figure notes Tx Pwr Transmitter 8 power pair Rx Receiver 8 power pair NC Not connected Connect the Base Station Cables If it is required that the cables enter the base station centrally from above guide the cables 1 through the recess in the middle of the base station as shown in figure 18 on page 70 Avaya DECT R4 Installa
243. ening the top cover of the Battery Pack Charger Fixed installation in detail Fixed installation of the first charger or single unit with fixed electrical installation 1 Remove the C14 connector from the power cord Measure cut and strip the power cord to be connected to the disconnect device 2 Connect the mains power supply cord to the disconnect device The IEC colour code is used in the power cord supplied Colours IEC US Old Load Also called Brow Black Red Active Line Hot n Blue White Black Neutr Return Cold Grounded connector al Gr Ye Green Gree Earth Ground Safety Earth Earth Ground a n Grounding conductor Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 215 Installing Multiple Battery Charger a The Old standard was used in various countries including Australia and some wiring may still use these colours i Gr Ye Green with Yellow stripe this is the standard world wide although it is not common in the US or Canada at present There is an important distinction between Grounding conductor safety earth and Grounded conductor Neutral These are US terms for the conductors and they are not interchangeable despite the similarity of the names Installation of additional units in a serial power configuration Note Maximum five units may be connected in power series A Important It is not allowed to connect additional Rack Chargers or Battery Pack chargers if the chargers
244. entilation system The lift maintenance room is often on the roof or in the basement The ventilation maintenance room is usually on the roof Do not omit these rooms they should be discussed with the client to avoid the client being faced with surprises A well positioned base station on the top floor 20 to 30 metres at most from the room where coverage is required usually provides sufficient coverage for the maintenance rooms on the roof Basement and Indoor Car Park It can be difficult to provide sufficient coverage in basements and indoor car parks due to the usually heavy constructions Metal Halls When providing coverage in a metal hall for example a production hall or storage building there are a number of issues which call for additional attention The dimensions of the hall and the material used metal concrete brick etc are important deciding factors in the hall s radio reception Every hall is different and it is very difficult to predict the radio reception Check carefully therefore whether the walls are made of metal what the hall s dimensions are whether the roof is reflective what is contained in the hall and whether objects in the hall are stationary or constantly moving In the case of poor speech quality in a metal hall this can be attributed to time delay spread and or the actuation of the soft suppressor Both are explained in greater detail below Time Delay Spread Time delay spread can be compared
245. ents Restart reason System Change system Automatically lt System gt Subscribe e Next Unsubscribe lt System gt Rename system lt System gt Priority lt System gt Protection lt System gt Frequency band Default EU US China see important note autodetect LA Latin America Brazil Factory Reset Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 171 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones 1 Centr Management shows the status of the handset for the maintenance DECT over the air status Eth USB DC4 RC3 status Firmware download status A Important The Frequency Band selection is only available in a factory fresh handset or after a factory reset This setting can never be changed if it was done once A wrong configuration will result that the handset will not operational anymore and needs to be sent back to the Avaya repair center The default setting is EU US China what will result in a auto detect mode for the different frequency bands This setting needs only to be changed for users in Latin America and Brazil Quick Access to the telephone s Device Information SST Menu For quick access to device information short codes can be used in the idle menu To display this information enter the following codes in the telephone Information Code Software version H34 Hardware version H34 IPEI 34 or H06H IPDI 34 or H06H User ID H34H Open
246. er and DECT Radio i DECT DECT A E DECT i Radio Master Radio 002 DECT Master The DECT Master is a software interface between the IP DECT system and the Communication Manager The DECT Master is responsible for all DECT telephones in the system The DECT Master knows which DECT Radio the telephones are located to that is which DECT Radio in the system that received the latest location registration message from the telephone A call to a telephone is directed only to the DECT Radio where the telephone is located Thus limiting the H 323 XMobile and DECT load in the system DECT Radio The DECT Radio is a software interface between DECT and H 323 XMobile A DECT Radio always communicates with one DECT Master The DECT Radio only has information of the DECT telephone which currently are on the same radio channel Single Site Installation Example Layout The layout in figure 4 can be used for customers with a single site installation Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 21 System Description Figure 4 Single site layout with one IP DECT Master CM EEE One single site The lines displayed between the Communication Manager the DECT Master and the DECT Radios in figure 4 are used to indicate the logical connection between the software modules Note The figure shows the software components An IPBS includes both the software components DECT Master
247. error logs because of an non connected DECT interface Select advanced configuration gt general settings gt view advanced parameters Set DECT interface to disable Figure 88 Setting the IP address Device Handlers Unite Addresses to device interfaces EN 192 168 0 2 DECT e AIWS2 Standard DECT and Central Phonebook connection are configured in the AIWS Setup Wizard In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Device Management Remove all IP addresses Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 297 Installing and operating AIWS Migration to a double AIWS solution This example assumes that the original system uses one AIWS Enterprise and this single AIWS handles both Device Management and the connection to DECT An additional module AIWS Standard shall now be added to the system One reason for this migration is to configure the more business critical applications such as Netpage and Central Phonebook on one AIWS and the less critical application Device Management on another Change the following settings in the original AIWS e AIWS Enterprise AIWS1 original AIWS In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Device Management Replace the address 127 0 0 1 DECT with the IP address of AIWS2 plus DECT that is if AIWS2 has the IP address 192 168 0 2 change to 192 168 0 2 DECT Click Activate In Configur
248. es which provides coverage for the floors below and above An open stairwell or an atrium can in some cases be used to provide coverage to two floors at the same time see figure 8 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 37 Planning an IP DECT System Figure 8 Base station covering two floors 2nd floor Open stairwell or atrium Fire resistant walls doors The same facts applies for fire walls as for normal walls mentioned in the section above However fire doors are usually open during the site survey it is important to close the fire doors before doing the final site survey measurement and before finalising the base station plan Should a fire break out and the doors then be closed there must of course still be sufficient coverage Special Areas This section describes a number of special areas which must be considered when doing a base station planning and how to ensure full DECT coverage in these areas Outdoors car park Coverage outdoors is usually not a problem since there are few or no obstacles The base station location depends on the client and on the size of the area to be covered If the client wishes to have as few base stations as possible installed outside because of the costs of the outdoor housing it is possible to install one or more base stations with the antennas in front of a window 38 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Base Station Coverage Th
249. eted it will stay in the list as online but not saved Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 263 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Rename a Number 1 Select the Numbers tab Select the Number you want to rename The selected row is highlighted In the Number menu select Rename or right click and select Rename The Rename number dialogue opens 4 Inthe Rename number dialogue enter a new prefix optional and a new Number in the New prefix and New number text fields 5 Click OK The Rename number dialogue closes and the new Number appears in the list in the Numbers tab Copy a Number Select the Numbers tab Select the Number you want to copy The selected row is highlighted In the Number menu select Copy or right click and select Copy The Copy Number dialogue opens 4 Inthe Copy number dialogue enter a new prefix optional and a new Number in the New prefix and New number text fields 5 Click OK The Copy number dialogue closes and the new Number appears in the list in the Numbers tab Import Contacts Note This feature is not available in all versions of PDM The contacts in a file containing contacts can be imported to PDM and synchronized with a handset This feature enables transfer of contacts from older handsets 1 In PDM click on the Numbers tab 2 Select a Number 3 In the Number menu click on Import Contacts The Import Files window
250. etwork setup mode Section 2 Fail safe mode Section 3 Not used must be set to OFF Section 4 Image Installation mode Section 5 Unlicensed mode Section 6 Not used must be set to OFF Section 7 Not used must be set to OFF Section 8 Not used must be set to OFF Changing Operating Mode 1 Set the section that corresponds to the operating mode to ON 2 Open the administration web page and press Reboot or follow the instructions in Power Down and Restart of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 425 Starting the unit in Normal Mode 1 Set all sections on SW3 to OFF Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 427 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 2 Open the page System Setup gt General on the administration web page and check that the correct licence is entered 3 Press Reboot Function Indicator Figure 165 Status is indicated by the Function Indicator according to the list below Function indicator g 004 LED Indication OK Running Fail safe mode Network setup mode iili Image installation mode HERENI Power up 1 rrr il Halted auto restart atero min Red Red MT E Re MMMM E Red iili Shut down Red Shutdown ML Memor eror 3sON 3s0FF Network error IP interface initiation error M odule key error M odule key not found Each segment 100 ms 005 428 A
251. evice Management on page 123 and Configure the Location on page 123 Reset in order to make the configuration changes take effect see Reset on page 135 If problem to access the Standby Master from a certain PC after the reset e Open a command window in windows by selecting Start gt Run and enter Communication Managerd in the Open text field e Enter the following commands arp d Delete the arp cache nbtstat R Empty the nbtstat cache e Restart the WEB browser Configure the Slave Radio This section describes how to configure the Slave Each configuration step is briefly described in the step list below for more detailed information see the corresponding subsection in Operation on page 90 84 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 2 N Configuration Note When one slave is configured the configuration can be saved and uploaded to the other slaves in the system Determine the address and access the GUI see Access the GUI on page 73 Change the default password see Change the Default Password on page 76 Set DHCP mode to Client see Dynamic IP address via DHCP on page 103 If the radio acts as a Standby Master perform the following Configure LDAP replicator enter the IP address user name and password to the LDAP server and the alternative LDAP server is not required Read only access is sufficient for the Standby Master Check the Enable check box see Configure LDAP Repl
252. example a customized user interface for sending messages Files for Translation Editing 1 Logon to AIWS with an FTP client When secure mode is enabled see Web access security settings on page 307 only secure access via HTTPS and FTPES is allowed HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS and FTP access is not allowed The FileZilla Client freeware not included supports FTPES 2 Log on with ftpuser The default password is changemetoo The files located in the Start page and NetPage folders including GIFs and CSS can be downloaded copied to a folder on your hard disc Figure 148 Folders on the FTP area E ftp 1 PALS SIS File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Back D search Folders X y 2 EA Size Type Modified Dlost found File Folder 2008 08 13 08 13 Other Places Enetpage File Folder 2008 08 13 08 15 e Internet Explorer startpage File Folder 2008 08 13 08 15 ES My Documents 4 My Network Places User Ftpuser e Internet When restoring Netpage files the files shall be placed in the same folder When secure mode is enabled see Web access security settings on page 307 only secure access via HTTPS and FTPES is allowed HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS and FTP access is not allowed The FileZilla Client freeware not included supports FTPES Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 391 Installing and operating AIWS Default User Interfaces Default Start Page GUI
253. face The product can be assigned an IP address from a DHCP server but the IP address can also be set manually Network with a DHCP Server It is required that this product always gets the same IP address to prevent it from losing contact with other equipment after a restart Inform the network administrator about the MAC address and ask him to reserve a fixed IP address via DHCP for this product 1 Set all sections on switches SW2 and SW3 to OFF refer to Figure 4 2 Connect this product to the LAN and to the power supply as shown in Figure 7 Wait until the function indicator shows the status License error refer to Figure 2 3 Open the web browser and enter the address elise xxxxx where xxxxx is the module key number starting zeros in the number can be excluded The module key number can be found on the enclosed licence certificate The number can also be found on the circuit board refer to Figure 3 Network without a DHCP Server 1 Set section one 1 on switch SW3 to ON all other sections to OFF and all sections on switch SW2 to OFF refer to Figure 4 2 Connect the Ethernet connector shown in Figure 1 to the PC or LAN with appropriate cable e Cross over cable if connected directly to the PC e Ordinary cable straight through pinouts if connected over the LAN 3 Connect the power supply to this product as shown in Figure 1 4 When the function indicator shows the status Network Setup mode set all sections on switc
254. factory reset 3 Connect the new device to the Device Manager 4 Associate the new device to the Number associated to the old device according to the instructions in Associate a Number with a Device on page 337 The Number will no longer be associated with the old device Note The subscription data will not be copied by this mechanism so a handset needs to be subscribed to the IP DECT system additionally Create new Device It is possible to enter several new Device ID s in advance into Device Manager for later association In order to simplify input when handling many devices it is possible to use a bar code reader The bar code reader should send a carriage return after each item but it is not necessary If carriage return is not sent it is necessary to click Create after each read item 1 Select the Devices tab 2 Inthe Device menu select Add device The Create devices dialogue opens 340 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Figure 117 The Create devices dialogue Create devices Device type Parameter version Device ID Continuous registration Select device type and parameter version Enter a Device ID for the device manually or by using a bar code reader The Continuous registration box can be used to select whether the Create devices dialogue shall close after clicking Create or if it shall still be open If the bar code reader does not s
255. ferent digit treatment rules an own entry using the appropriate Location ID former IP Region ID needs to be created Each IPBS Master needs to refer to one of these Location IDs IPBS Masters and Standby Masters in the same Location area can refer to the same Location ID It s recommended to use the same Location IDs as used on the Communication Manager side IP Region page e In UNS under Other select Default Category Make sure the Messaging handler service name is set to DGH Device Group Handler On AIWS device manager e Make sure that the following two entries are identically The entry in the Number field of a handset device configured in the Numbers tab and the Number extension number of the handset assigned in the IPBS Master Users tab Otherwise the messaging and centralized phonebook access won t work This restriction only exists in systems using multi IPBS Masters on one AIWS On each Base Station Master and Standby master e In UNITE gt SMS you will need to configure the Location ID former IP Region ID according to the digit treatment rules for the corresponding Location configured on the AIWS Note Note In the Standby Master it s recommended to use the same Location ID as its Master Base Station is configured Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 303 Installing and operating AIWS Administration Data Backup All settings in AIWS are stored as database files It is strongly re
256. fied technicians FCC Part 68 Supplier s Declarations of Conformity Avaya Inc in the United States of America hereby certifies that the equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB 168 label identification number complies with the FCC s Rules and Regulations 47 CFR Part 68 and the Administrative Council on Terminal Attachments ACTA adopted technical criteria Avaya further asserts that Avaya handset equipped terminal equipment described in this document complies with Paragraph 68 316 of the FCC Rules and Regulations defining Hearing Aid Compatibility and is deemed compatible with hearing aids Copies of SDoCs signed by the Responsible Party in the U S can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site http support avaya com DoC Canadian Conformity Information This Class A or B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A ou B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications Le pr sent materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d Industrie Canada European Union Declarations of Conformity CE Avaya Inc declares that the equipment specified in this document bearing the CE Conformit Europe nne mark conforms to the European Union Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999 5 EC inc
257. figuration This chapter includes settings for e Initial startup e Optional COM port settings e Site setup e Definition files e Language Initial startup In the Start menu select All Programs gt Avaya WinPDM gt Avaya WinPDM Note Windows Firewall may alert you of MwpCSI PMServer UspCSI CuspSerialCSI and CuspCSI You can ignore these security alerts since they will not affect the PDM but then the alerts will appear every time the PDM is started A better way to prevent the messages from showing up is to select Continue blocking or Unblock 244 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration The first time PDM is started the Create site dialogue opens See Create a New Site on page 256 Optional COM port settings If only the USB connection will be used the settings in this section are not needed No device using the COM port is supported currently by Avaya Site setup 1 In the File menu select Site management The Site management dialogue opens Figure 58 Site Management dialogue Site management Name Description Oursite Cview 2 Click New The Create site dialogue opens 3 Inthe Create site dialogue enter a site name and a site description optional in their respective fields Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 245 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Figure 59 Create Site di
258. file to the specified lt url gt Example mod Communication Managerd UPO scfg http 192 168 0 10 configs saved h b5 txt no op WEEKLY force 168 The command above saves the device configuration file once a week with a backlog of 5 weeks To load a configuration file on the IP DECT device use the following command mod Communication Managerd UPO cfg lt url gt lt final command gt lt serial gt The command loads the configuration file and all commands in it are executed 144 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones Introduction This chapter is intended as a guide when installing configuring and maintaining functionality of the Avaya 3725 and 3720 DECT telephones The 3725 3720 can be used straight away in your system but it is highly recommended to install the Portable Device Manager PDM or the Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS This enables customization of the behavior of the telephone to suite each user profile and the specific PBX used in the system The PDM is aimed for smaller sites where the telephones are within reach The AIWS makes it possible to administrate the telephones centrally via a web interface without the need to collect the telephones It is recommended that the reader has basic knowledge of the Avaya system and basic knowledge of subscribing telephones to the PBX Getting started with Configuration of the 3725 3720 Telephone You c
259. for details e Easy Replacement The Rackmount Charger supports the Easy Replacement feature See Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones on page 145 for details Regarding updates of telephones please see respective User Manual 236 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation LED indications The charger is equipped with a status LED The following indications are used LED indication Description Green fixed Logged on to PDM Orange fixed Not logged on to PDM Orange flashing slow 0 5 Hz 1 Software download 2 File transfer during Easy Replacement Orange flashing short flash 1 1 Hz Change phone indication during Easy Replacement Red fixed Software error Service needed Red flashing 100 ms on 800 ms off Error indication during Easy Replacement Put back old portable in charger Charger returns to Not logged in to PDM WSM mode when portable is removed Red flashing 3 long flashes 800 ms on 100 Parameter error in user parameters Charger ms off performs a factory reset and restarts Red flashing 800 ms on 100 ms off 1 Parameter error in production parameters Service needed for charger 2 Error during Easy Replacement Service needed for both portables LED indications are also described in troubleshooting Rackmount Charger on page 507 The reset button is used to reset the Rackmount Charger Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide
260. ftware Download Fails Possible causes e Portable is out of range turned off or is not subscribed to the system e The LAN is badly configured and looses packages packet loss e The LAN is overloaded and looses packages packet loss e The web server containing the image file is overloaded e Erroneous image file e Erroneous path to the image file 512 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS e The web server containing the image file is incompatible with the portable Apache Microsoft IIS are supported by the IP DECT system Get stuck while installing a new software image After booting AIWS in image installation mode the browser is not redirected to the next page there is a Network Error tcp_errror and the page was not found because the web server is not running This is mostly observed once after a power on cycle when the internal battery of the AIWS is not activated by jumper J1 please refer to Activation of Battery on page 442 e Press back on your browser to boot the AIWS in the image installation mode again Now you should get redirected to the next page even if the battery is not active e Sometimes the browser try to use a secured connection to https xxx xxx xxx xxx install what is not supported Connect manually to http xxx xxx xx xx install to continue the update Unable to access ftp area Make sure the client is set in active mode Example for I
261. g mode In forwarding mode the local UNS will only be used if the centralized UNS cannot resolve the address 1 Click Configuration on the start page The Configuration page appears 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu in the AIWS Configuration page The Advanced Configuration page appears 3 Under Other click UNS The UNS page appears Figure 136 The UNS page UNS Operating Mode Default Category Alias Call ID Operating Mode Operating mode is changed in systems with an ESS only 1 To set Operating mode click Operating mode The UNS Operating Mode page appears Figure 137 The UNS Operating Mode page UNS Operating Mode EN Stand alone Y IP address offorward destination UNS EN Factory Activate 2 Ina system with an ESS set operating mode to Forwarding and enter the ESS IP address Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 377 Installing and operating AIWS 3 Click Activate Default Category The UNS Default Category is used to decide where messages from the AIWS shall be sent This parameter is changed when the IP DECT system is connected to another module 1 To set Default Category click Default Category The UNS Default Category page appears Figure 138 The UNS Default Category page UNS Default Category Messaging handler IP address ES 1270 01 Messaging handler service name EN DGH Previous Factory E Acti
262. ge 322 for details LED indications The charger is equipped with a status LED The following indications are used LED indication Description Green fixed Logged on to PDM AIWS Orange fixed Not logged on to PDM AIWS Orange flashing 1000 ms on 1000 ms off 1 Software download 2 File transfer during Easy Replacement Orange flashing 100 ms on 800 ms off Change phone indication during Easy Replacement Red fixed Software error Service needed Red flashing Parameter error Red flashing 100 ms on 800 ms off Error indication during Easy Replacement Put back old telephone in charger Charger returns to Not logged in to PDM AIWS mode when telephone is removed Red flashing 3 long flashes 800 ms on 100 Parameter error in user parameters Charger ms off performs a factory reset and restarts Read flashing 800 ms on 100 ms off 1 Parameter error in production parameters Service needed for charger 2 Error during Easy Replacement Service needed for telephone LED indications are also described in troubleshooting Advanced Charger on page 505 204 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting See Troubleshooting on page 495 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 205 Installing and operating the Advanced Charger 206 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installing Multiple Battery Charge
263. ge 330 150 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation of Telephones Synchronizing a telephone with PDM AIWS After installing and saving a telephone it will be synchronized each time it is connected to the PDM AIWS The synchronization transfers parameter changes between the telephone and the PDM AIWS and vice versa as follows e Ifa parameter has been changed in the telephone it will be transferred to PDM AIWS e Ifa parameter has been changed in PDM AIWS while the telephone was disconnected it will be transferred to the telephone e lf the same parameter has been changed in both PDM AIWS and the telephone the value in PDM AIWS will be transferred to the telephone Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 151 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones Maintenance Definitions In the replacement descriptions the telephones are defined as e old telephone is the telephone to be replaced possibly damaged but still working e new telephone is the replacement telephone that will get the settings used in the old telephone Upgrade telephone software It is possible to upgrade or reinstall the software on a telephone When upgrading the software of the telephone any data for example messages may be deleted For upgrading a telephone see chapter PDM Upgrade a Device with new Software on page 274 or chapter AIWS Upgrade a Device with new Software on page 349
264. ge 391 Limit the number of characters included in the message text Add company logo and or modify the GUI to suit the customer s image Note The AIWS user interface only supports the Latin 1 character set For the best screen appearance Windows standard screen settings using normal font size are recommended The recommended screen resolution is 1024 x 768 How to edit The code is thoroughly commented to make it easy to understand and can be edited with a simple text or HTML editor Basic HTML Java Script and CSS knowledge is recommended Note Do not use an intelligent html editor like Frontpage or Dreamweaver as it might corrupt the html code 386 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Language and User Interface Customize the Language Note There is a difference between Translation files xml described in this section and Language files Ing Translation files are used to change the language to be used in the AIWS The Language files Ing are files that may be imported and uploaded to a device see description in Import Language files on page 346 Export a Language for Translation Editing Click Configuration on the start page Enter User name and Password and click OK Select Other Settings gt Set language in the left menu on the AIWS Configuration page The Set language page opens 4 Click the Import Export Language button The Translation page opens Transla
265. ge area of both locations you need to use different PARI values e In LDAP gt Replicator enable replication of the IPBS Master1 use the user with write access Add Users This section describes how to add users to the IP DECT system There are two ways to register cordless telephones e Using the telephone to automatically associate the IPEI number to a user see Anonymous Registration on page 88 e Entering the IPEI number of the telephone manually see Individual Registration on page 89 The PARK to subscribe the DECT handsets can be found on the user page of the IPBS Master web interface To subscribe other DECT GAP CAP devices use the PARK for the third party devices Note Telephones cannot be subscripted on a base station that is busy with 8 active calls Subscription will fail in this case due to system limitations Change to another base station or wait until a call has ended Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 87 Installing and operating IPBS Anonymous Registration The IPEI which is the unique identification number of the telephone can be assigned automatically to a user This is used to avoid having to enter the IPE number manually Add users in the IP DECT System 1 Under the Administration menu select Users 2 Click New 3 Enter the following information in the corresponding text fields leave the IPEI and the Auth Code text fields empty e Long Name The name of the user
266. gement Parameter definition Software Language Phonebook Filename Entries d62 cpb Upload a Phonebook It is possible to upload a phonebook to portable devices that support Phonebook Upload 1 Select the Devices tab Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 273 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM 2 Select the device s to upload a phonebook to It is possible to select several devices but only devices of the same Device Type can be selected 3 Inthe Device Menu select Upload Phonebook The Upload Phonebook dialogue opens Figure 80 The Upload phonebook dialogue Upload phonebook Device type 62 Talker Imported Available files 4 Select which phonebook to upload 5 Click OK The phonebook is uploaded to the device Note Uploading a new phonebook file will delete the old phonebook entries Local phonebook entries will not be affected Upgrade a Device with new Software It is possible to upgrade the software in a device 1 Select the Devices tab 2 Connect a device to the PC 3 Select the device The selected row is highlighted It is possible to select several devices but only devices of the same Device Type can be selected 4 Inthe Device menu click Upgrade Alternatively right click and choose Upgrade double click on the desired device or click the Upgrade button in the toolbar The view changes to the Upgrade d
267. general criterion in the automatic selection mode is that an evaluation must be done on the bearer The numbers of incorrect A fields are accumulated during 100 frames This value is called the Frame Error Rate FER If the FER value is above 90 the bearer cannot be used to start retrieve sync information from However due to the nature of radio environment the FER value may later increase above 90 FER value Description lt 90 In this case the active sync bearer is only replaced if Alternative sync bearer with lower HOP value is found Even if an alternative bearer with better FER and RSSI is found this is only selected if the HOP value is lower gt 90 In this case the active sync bearer is only replaced if Another bearer with lower HOP value is found OR Another bearer with same HOP value is found and with BER lt 90 100 Assume the slave has locked to a RFP with hop value n When the RFP have had FER 100 on the active sync bearer for 80 seconds it is allowed to sync to a RFP with hop value n 1 After another 40 seconds it is allowed to sync to a RFP with hop value n 2 etc After 9 minutes with FER 100 the Sync lost counter is increased and a restart of the air sync procedure is done Sync lost counter may increase for a number of other reasons also Startup of Master IPBS When a Master starts up it searches for other IPBSs within the same system during 30 seconds If any IPBS is found the va
268. gured care must be taken not to create sync loops Configure RFPI in the air sync slaves optional 1 Inthe air sync slave select DECT gt Air Sync 2 Enter the sync RFPI in the Sync RFPI text field 3 Enter an alternative sync RFPI in the Alt Sync RFPI text field optional 4 Click OK Example The following example is a description of a not allowed air sync ring Base station A configured to listen to B Base station B configured to listen to C Base station C configured to listen to A UNITE Configure Messaging If an AIWS is to be used in the IP DECT system enter the IP address following the steps below 1 Select UNITE gt SMS Note To access the SMS tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Enter the address to the AIWS in the IP Address text field 122 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation 3 Click OK Device Management If a specific Device Manager e g AIWS is to be used in the Avaya IP DECT system enter the IP address to the Device Manager following the steps below To set the Master to search for an existing Device Manager on the network go to Service Discovery on page 124 1 Select UNITE gt Device Management Note To access the Device Management tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Enter the address to the Device Manager in the Unite IP Address text field The IP address
269. h For in Device ID v Show all Device ID Device type Software version Parameter version Upar Online Latest 00013e0108de Desktop Charger Advan 1 1 0 2 0 Y 036470296748 3725 2 6 6 24 4 036470296761 3725 2 6 6 24 4 Y 036470296776 3725 2 6 6 24 4 Numbers Tab Select the Numbers tab The view shows all Numbers configured at the site in a detailed list The following columns are displayed on each row Number the unique identifier of the Number The identifier is unique for that device type Device type the device model the Number is intended for Parameter version shows the version of the parameters in the Number Device ID the unique identifier of the device that the Number is associated to Online shows if the device the Number is associated to is online The icon indicates an online device Status shows the parameter synchronization status A Number can also be queued for synchronization Several different indications are used for example Synchronizing Sync queued Save queued Synchronized etc When the Number is offline the database status is shown Synchronized or Not synched Saved shows if the Number s parameters have been stored in the database The icon indicates that the parameters have been stored Last run template indicates which template that was last run for that Number Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 327 Installing and operating AIWS F
270. h SW3 to OFF Refer to Figure 2 and 3 The configuration IP address 192 5 36 229 must be added to the PC s routing table to be able to access this product requires administrator rights on the PC Follow the instructions in steps 5 and 6 below 5 Open a command prompt Note In Windows Vista you need to run the command prompt as PC administrator to be authorized to change the routing table 6 Enter the following command route ADD 192 5 36 229 MASK 255 255 255 255 xXXx XXX XXX XXX where XXX XXX XXX XXX is the PC s IP address 7 Open the web browser and enter the address 192 5 36 229 config Configuration The setup wizard will start automatically when this product is accessed from the web browser 1 Enter user name admin and the password changeme 2 Run the wizard If the IP address has not been assigned by an DHCP server it must be set manually in the wizard Note Refer to the Installation and Operation Manual for this product for extended configuration M0276300 Ver E June 2008 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 413 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 160 Getting Started leaflet page 2 of 2 Connections Figure 1 Figure 1 shows the placement of the connectors used for the startup of the product J5 Connection of supply voltage J20 For connection of 10baseT or 100baseT Ethernet TCP IP network Cables Ethernet cable e Use a cross
271. he pre installed IEC C14 AC connector male and the wall socket Required Tools etc e Screwdrivers Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 225 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger e Cutting pliers e Multimeter e Screws and wall plugs for wall mounting Make sure the screws and wall plugs have the correct length for the type of wall used See example below Wall material Plug length Screw diameter Single plasterboard Thorsman TP1 3 5 5mm Double plasterboard Thorsman TP2 3 5 5mm Concrete Thorsman TP2 3 5 5mm Examples of Ways to Mount the Rackmount Chargers Different ways to mount CR3 Rack Chargers is shown in figure 51 on page 228 It is possible to set up different combinations of CR3 Rack Chargers and Battery Pack Chargers A maximum of four CR3 Rack Chargers or Battery Pack Chargers can be serially connected to the same LAN source Installation steps The installation is done in three steps 1 Wall mounting 2 Electrical installation 3 Communication cable connection Wall mounting First make an outline of how the Rackmount Chargers are to be placed Tip If several Rackmount Chargers or Multiple Battery Charger are to be mounted close to each other mount them so that there is enough space between them to be able to disconnect the telephones vertical distance and to be able to open the top cover horizontal distance Tip When you are planning the location of the modules star
272. he File Download popup appears Click Save The Save As popup appears Select a location and enter a file name then save the file Note The backup does not include customized GUI s including Netpage files software files bin files and certificates Restore the Configuration Note When the AIWS is restored all changes that have been made since the last backup will be discarded Click Configuration on the start page Select Other Settings gt Backup Restore The Backup Restore view appears Click Browse and select the backup file ee a Click the Restore button An information window will open and inform you when the restore is ready 5 If the IP address or exchange has changed click OK to reboot else click Cancel Windows Internet Explorer Backup successfully restored If the IP address or exchange have changed the module needs to be restarted for the changes to take effect OK Reboot Cancel No Reboot 374 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration Since the bin files are not restored this has to be done manually See Import new Software for Devices on page 345 or Import new Software for Devices on page 345 Restore of Netpage files is described in Files for Translation Editing on page 391 Device Configuration Device Management setup This setup page is used to set addresses to the interfaces that the devices are connected to 1 On
273. he IPBS is packed contains e An IPBS for external antennas e A patch cable approx 1 m e Two antennas e A mounting bracket e Two screws with wall plugs Note The IPBS cannot be mounted with the antennas pointing downwards as the mounting bracket does not support it Insert the antennas into the IPBS before following the installation instructions in Install the Base Station on page 64 AC adapter The AC adapter is used to power a base station locally Note The maximum length of cable from adapter must not exceed 10 meters Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 55 Installing and operating IPBS Versions different type of mains plug 700466436 DECT RBS POWER SUPPLY UK 700466444 DECT RBS POWER SUPPLY EU 700466451 DECT RBS POWER SUPPLY US 700466469 DECT RBS POWER SUPPLY AU Safety Instructions For safe and efficient operation observe the guidelines given in this manual and all necessary sefety precautions Follow the operating instructions and adhere to all warnings and safety precautions located on the product and this manual e Installation and service is to be performed by service persons only e Ensure that the voltage and frequency of the mains power socket matches the voltage and frequency inscribed on the equipment s electrical rating label e Never install telephone wiring during a thunderstorm Note Avoid touching or punching down the IPBS RFP signal and power pairs as there
274. he air administration will sometimes not work Finally the handset sometimes cannot receive calls or make calls Fault Code Descriptions This section lists the possible fault codes and their descriptions Description Code Device RFP disconnected 0x000e0001 IPBS RFP malfunctioning 0x000e0002 IPBS RFP disabled 0x000e0003 IPBS 496 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 IP DECT Base Station IPBS RFP software download failed 0x000e0004 IPBS RFP unsynchronized 0x000e0005 IPBS Synchronization to alien system lost 0x000e0006 IPBS Backup synchronization master active 0x000e0007 IPBS Other DECT system with same sysid 0x000 0008 IPBS detected Standby Master is active 0x00030001 IPBS Connection to Radio lost from Master 0x00030204 IPBS Connection to Master lost from MM 0x00030303 IPBS User registration failure 0x00030002 IPBS ae restart watchdog reset power 0x000b0001 IPBS on Memory low 90 0x00120001 IPBS Emergency registration down Master 0x00030003 IPBS No Media Data received RTP 0x00050001 IPBS Excessive loss of data RTP 0x00050002 IPBS Wrong Payload Type received RTP 0x00050003 IPBS Stun failed RTP 0x00050004 IPBS SRTP authentication failed RTP 0x00050005 IPBS SRTCP authentication failed RTP 0x00050006 IPBS Unexpected Message H323 0x00060001 IPBS Status Inquiry H323 0x00060002 IPBS
275. he charger LED changes to orange slow flashing A Important Do not remove the telephone while the text Restoring settings is displayed It may take several minutes 7 Remove the new telephone from the charger when the text Phone successfully replaced Please remove phone to restart appears in the display The LED changes to orange quick flashing The new telephone is automatically restarted Error cases If there is a battery failure low battery for the o d telephone during Easy Replacement and the charger flashes orange the procedure can be continued Charge the battery and put the telephone back into the charger The easy replacement procedure should be continued If the LED is red the procedure cannot be continued Replacement of a telephone with the AIWS Both the old telephone and the new telephone must be of the same device type 3725 or 3720 The same extension number is assigned to the new telephone Make sure that the old telephone is saved in the AIWS Start the Device Manager in the AIWS and navigate to the Numbers tab There shall be a tick in the Saved column for the old telephone If the telephone is not saved insert it into a Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger connected to AIWS and perform a save see Installing and operating AIWS on page 289 If it would be impossible to save the old telephone settings stop this replacement procedure Instead unsubscribe the old telephone from the PBX register the new telep
276. hernet Ethernet speed indicator ON 100 MBit s OFF 10 MBit s General Information Licence All Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware units must have a valid software licence The licence can be found on the administration web page under the section System Setup gt Common gt Licence A Important Changing this field may seriously affect the functionality If no valid licence is present the unit will not start and the Function Indicator see figure 165 will indicate licence error with a slow flashing red light The unit can be started in unlicensed mode see Unlicensed Mode on page 427 and Selection of Operating Mode on page 427 for more information Unlicensed mode is indicated by the Function Indicator with an orange light 3000 ms ON 100 ms OFF see also Function Indicator on page 428 Power Down and Restart of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Power Down 1 Remove the cover from the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 2 Press the push button SW4 to perform a shut down of the processor 3 Wait until the Function Indicator is flashing orange Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 425 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 4 Remove the power cable The power must be removed within 10 minutes or Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware will restart If Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware restarts wait until the Function Indicator is not indicating starting up flashing orange before pressing SW4 again
277. his chapter is intended as a guide for installation maintenance and troubleshooting purposes and is relevant for e Installation and configuration administrator rights e Daily operation of the system user rights Items Items for AIWS e WSM MVB AIWS Basic including ELISE2 power supply and licence e WSM MVS AIWS Standard including ELISE2 power supply and licence e WSM MVP AIWS OAP including ELISE2 power supply and licence e WSM MVE AIWS Enterprise Management including ELISE2 power supply and licence Note Not all functionality described in this document is available in all variants For details regarding items and technical specifications refer to Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS on page 483 Overview From the AIWS start page it is possible to select different functionality modules 290 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Introduction Figure 86 AIWS start page Send Message Phonebook Device Manager Configuration Setup Wizard E 5 a e Send Message see Operation Messaging on page 314 e Phonebook see Central Phonebook administration on page 292 Describes how to handle phonebook entries e Device Manager see Device Manager on page 322 Describes device management e Configuration see Configuration Page on page 308 Setup page for the AIWS settings e Setup Wizard see AIWS Setup Wizard and Configuration on page 312 The first time and as long as A
278. hone and follow the instructions for installing a telephone see Installation of a new Telephone on page 147 When the telephone is saved unsubscribe the old telephone from the PBX The following steps are described in two different scenarios check which one suits the best before proceeding Data included in a replacement transfer The following data is replaced during a replacement with AIWS e User parameters including User ID Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 155 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones e Contacts entered by the user Note that the following data is not replaced e DECT registration e Call list e Messages e Bluetooth pairing list e Company phonebook e Downloaded Language Telephone replacement with AIWS Scenario 1 Note This scenario is valid for Avaya Integral Enterprise and IP DECT If subscribing towards other systems follow Scenario 2 Note The telephone to be installed must not have any previous valid registrations If it has a valid registration unsubscribe the telephone or use Scenario 2 1 Subscribe the new telephone with the same extension number as the old telephone During the subscription procedure the AIWS identity User ID will automatically be set to be the same as the extension number Note The User ID can be viewed in the telephone by navigating to the menu Admin menu gt Device info gt User ID 2 Insert the telephone into a desktop charger
279. ialogue 274 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Figure 81 Upgrade dialogue Upgrade software Device type d62 Talker 5 In the Upgrade dialogue the following fields are shown e Device type shows the model of your device e Software The Available software box contains previously imported software files see Import package files on page 269 the latest used software file is selected by default 6 If the software to be used for software upgrade is not available it needs to be imported If so click Import The Import software dialogue opens Locate the file and click Open The software file is imported to PDM Select software to be used in the upgrade in the Available software text box Click OK The Upgrade window closes The software will be downloaded to the device A progress bar in the Status column for the device shows the progress of the download To cancel the upgrade click Device gt Cancel upgrade in the menu Alternatively right click on the device in the device list and select Cancel upgrade The device will restart automatically after a successful download and when the handset is idle Note The Handset will not restart if a missed call popup or a new message popup is active on the handset This is not considered as an idle state Delete Parameter Definition Files In the File menu click File management The File management window appears Click
280. ic capacity is needed 34 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Base Station Coverage Base Station Coverage This section describes how architecture building elements and special areas affect the coverage and the placing of the base stations The radio environment or the cell that is covered by a base station is not of a spherical shape as often suggested in figures If a snapshot could be taken of its form it would become clear that its shape is much more irregular The momentary size and shape are dependant on the material of which walls and floors are made the position and material of furniture machines air conditioning and the position of the base station in such an environment Because of these unpredictable conditions it is not possible to give any hard rules on calculating the number of base stations in a given situation e The in house cell size in offices can have a radius of between 10 and 30 meters see figure 7 on page 36 The cell size in exhibition or production halls can have a radius of up to 200 metres e The free space outdoors cell radius can be up to 300 metres e Base stations may partially cover the floors immediately above and below The useful range through floors and ceiling varies between 0 and 8 m 2 floors radius see figure 7 on page 36 Architecture This section describes how the architecture of the building can affect the coverage Central areas giving access to stairs a
281. icator on page 107 For normal radios LDAP replication is not recommended Set the mode to Slave see Select Mode on page 113 Enter the system name the password and the Master and Standby Master IP addresses in the DECT gt Radio tab see Enter Enter IP Address to the Pari Master on page 117 This must be the same system name and password as set in the Master see Change System Name and Password on page 110 Configure air synchronization see Configure Air Synchronization on page 119 Enter the Time Server address see Configure the NTP Settings on page 92 Reset in order to make the configuration changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Save the configuration of the Slave see Backup on page 129 Configure the rest of the IPBS following the steps below 10 11 12 13 Note Uploading the same configuration to all slaves can only be done if the DHCP is set to client Determine the address Select Update gt Config and browse to the previously saved configuration Click OK Reset in order to make the configuration changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Repeat step 10 to 12 for all Slaves Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 85 Installing and operating IPBS Multi Base Station Master Configuration Multi IP DECT Master configuration Headquarter Branch Office IPBS Master2 Database Replicator Signaling IP Trunk 2 AAA g b
282. ice Overview Traffic Backup Update Diagnostics Reset r Device certificate Renew Create new File Browse Upload IP DECT Base Station Info Admin Update NTP Logging HTTP HTTP Client SNMP Certificates Subject Issuer Not before Not after Download 00 30 42 0e 28 56 00 30 42 0e 28 56 14 10 2008 14 10 2018 PEM DER As described in Certificate Handling Options on page 62 there are three possible certificate options 1 Default device certificate see table below 2 Self signed certificates see Self signed Certificates on page 99 3 Certificates signed by a Certificate Authority CA see Certificate Signing Request CSR on page 101 98 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation The following table describles the different functions Field name Description Subject Click the hyperlink under the Subject header to display certificate details in a window PEM Click the PEM hyperlink under the Download header to download the certificate in PEM format DER Click the DER hyperlink under the Download header to download the certificate in DER format Create New The Create New hyperlink is used for two purposes e Self signed Certificates on page 99 e Certificate Signing Request CSR on page 101 Upload Use the Upload function to upload a certificate file to the device 1 Click the Browse button 2 Select a
283. ice is detected and the same Number has been used by another device in the system there will be a parameter conflict A pop up dialogue appears asking the user to decide whether to use the Number settings in PDM or the Number settings in the device Note One situation when this parameter conflict will occur needs to be mentioned If a portable is damaged and the replacement portable is first registered in the base station with the same Number as the damaged portable and then an attempt to register the new portable in PDM is made If Device is chosen in this situation the phonebook belonging to the damaged portable and located in PDM will be deleted and replaced with the empty phonebook in the replacement portable In this case select PDM to transfer the phonebook of the damaged portable located in PDM to the new portable For more information about telephone replacement see the Configuration Manual for respective telephone Figure 72 Parameter conflict dialogue Parameter conflict 2 el A parameter conflict has occurred Which parameter set should be used i Device Delete a Number in the Site Database 1 Select the Numbers tab 2 Select the Number you want to delete The selected row is highlighted 3 Inthe Number menu select Delete or right click and select Delete 4 Inthe Delete Numbers dialogue click Yes The dialogue closes and the Number is deleted from the list Note If an online device is del
284. ide proper answer supervision is a violation of Part 68 of the FCC s rules Proper Answer Supervision is when A This equipment returns answer supervision to the public switched telephone network PSTN when DID calls are answered by the called station answered by the attendant routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer premises equipment CPE user Routed to a dial prompt B This equipment returns answer supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded back to the PSTN Permissible exceptions are A call is unanswered A busy tone is received A reorder tone is received Avaya attests that this registered equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990 Automatic Dialers When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evenings Toll Restriction and least Cost Routing Equipment The software contained in this equipment to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed i
285. igh temperature dramatically reduces its capacity For example storage around maximum temperature reduces capacity with 20 in less than a month permanently Compliance to European regulations and standards EU directives 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Product marking CE DECT Radio EN 301 406 TBR22 SAR Specific Absorption Rate EN50360 and EN62209 1 0 075 W kg 10 gram Safety EN60950 1 472 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya 3720 DECT Telephone EMC EN301489 6 EN 301 489 1 Compliance to US regulations and standards Product marking FCC ID BXZDH3 US 9FVW4NANDH3 HAC SAR Specific Absorption Rate FCC OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C and IEEE Std 1528 ANSI IEEE Std C95 1 Normal operation 0 043 W kg 1 gram Body worn operation 0 037 W kg 1 gram Safety UL 60950 1 EMC Radio FCC Part 15 D Hearing aid 47 CFR Part 68 Subpart D and TIA 968 A Compliance to Canadian regulations and standards Product marking 1C 3724B DH3 SAR Specific Absorption Rate IEEE Std C95 3 Normal operation 0 043 W kg 1 gram Body worn operation 0 037 W kg 1 gram Safety CSA 60950 1 EMC Radio RSS 213 ICES 03 Hearing aid CS 03 Compliance to Australian regulations and standards Product marking A Radio EN301 406 SAR Specific Absorption Rate EN50360 and EN62209
286. igure 108 The Numbers tab showing a list of Numbers in a system Avaya WSM File Number Devices Templates Fy amp New Edit Device types Search For in Number v Show all Device type Parameter version Device ID Number Online Status Saved Desktop Ch 2 0 00013e01 Y 3725 24 4 03647029 Synchronized Y 3725 24 4 03647029 Y Last ru Templates Tab Select the Templates tab The view shows all templates in a detailed list The following columns are displayed on each row e Name the name of the template e Device type the device model the template is intended for e Parameter Version shows the parameter version Figure 109 The Templates tab in the Device Manager Avaya Device Manager File Template Help Devices Numbers Templates New Edit Delete Device types Search For in Name v Show all Name Device type Parameter version 15 1 25 2 Desktop Charger Advanced 2 0 My3725Template 3725 Desktop Charger Ad MyChargerTemplate 1 item selected 328 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Log In Note When an attempt is made to start AIWS Device Manager a popup window is displayed with a warning that the program s digital signature that cannot be verified The text is displayed in the language used in the computer s operating system Click Run or the equivalent term in the operating system l
287. image file and press writ e to flash to start the installation It will take some time to install the new image The time is dependent of the size of the image and the type of connection to the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 450 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Maintenance Information Note The img file must be used to update the complete image on the Compact Flash 6 Restore the old AIWS configuration from the backup that was taken before Without restoring all parameters especially the network setup and license key will get lost after reboot Image installed successfully Before reboot restore parameters or set network parameters manually on the administration page Otherwise you may not be able to connect to the system again Restore parameters Restore E Go to administration page C Reboot to activate Reboot E 7 Press reboot to start the AIWS with the new software image It is possible to replace the image over a remote connection However note that it is not possible to replace the image on the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware that handles the remote connection Installing an Image on an empty Compact Flash An image can also be installed on an empty Compact Flash 1 Set section one and four in SW3 to ON to set the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware in Network setup mode and Image installation mode 2 Perform a power down of the unit and then restart it see Power Down and Restart of El
288. in the Server text field 4 Enter the IP address to the alternative LDAP server in the Alt Server text field Note If this IPBS is configured as a standby LDAP server enter 0 0 0 0 in the Alt Server text field 5 Select a filter method from the Filter Type drop down list e Dect Gateway Name Enter the name of the DECT gateway to limit the replication to users of a certain group e LDAP Filter Enter an LDAP filter to limit replication to certain LDAP objects Enter the LDAP User name and Password in the User and Password text fields Click OK Note In the case of Master to Standby Master Full Directory Replication do not register new Portable Devices when the LDAP Server is down even if there is a Standby LDAP Server in the system Check LDAP Replicator 1 Select LDAP gt Replicator Status The following information can be checked e Server The IP address and port of the LDAP server e Remote State of replication in the source directory Three states are possible Stopped Active Completed e Notify Number of change notifications received from the server e paged Number of objects received from AD server in response to paged search requests e No match Number of objects received that are not matching the configured LDAP filter condition e Discarded Number of objects discarded because no suitable map is found 108 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation e Local Stat
289. inal blocks must be mounted to prevent hazardous situations like electric shock e when servicing the units the mains power supply cable must be disconnected Note the following for PERMANENTLY CONNECTED EQUIPMENT a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the building installation wiring The disconnect device shall disconnect both poles for PLUGGABLE EQUIPMENT the socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible In Sweden Norway and Finland the unit must be connected to a wall outlet with protective earth safety grounding For other countries it is recommended to use a protective earth connection e Suomi Laite on liitett v suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan e Norge Apparatet m tillkoples jordet stikkontakt e Sverige Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag 222 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Introduction Compliance Regulatory Compliance Statements EU EFTA only Permission and Conformity We Avaya GmbH amp Co KG declare that the product line Avaya Rackmount Charger concurs with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of EU Directive 1999 5 EU concerning radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and themutual recognition of their conformity Intended use This equipment is intended for connection to radio interfaces DECT of Avaya PABX systems It is compliant with
290. ing C Safety IEC 60950 1 EMC EN 55022 class B EN61000 4 3 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 477 Technical Data Multiple Battery Charger Physical Dimensions x w x h 453 x 156 x 98 mm Storage temperature Weight 1 4 kg Material Case PC ABS Colour Light grey Functional Supply voltage 100 240 VAC 0 7 A 50 60 Hz Charge current 0 65 A Environmental Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 20 C to 65 C Enclosure protection Immunity to electromagnetic fields IP30 IEC EN60529 3 V m EN61000 4 3 Immunity to ESD Recommended cables 4 kV contact discharge and 8 kV air discharge EN61000 4 2 not supplied by Avaya Power cord with IEC C13 connector Compliance to European regulations and standards EU directives 2004 108 EC EMC Product marking CE Safety EN60950 1 EMC EN 55022 class B EN61000 4 3 Compliance to US regulations and standards Product marking 478 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Multiple Battery Charger Safety UL 60950 1 EMC FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Compliance to Canadian regulations and standards Product marking Safety CSA 60950 1 EMC FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Compliance to Australian regulations and standards Product marking C Safety IEC 60950 1 EMC EN 55022 cla
291. ing a new image file it is recommended to take a parameter backup in advanced and restore the backup afterwards If reboot was selected w o restoring the parameters all configuration including the IP Network parameters is lost However is a fixed IP address is used you can connect to the AIWS web interface by using this fixed IP address When connecting to the AIWS the setup wizard will start automatically as usual after a factory reset If a backup file is available you can select cancel for the setup wizard go to configuration other settings backup restore Restore the old setting by choosing your backup file and select restore Finally a reboot is needed to activate the old parameter settings Built in tools in AIWS The AIWS hardware has different LEDs to indicate the status and besides that the possibility to show active faults and logging the faults 514 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS Figure 185 AIWS Circuit board Shut down CPU Status LEDs Function indicator Battery activation 900 address Configuration CPU Compact Flash Module Key Ethernet Status LEDs O connectors RS232 connectors Z 900 Bus Ss IA RS232 2 RS232 1 Ethernet
292. ion 1 Disable the Encryption Required is enabled in the Required parameter in telephone in combination telephone and or with 2 Enable the encryption in 1 Unencrypted base the base station s and or station s and or Note If Ascom s base 2 Unsupported base station s is used the station s software version must be 3 1 x or greater 3 Use supported base station s Ask your supplier LED Error Indications See chapter LED indications on page 172 LED is flashing red quick flash 100 ms on 800 ms off e Ifa third telephone that is an other telephone than the old and new telephone mentioned in Definitions on page 152 is inserted into the charger during Easy Replacement this error indication appears Change to the correct telephone e The charger has found that Easy Replacement does not work Change back to the new telephone LED is flashing red long flash 800 ms on 100 ms off Error during Easy Replacement Both telephones need to be sent for service 504 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Advanced Charger Advanced Charger For general LED indications see also LED indications on page 204 Status LED on the charger is not lit Check that power is supplied If power is supplied and the status LED is still not lit the probable cause is a software error Send charger for service Status LED on the charger is fixed red Send charger for servi
293. ion Manager One trunk can support up to 250 simultaneous IP DECT calls If you have more IP DECT users it is recommended to configure additional trunks An IP DECT user will automatically be assigned to one of the Active trunks So we ll have a kind of static load balancing in the system Nevertheless if the number of Active trunks is not sufficient for the configured amount of DECT users it might be possible that some users might be busy because the assigned trunk is busy while others are still available Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 115 Installing and operating IPBS 116 Note It is recommended not to configure more than 10 active and 10 redundant trunks in the IPBS Master The group of active trunks will mostly be configured at the same Communication Manager system or even on a Communication Manager Network e g several Communication Manager systems with a trunk in between working on the same numbering plan Same is valid for the group of redundant trunks Trunk modes There are four different modes for a Primary and Redundant trunk Note A Primary Trunk can never be set to Standby Active The trunk is up and accepts traffic Up The trunk is up but does not accept traffic as it is not set to Active mode Down The trunk is down and not working Standby The trunk is ready to be used for redundant purpose With Up and Down mode means also wether the trunk has contact with the PBX and
294. ion of their conformity Intended use This equipment is intended for connection to radio interfaces DECT of Avaya PABX systems It is compliant with the essential requirements of the EU Directive 1999 5 EU Radio andTelekommunication Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Due to the differences of the individual public networks and network operators this compliance does not by itself give an unconditional assurance of successful operation at every network termination point For the time being we are not aware of any network on which the equipment will not work due to its design In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier or your Avaya service The conformity declaration can be accessed at the following Internet address www avaya de gCommunication Manager emea de includedcontent conformity htm or search the index using the key term Conformity CE FCC compliance statements for USA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation
295. ion software If all information operating system and application software needs to be updated then the complete Compact Flash image must to be replaced The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is normally set in image installation mode from the administration pages but it can also be set by the operating mode switch See Replacing an Image on the Compact Flash on page 450 or Installing an Image on an empty Compact Flash on page 451 If the Compact Flash needs to be partly updated with new application software the image installation mode should not be used For more information see Updating Application Software on page 449 426 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 General Information Unlicensed Mode It is possible to run the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware with full functionality for two hours without a licence Exact functionality is application dependent For more information about the functionality during unlicensed mode see the application documentation In unlicensed mode it is possible to enter a licence that does not match the current hardware This makes it possible to configure a Compact Flash on one hardware and move the Compact Flash to another hardware without changing the licence Selection of Operating Mode All 8 sections of SW3 are set to OFF for normal operating mode Figure 164 Switch for selection of operating mode OFF ON 1 SW3 Manone 003 8 Section 1 N
296. irs 2 Power over the spare cable pairs Both power feed methods are supported in the IPBS it is also insensitive to change of the polarity Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 71 Installing and operating IPBS Power the Base Station with a Local Power Supply Powering the base station with a local power supply can be done using the second data power inlet on the base station The base station can be powered individually by an AC adapter The AC adapter is provided with an 8 pin RJ45 plug that can be plugged into the Power Supply jack For specification see AC adapter on page 55 Note Only approved power supply according to valid editions of EN IEC CSA UL AU NZS 60950 is to be used when the base station is powered by a local power supply 72 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Configuration Configuration This section describes how to configure the IPBS using the web interface The recommended order to configure the equipment in the IP DECT system is as follows 1 Configure the Master see Configure the Master on page 82 2 Configure the Standby Master see Configure the Standby Master on page 83 3 Configure the slaves radios see Configure the Slave Radio on page 84 Requirements The following is required in order to configure the IP DECT system e PC e 10 100base T Ethernet connection Web Browser Requirements To use the interface properly the web b
297. is correctly configured in both the PBX and IP DECT system A trunk that is Active or Up is correctly configured and correctly attached A trunk that is Down has a fault Either in the configuration or the hardware broken cable Fault finding can be to check that the IP address is correct as well as to check the PCB and the cable Redundant Trunks Commonly one or more Redundant trunk is configured as a backup It is used if all of the Primary Trunks are down If all Primary Trunks are Down that is changes from Active mode or the Redundant trunks starts working The Redundant Trunk will get the status Acitve or Down depending if it works or not If it gets the status Active the calls will go through the Redundant Trunk until the Primary Trunks are activated again Activation of Primary Trunks There are two ways of activating the Primary Trunk Manual and Automatic Manual 1 Click on the Activate Primary Trunks button This button is only available if there is any Primary Trunk in Up mode Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation The Primary Trunks then enter Active mode and the Redundant Trunks cease to be active and go to Standby mode New calls go through the Primary Trunks and ongoing calls go through the Redundant Trunks until the calls are finished Automatic 1 Mark the check box Primary trunks prioritized 2 Set the Supervision Timeout to desired time The Prima
298. is 48Vdc or 24Vdc present on these wires at all times e Always install the base station conforming to relevant national installation rules e Disconnect all power sources before servicing the equipment e Use only approved spare parts and accessories The operation of non approved parts cannot be guaranteed and may cause damage or danger e Only approved power supplies according to valid editions of EN IEC CSA UL AU NZS 60950 are to be used when the IPBS RFPs are powered by local power supplies 56 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Safety Instructions Safety Symbols For protection and to avoid damage to the IP DECT system you will find stickers where applicable The stickers have the following symbols and meaning Caution Read and follow the safety rules and warning messages in this manual A If the instructions are not followed there is risk of damage to the equipment Caution ESD Read and follow the handling instructions described in chapter ESD Handling on page 58 A Boards which contain Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD are indicated by this sign If the instructions are not followed there is risk of damage to the equipment For handling these boards see Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge ESD on page 57 Warning Read and follow the safety rules and warning messages in this manual Hazardous voltages are present If the instructions are not followed there is risk of electrical
299. is a limit class A device This device can cause radio interference in residential areas in which case the owner may be required to undertake appropriate countermeasures 422 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Board Description Figure 163 The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware circuit board SWA4 J7 RS232 3 2345 2345 Oot LED Ja SW2 FREE SW3 EEECERRE OOOOOOD L 18 J11 ST Rs232 2 RS232 1 Ls Ea ENE 1 J5 4 1 J6 4 OOOO OVO Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide Board Description 05 2010 423 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Connectors J2 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J16 J20 J22 J24 Connector for the Compact Flash Connection of supply voltage For connection of RS422 communication Modular jack RJ45 for connection of RS232 communication RS232 3 Modular jack RJ45 for connection of RS232 communication RS232 2 LON GP Interface Connector Modular jack RJ45 for connection of RS232 communication RS232 1 Modular jacks RJ45 for connection of System 900 bus cabling Connector where an error relay output is available C
300. ise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 425 3 Use the program Route to ELISE to connect to the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware A web page where a new image can be installed will open 4 Select the image to install Note that it will take some time to install the new image The time is dependent of the size of the image and the type of connection to the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Note The img file must be used to update the complete image on the Compact Flash Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 451 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Set section four in SW3 to OFF and press Reboot on the displayed web page to leave Image installation mode Setup the parameters according to instructions in Setup of Network Parameters on page 444 or recover parameters from a backup file Updating the Software Licence 1 2 Open the page xxx xxx xxx xxx admin and press General Enter the new licence and press Activate Circuit Board Replacement Figure 180 Replacing the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware circuit board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Perform a power down of the unit Remove the cover see Opening the Housing on page 431 Lift off the screw connectors from the circuit board 1 Press the four holding clips to release the circuit board 2 Remove the circuit board 3 Install the new circuit board in the case and make sure the circuit board clicks into po
301. ity EMC Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following international EMC standards as applicable CISPR 22 including all national standards based on CISPR 22 CISPR 24 including all national standards based on CISPR 24 IEC 61000 3 2 and IEC 61000 3 3 Avaya Inc is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Avaya Inc The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modifications substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user Pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules the user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Avaya Inc could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Federal Communications Commission Part 15 Statement For a Class A digital device or peripheral Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio comm
302. k New The Create site dialogue appears Type a name for the site in the Site name field and type a site description in the Description field optional Click OK The Create site dialogue closes Click Close The Site management dialogue closes Open a Site 1 In the File menu click Site management The Site management dialogue appears Select the site to be opened Click Open The view in the main window changes to the newly opened site and the Site management dialogue closes Load a Site 1 In the File menu click Site management The Site management dialogue appears 2 Select the site to be loaded 3 Click Load The view in the main window changes to the newly opened site 4 Click Close The Site management dialogue closes Delete a Site SO Oh a 0 In the File menu click Site management The Site management dialogue appears Make sure that the site to be deleted is not currently active If it is active load another site see Load a Site If there is only one site remaining it cannot be deleted Select the site to be deleted Click Delete The Delete site dialogue is opened Click Yes The site is deleted Click Close The Site management dialogue closes Import a Site When importing a site numbers with parameters and devices are imported Templates software and definition files are not imported 1 2 In the File menu click Site Management The Site Management dialogue opens Click Impo
303. l description of the alarm Events A history of alarms and errors is displayed here including active alarms Click Clear in the top right corner to clear the list of alarms and errors For a description of the attributes see the table below Attribute Description Time The date and time when the alarm error is issued or cleared 132 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Type The status of the fault It has four possible states e Alarm Alarms displayed in red are active alarms e Alarm cleared The alarm is already cleared e Alarm timeout The alarm exceeded the timeout period e Error Refers to faults that are not active for a specific time Code A unique number that identifies the alarm Click the code to get more detailed information about the alarm Severity It has three possible states e Critical Immediate action is required It is displayed for example if a managed object goes out of service e Major Urgent action is required It is displayed for example if the capability of the managed object is severely degraded e Indeterminate Level of severity cannot be determined Remote The IP Address of the object that reported the alarm Click the IP address to access the object Source The software modul that reported the alarm Together with the oode it uniquely identifies an alarm Description A textual descrip
304. l the way between the two end points By following a speech packet as it travels along the path between the end points it is possible to identify all network segments and transitions where QoS needs to be managed 32 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Base Station Planning Base Station Planning The major task in installing an IP DECT system is defining the number of base stations required to cover an area to a satisfactory level This chapter describes how a base station planning can be made in order to gain full area coverage Small sites usually have a homogeneous layout it is therefore easy to predict the field pattern of the base station which makes the planning relatively easy The larger the site the more complex the site survey becomes Since a larger site often is less homogenous the base station placing will be more difficult Generally the client has particular requirements which have to be considered these requirements can be coverage in a lift underground car park conference rooms outdoors and so on Base station planning is not difficult on the contrary but size architecture and structure of buildings all have influence on the field pattern which cannot be foreseen The quickest and simplest way is therefore measuring During a site survey an average cell size can be determined with help of a site survey tool The average cell size is the foundation of a base station planning The steps in bas
305. language The Set language page opens 3 Click on the Import Export Language button The Translation page opens 4 Click Browse to locate the translated file and click the Import button The name of the translated language the language id attribute will appear as a link in the Existing Language list and can be downloaded for editing purposes Delete Language On the Translation page click the Delete symbol to the right of the language you want to remove see below Note that it is not possible to remove the default language Swedish English Select Language Translated languages the language id attribute are shown together with the default language English in the language drop down list in the Set Language page 1 Click Configuration on the start page 2 Enter User name and Password and click OK 3 Select Other Settings gt Set language in the left menu on the AIWS Configuration page Set language English Temporary JI Permanent Import Export Language 4 Select language in the drop down list and click Permanent To change language for this session only i e for this browser window until closed click Temporary 390 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Language and User Interface Customize the User Interface GUI AIWS has 5 Mb disk space on the FTP area and about 1 6 Mb is dedicated for the user interfaces The free space can be used for storing files and folders for
306. le Require Encrypted Base Station The telephone can be configured to establish calls via encrypted base stations only So the handset will prevent unencrypted calls This setting can be used to avoid snooping in the telephony network If the setting is active the encryption needs to be enabled in the base station See corresponding manual for the base station Using the Edit template feature in the PDM the parameter can be found at Systems gt Encryption required When the parameter is set to Yes it is only possible to establish calls via encrypted base stations The default value is No Note In the IP DECT R4 system the air interface of all base stations is encrypted For ISDN DECT only RM627 RM637 supports encryption that needs to be enabled via the ISM ISA tool Do not set this parameter in installations with RM588 RM603 and RM617 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 165 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones Out of range beep The behaviour of the handset when moving out of coverage area of the connected DECT system can be configured at Settings gt Sound and Alerts gt Out of range alert The handset can either be silent when loosing the system or do a single beep or beep every minute for the next 30 minutes to alert the user that the system is out of range Handset Idle Roaming It is recommended to set the new parameter Location gt Base station positioning to Off Otherwise there
307. le option and enter the call number in the Call number text box Continue with step 9 below Note The data in this text box is only a user id will not be used for any dialling purposes Though it is strongly recommended for easy identification here to enter the telephone s extension But is is also possible to enter characters If you want to add a range of Numbers select the Range option Enter the start call number in the Start call number text box and the end call number in the End call number text box Note The maximum range that can be added at a time is 100 Numbers 9 Click OK The dialogue closes and the new Number s show up in the list in the Numbers view Save a Number to database If a device is online but its Number has not been saved to the database it is possible to do this 1 2 3 4 The Number is saved to the database Select the Numbers tab Select the Number In the Number menu select Save or Right click on the Number and select Save Edit Parameters The Edit Parameters dialogue shows the set of parameters relevant to the Number that is being edited The parameter groups are organized in a tree structure in the left pane with the parameters in the current node in the right pane The parameter list has one column with the parameter name and another column gives the parameter value This can be a numerical value text or a choice boolean values and some numerical values are presented as select
308. lect Configuration gt General gt Certificates AVAYA IP DECT Base Station Configuration Info Admin Update NTP Logging HTTP HTTP Client SNMP Certificates General Device certificate LAN Subject Issuer Not before Not after Download IP 00 30 42 0e 28 56 00 30 42 0e 28 56 14 10 2008 14 10 2018 PEM DER EUA Renew DECT Create new UNITE Administration File L Browse Users Upload Device Overview Traffic Backup Update Diagnostics Reset 2 Click the Create New hyperlink in the Device Certificate section A window will open 3 Inthe window select Self signed certificate in the Type drop down list A EBX Create new Type Key 1024 bit x Validity 1 year s Common Name Organizational Unit C Organization Locality State or Province Country 4 Select Enter the following settings Field name Description e Validity Enter the default validity in years This is a mandatory field e Key Select either the desired key strength 1024 bit 2048 bit 4096 bit e Common Name Enter the domain name or IP address for the device This is the same value as entered in the web browser when accessing the device 5 Click OK 100 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation 6 Anew key pair and a certificate will be created This may take up to one hour depending on the key strength selected During this time the device
309. lect the Templates tab 2 Select the template you want to upgrade The selected row is highlighted 3 Inthe Template menu select Upgrade or right click and select Upgrade The Upgrade template dialogue appears Figure 112 The Upgrade template dialogue Y Upgrade template Upgrade template Select a parameter version to upgrade to 125 7 v Cancel 4 Select the parameter version to upgrade to 5 Click OK The template is upgraded and the dialogue closes Apply a template 1 Select the Templates tab Select the template you want to use The selected row is highlighted In the Template menu select Apply to or right click and select Apply to The Apply template window appears 332 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Figure 113 The Apply template window 7 Apply template My3725Template Choose numbers to apply template to Number Device type Parameter v Device ID Online Status Last run tem 700026 3725 25 2 Synchronizcd Y Search for in Number v Show all 4 If needed select search parameters or click Show all 5 Select Number s to apply the template on 6 Click OK The template is applied and the window closes Numbers Create New Numbers Select the Numbers tab 2 From the Number menu click New Alternatively right click in the Numbers list and select New The New Numbers dialogue opens Select device type in the De
310. led The number of failed handovers in the Radio Note There can be several reasons for uncompleted handovers occuring This will in most cases not cause dropped or disconnected calls Handover During call all ongoing handovers in the IP DECT system can be displayed by selecting Traffic gt Handover in the Master Cordless telephones are shown by their IPEI IDSI number Backup The IPBS configuration can be downloaded and saved on a disc or a server This is useful when identical configuration should be applied to several IPBSs for example when configure the slaves in a system For information on how to load a saved configuration on the IPBS see Update on page 129 1 Select Backup gt Config 2 Click download or Click download with standard password to save the configuration with the default system password 3 Click Save in the dialogue window and browse to the place where the configuration should be saved 4 Click Save Note It is recommended to create a backup of the IPBS configuration when the administrator password has been changed Update This section describes how to do the following configurations and settings e Update Configuration e Update Firmware e Update the Boot File Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 129 Installing and operating IPBS Update Configuration A previously saved configuration can be loaded and activated on the IPBS See Backup on page 12
311. ling and operating the Rackmount Charger E The Old standard was used in various countries including Australia and some wiring may still use these colours i Gr Ye Green with Yellow stripe this is the standard world wide although it is not common in the US or Canada at present There is an important distinction between Grounding conductor safety earth and Grounded conductor Neutral These are US terms for the conductors and they are not interchangeable despite the similarity of the names Installation of additional units in a serial power configuration Note Maximum five units may be connected in power series Note Maximum four units may be connected in LAN series to one single LAN outlet A Important It is not allowed to connect additional Rack Chargers or Battery Pack chargers if the chargers are connected to the power supply via an AC plug A Important Disconnect the power supply connection before working on the units 1 If the additional Rack Charger has not yet been mounted on the wall do this according to figure 51 on page 228 Open the top cover of the rack charger closer to the AC power source Remove the cover which protects the unused AC output terminal block of the charger closer to the AC power source 4 Mount the cable support holder at the unused opening in the charger closer to the AC power source The cable support holder is provided in the parts bag See figure 53 230 Avaya DECT R
312. lise 2 Server AIWS Hardware network setup IP address from the route table Close the program 11 When Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware has been restarted enter the URL xxx xxx xxx xxx admin in your browser xxx xxx xxx xxx is the IP address that was given to Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware during network setup and see that it has started up correctly 12 If an entry is added in the DNS it will be easier to connect to Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Installation Test Procedure 1 Ifthe Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is connected to a Central Unit the indicator will light steadily green within 90 seconds If the indicator continues to flash orange check e Connections on Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware e Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware has a correct System 900 address e Check in the AIWS advanced configuration gt system information of all applications are running Check if the following are connected Time synchronizer DECT interface SMS center Check at the DECT DH Device handler whether the Nr of DM Device Managers is more than 0 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 445 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Note Check also the application documentation for trouble shooting information If the indicator starts to blink red check e IP address e Network connections e Licence e Module key If everything seems to be OK but the function indicator still flashes the fault is probably located
313. lized Radios no longer registered to the PARI Master are shown If it s vital that the new device keeps the RFPI for the broken device e g alarm localization purposes move the RFPI for the broken device to the new device registered to the PARI Master 1 Connect the replacing device 2 Add the Radio to the PARI Master see Add Radios on page 126 3 Select Device Overview gt Radios 4 Inthe Static Registrations section click Move for the Radio that is broken 5 In the Move RFPI window select in the Destination section the new Radio that you want to move the broken Radio s RFPI to 6 Click the Move button Existing RFPI on the new Radio is replaced by the broken Radio s RFPI The new Radio s RFPI is now released and can be reused All other RFPIs in use are not affected The broken Radio will be deleted from the Static Registrations section Air Sync This section only applies to the IPBS Air Sync status is displayed in the Device Overview gt Air Sync menu For explanation on the information shown for the active and the alternative sync bearers see the table below RFPI Radio Fixed Part Identity is the Id number of the sync bearer Carrier The carrier used for air synchronization Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 127 Installing and operating IPBS Slot The slot used for air synchronization Hop The number of hops from the Sync Master to the sync bearer RSS
314. llation maintenance operation and troubleshooting purposes Advanced Charger Advanced Charger Adapter Supply voltage 5 VDC 100 240 V AC 50 60Hz Max current consumption 20A 0 4 A when charging Safety The desktop charger adapter shall be connected to 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Therefore extra caution shall be taken during operation The Advanced Charger itself is supplied with 5 V DC from the adapter A Important Use only the power supply adapter delivered with the charger Replacing with other power supply units means risk of battery explosion caused by too high input voltage or switched polarity Supplying the charger with 5 V on opposite poles than intended is strongly forbidden Technical Solution The following functionality is provided by the Advanced Charger e Provide a means for software and parameter update of cordless telephones e Charging of the battery of the telephone e Easy replacement The Advanced Charger has one USB connection and two Ethernet connections When using Ethernet connection it is possible to connect several Advanced Charger serially to the LAN If the Advanced Charger is connected towards PDM via both USB and Ethernet the USB connection overrides the Ethernet connection Each Advanced Charger needs an IP address See label for MAC address Requirements Computer 196 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Introduction e USB port USB 1 1 required USB
315. llows charging 1 Connect the charger to the AC power supply 2 Place a battery in the charging slot to start charging Secure the battery by moving the lock switch Battery disconnection 1 Unlock the lock switch on the battery 2 Remove the battery by lifting it Troubleshooting See Troubleshooting on page 495 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 219 Installing Multiple Battery Charger 220 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger Introduction This chapter describes how to install configure and operate the Rackmount Charger The Rackmount Charger is a rack charger equipped with a USB port and two Ethernet ports making it possible to connect it directly to a LAN or to a PC for the purpose of upgrading or configuring cordless telephones placed in the Rackmount Charger or the Rackmount Charger itself The Rackmount Charger is part of the Avaya IP DECT systems It charges the Avaya 3720 3725 DECT Telephones Each Rackmount Charger charges six telephones simultaneously The USB port is used to connect the Rackmount Charger to a PC running the Portable Device Manager PDM or to the Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS This program can be used to upgrade the software and to configure parameters in cordless telephones placed in the Rackmount Charger as well as the Rackmount Charger itself The Ethernet ports makes it possible to
316. lls active RF output power e r p between 23 dBm and 28 dBm depends on direction due to internal antenna characteristics Receiver sensitivity at least 86 dBm at B E R 10 3 Compliance to regulations and standards CE regulation 1999 5 EC Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Directive 89 336 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive EMC 73 23 EC Low Voltage Directive LVD Conformity marking c A DECT standard EN 301 406 2001 DECT EN 300 444 2001 TBR22 GAP 460 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Base Station RM627 BS330 Safety standard EN60950 1 2001 EMC standard EN301489 6 2002 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 461 Technical Data Base Station RM637 BS340 Physical Dimension 200 w x 165 d x 56 h mm Weight 496 grams incl Standard external antennas Material ABS moulded plastic Colour light grey Connectors two RJ45 connectors for Upn power one RJ12 connector for factory testing purposes Size standard antenna Antenna connectors Base Station 107 1 x 8 5 d mm MCX SMT type female receptacle from Amphenol KJMCX625100 002 3GT30G 50 gold plated Antenna connectors Antenna MCX straight crimp male plug fromAmphenol 919 101P 5151X gold plated Material ABS moulded plastic
317. lose the PDM 2 Locate the folder you want to backup The files are saved in folders located in C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data Ascom WinPDM Copy the selected folder to for example a CD or a network drive The PDM can now be started again Restore PDM Database Files 1 Close the PDM Retrieve the saved copy of the folder Copy the folder to the respective folder in C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data Ascom WinPDM 4 The PDM can be started again Templates Templates are a collection of user defined parameter values These templates can be used to create common settings to be used on several devices of a certain device type Note Templates created in one site are also selectable in the other sites used in PDM Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 279 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Create a Parameter Template It is usually desirable to create a customized parameter template that can be applied to devices of a certain device type 1 Select the Templates tab 2 Inthe Template menu click New The Create Template dialogue appears Figure 82 Create Template dialogue Create template Device type d z Parameter version 24 7 as Name 7 3 Select device type and parameter version type in a name for the template and click OK The view switches to the Edit Template parameter view
318. lowing picture shows different ways to mount Multiple Battery Charger It is possible to set up different combinations of Multiple Battery Charger and Rack Chargers Installation steps The installation is done in two steps 1 Wall mounting 2 Electrical installation Wall mounting First make an outline of how the battery pack chargers are to be placed Me a A Tip If several Multiple Battery Charger or Rackmount Chargers are to be mounted close to each other mount them so that there is enough space between then to be able to disconnect the batteries or the telephones vertical distance and to be able to open the top cover horizontal distance vi SK Tip When you are planning the location of the modules start to mount them in a height that makes it easy to reach the batteries Measure and mark the drill holes by using the dimensions in figure 41 Drill and fasten the battery pack charger on the wall with four screws 212 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Figure 41 Mounting dimensions in mm Multiple Battery Charger seen from the back Electrical installation The Multiple Battery Charger is delivered with a cord with a an IEC C14 connector male An extension cord IEC C13 AC connector female IEC60320 C13 to wall socket has to be ordered separately It shall be connected between the pre installed AC connector male and the wall socket Figure 42 Mul
319. luding the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004 108 EC and Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Copies of these Declarations of Conformity DoCs can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site http support avaya com DoC European Union Battery Directive Avaya Inc supports European Union Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Certain Avaya Inc products contain lithium batteries These batteries are not customer or field replaceable parts Do not disassemble Batteries may pose a hazard if mishandled Japan The power cord set included in the shipment or associated with the product is meant to be used with the said product only Do not use the cord set for any other purpose Any non recommended usage could lead to hazardous incidents like fire disaster electric shock and faulty operation ANAL ICAA E EARL CVS Ba Bey Md ARE T J AH SEO Beith 72 OIC LO AI CHE LBV CK TEV Ke K RBE ROA LR OES If this is a Class A device This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment VCCI If this equipment is used in a domestic environment radio disturbance may occur in which case the user may be required to take corrective actions ES TPS LE RE ER RS CV CC 1 DIH FFA AMBATO OREA ZERE CHEAT amp E AFEITAR TORNAR UI ARAS ERIENLIEDDIO ET this is a
320. lues for slot frame multiframe and PSCN is received and applied to the Master After receiving all these values or after the timeout of 30 seconds the Master enters the Master state In Master state the values are updated locally during all further operation of the Master IPBS and no synchronization to other IPBSs in the same system is done With this method it will be possible to restart only the Master in the system The remaining slaves will be able to maintain synchronization for a few minutes during restart of the Master The Master will adjust itself to the other base stations at startup The slaves will notice the Master is back and the sync will be received from the Master If no IPBS within the same system is detected during the first 30 seconds at startup initial values will be selected and the IPBS will enter Master state with these values 120 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Sync Backup Master Only one Sync Master base station needs to be configured for a system But if this single base station fails the entire system will fail It is therefore possible to configure a sync Backup Master base station in the system If a Backup Master base station is configured this base station must be positioned next to the ordinary Sync Master A good value for RSSI is between 30 and 50 dBm A sync Backup Master base station will start to search for an active Sync Master within the coverage for 1 mi
321. ly IPBS has been administered over the network via the http protocol default port 80 In a secure system recommended see the IP Security chapter IPBS should be administered via the https protocol default port 443 If for some reason port 443 is not to be used you can use another port for the local https server and then access the IPBS via this port Http and https traffic respectively would be disabled if their port values were to be set to zero 0 Therefore e To disable http traffic set Port to O which is recommended in a secure system Attempts to contact the device using the http protocol will result in an Unable to connect message e To disable https traffic set HTTPS Port to 0 not recommended Any other port values would enable http and https traffic respectively for the port specified Figure 25 Configure the HTTP settings AVAYA IP DECT Base Station Configuration Info Admin Update NTP Logging HTTP HTTP Client SNMF Certificates General et LAN Fuce HTTPS L IP Disable HT P basic aut ntication Y LDAP Password protect all HT P pages DECT Purl 80 UNITE HTPS Por 443 Administration Allowed atatinas E Users Active HTT gt sessions From To No 17 30 14 253 HTTPO mad_emd x 11 Device Overview i ORNE 172 20 14 223 HTTPO mod_emd x 1 9 Backup OK Cancel TET ok _ cancel Diagnostics Reset 1 Select General gt HTTP e Select the Force HTT
322. m The traffic capacity of the IP DECT system is mainly determined by the number of base stations and in exceptional cases also by the LAN bandwidth A single base station has a capacity of 8 simultaneous calls The traffic capacity of the IP DECT system is determined by e Grade Of Service GOS accepted by the customer e Number of speech circuits available 8 per IPBS The grade of service is the probability that a call cannot be made because of congestion in the system The customer has to indicate which grade of service is acceptable A grade of service of 1 or 0 01 means an average of 1 lost call in every 100 calls The two parameters mentioned above GOS and number of speech circuits and the total amount of traffic erlang that is required are related to each other The table below shows an except of these relations Practically this table is used to calculate from a given GOS and erlang value the number of base stations needed The erlang value is the total traffic generated by all cordless phone users A base station provides for 8 speech circuits Number of Speech Grade Of Service GOS base circuits stations 2 1 0 5 0 1 1 8 3 6 3 2 24 2 1 2 16 9 8 8 9 8 1 6 7 3 24 16 6 15 3 14 2 12 2 4 32 23 8 22 1 20 6 18 2 5 40 31 0 29 0 27 3 24 5 6 48 38 4 36 1 34 2 30 9 7 56 45 9 43 3 41 2 37 5 8 64 53 4 50 6 48 3 44 2 The table below shows what erlang values practically mea
323. m AIWS web page to handsets independently from the connected Base Station Masters e Messaging from handset to handsets independently from the connected Base Station Masters e A central phonebook can be used in all offices Digit manipulation for Phonebook queries will be supported according to the location of the connected master in first step this will only be supported for the LDAP phonebook e Centralized device management for all connected devices on different Master Base stations Beside other basic configuration of the AIWS and IPBS Master and Standby Master the following steps are recommended to support a multiple Base Station Masters configuration On the AIWS If a multi AIWS configuration is used this needs to be done on the device running the IP DECT interface e Open the advanced configuration page On the AIWS start page select Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page opens 302 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration e In IP DECT under DECT Interface remove the entries or just configure to 0 0 0 0 for IP DECT IP address and Secondary IP DECT IP Address Set multiple Locations former IP Regions to Yes e In Phonebook select Location settings former IP Region settings Set Digit Treatment to enable Now configure the digit treatment settings For each Location with dif
324. mber is equal to the number of digits entered as minimum size of global phone numbers then adds 00 for external line prefix and 00 for international prefix Resulting number 000047815305555 Digit treatment settings The parameters for digit treatment is set via the AIWS Configuration page Digit treatment can be enabled and disabled When enabled digit treatment is defined per Location former IP region 1 2 N OF OV E O9 On AIWS Start Page select Configuration In the left pane select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page appears Select Phonebook The Phonebook page appears Click IP Regions Settings Select Digit Treatment to be Enabled or Disabled Click Activate For each Location former IP region to be used enter the Location former IP region page Enter settings for Location former IP region and digit treatment Click Activate The following parameters can be configured for digit treatment Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 367 Installing and operating AIWS e Digit Treatment Enabled or Disabled The digit treatment function can be enabled and disabled If the function is enabled the parameters below apply otherwise they do not apply e Name A textual description of the current Location former IP region e ID An identifier for the Location former IP region represented by a numerical value between 1 250 The
325. me text field Click the To button and select users from the phonebook to be members of this group or enter number in the Call ID text field and click Add Click Save Click Close to exit the administration Editing Groups 1 2 3 4 Click My groups button in NetPage Select the groups that should be changed and the administration field will open Make changes and click Save Click Close to exit the administration Predefined Messages Note This feature can only be reached from index4 The predefined messages include message text beep characteristics priority and message type There are two types of messages Common Messages and My Messages Note The maximum message length differs depending on which system or telephone the message is sent to and the amount of special characters included in the message 406 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Messaging Tool Configuration Common Messages Common Messages can be used by all NetPage users Up to 30 Common Messages can be created These messages are stored on AIWS and can only be changed by authorized persons My Messages Up to 30 predefined My Messages with 120 characters per message can be created It is also possible to have fewer My Messages containing more characters These messages are stored locally and can only be accessed or changed from that PC Create a Predefined Message 1 DON PB SGI
326. meters DECT ADMM IP Address AVAYA Avaya Distributed Office Local Manager Distributed Office Local Manager 2 Help Logoff administrator Save Configuration E Home E Managed Objects General System Parameters re Configuration Apply Changes 7 Users gt gt 3 Group Communication as Features Localization External Services Media Tone Generator gt 3 Call Handling gt Y Automated Attendant Service m Country Options M Site Parameters gt 3 Public Networking Country Name Code Calling Party Number Manipulation p Flashhook United States 1 s National CPN Prefix Pi interval gt 3 Resources Station Date Format Upper Bound msec gt 3 System Parameters gt Ey Platform ram dd yy v International CPN Prefix 1000 80 1250 inc Tone Detection Mode 10 E 1 6 Lower Bound msec Base Tone Generation Set System CESID Default a 7 recrtasoiino United States 1 o Script Tag for Native Names Latin vi the define ii io Maintenance amp Monitoring Favorites Search The rest of the installation of the IP DECT system is like installation for Communication Manager Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 193 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager 194 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installing and operating the Advanced Charger Introduction
327. minology in PDM e Device can be a charger or a portable device that can be connected to PDM e Number the complete settings for a single device Also chargers have a Number e Template general settings for a specific device type A template can be applied to several Numbers of the same device type e Tabs in the PDM there are three different views or tabs In these tabs the information for devices Numbers and templates are shown Some information is shown in two tabs e Parameter definition file a file including all possible settings for a certain device type Templates are created from parameter definition files e Software is the software used in devices The device software can be updated to a new version via PDM e Version parameter definition files and device software are indicated by versions e Package file a file that can contain other files such as parameter definition files software files and template files e Importing diffent types of files can be imported Note that if a software file should be imported it may have been delivered in a package file e Associate before being able to synchronize parameters between PDM and devices it is necessary to associate a Number with the device Association includes all parameters If it exists on that device type it also includes Contacts e Assign it is possible to assign a Number to a device that has not yet been assigned a Number in the Device Manager Assign include
328. mplates etc When replacing a faulty ELISE2 hardware module the Module Key and Compact Flash can be moved from the faulty ELISE2 module to the new ELISE2 By doing this the licenses and the settings can be used directly on the new ELISE2 See Getting Started on page 412 and Installation on page 430 for a detailed description on how to work with the ELISE2 hardware 518 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Glossary A ACommunication Manager AIWS B BPC C Central Phonebook Communication Manager Company Phonebook Contacts CSV D DECT DGH DH DHCP DTMF E Elise 2 Server FER Avaya Communication Manager an Avaya PBX Avaya In Building Wireless Server Module that enables wireless services to and from the portable devices Battery Pack Charger A Phonebook stored in a database in the control module or reached from the control module Communication Manager an Avaya PBX synonymous for ACommunication Manager A Phonebook that is configured in and uploaded to a telephone from the Device Manager The entries are locked for editing The name of the phonebook in a cordless telephone Comma Separated Value A file containing data separated by commas Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications global standard for cordless telecommunication Device Group Handler Device handler Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol a protocol for automating the configuration of computers
329. munication ManagerBE System Administration 193 Installing and operating the Advanced Charger 195 lie ea A AN a 195 SMS 6 6565 Cee ee CURE ey SOC SEEME LS RES DEE ERS Oem 196 Technical Solution cae ee a ee a ee ee ee 196 8 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Contents Requirements ee 196 Installation and Configuration 198 Advanced Charger Installation 198 Advanced Charger Configuration o 199 DOI a e A ADA e A Ai 200 COMUMISSIOHING AAA RAR AAA RA A AR 201 Maintenance oc coo nao iso eee 202 Softw re Update lt ce da ae tede A ee e a A we a SS 202 DOSIS esta ic WO A AO E A A A a a 203 Charger INSTA aa as ad ADE A AA e aw 203 RED WCIGAIONS a s o a A A AR O e a ERE AR a a 204 Toupleshooting a e cd AAA AAA OE A 205 Installing Multiple Battery Charger 207 INEFOGUETION sepsis AAA AAA A Sal OE 207 o AAA 208 Compliance ad A A ca de a 209 Technical SOR c be iaa 210 Installation and Configuration 2 211 Multiple Battery Charger Installation 2 211 CONNMISSIONING 02 ARA RNA AR AA AA 218 Operon a 4 2 ek we aa AAA AA 219 TOURS COUN aa 4 a a ha eee AS A ee 219 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger 221 lidzs e cha x Sr A a ee eS 221 o A III 222 Compliance rr
330. n Search result Included in a successful request before the entries that matched the request Sorry no match Sent when there were no match for the sent request Note This setting does not affect all handset types 5 Click Activate Select Phonebook Database for Central Phonebook Select which database to use for phone numbers Local 500 Editable Local 2000 View only TFTP or LDAP e lf the default local database is selected continue below in chapter Import Entries to the Phonebook from a CSV File on page 319 Export the Phonebook to a CSV File on page 320 and Add Entries to the Phonebook on page 316 e If LDAP server is selected continue in chapter LDAP Parameter Setup on page 361 e f TFTP is selected continue in chapter 10 1 8 TFTP Parameter Setup on page 84 Select database to use for the Central Phonebook On the AIWS start page click Configuration The AIWS Configuration window opens 2 Inthe left pane click Other settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page opens 3 Inthe left pane click Phonebook In the Database for lookups field choose between Local 500 Editable Local 2000 View only LDAP and TFTP If Local 2000 View only is chosen the Add and Delete all buttons are not visible in the Edit Phonebook pages LDAP Parameter Setup The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is an application protocol for querying and modifying directory services runni
331. n outside party is anyone who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Whereas a malicious party is anyone including someone who may be otherwise authorized who accesses your telecommunications equipment with either malicious or mischievous intent Such intrusions may be either to through synchronous time multiplexed and or circuit based or asynchronous character message or packet based equipment or interfaces for reasons of Utilization of capabilities special to the accessed equipment Theft such as of intellectual property financial assets or toll facility access Eavesdropping privacy invasions to humans Mischief troubling but apparently innocuous tampering Harm such as harmful tampering data loss or alteration regardless of motive or intent Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associated with your system and or its networked equipment Also realize that if such an intrusion should occur it could result in a variety of losses to your company including but not limited to human data privacy intellectual property material assets financial resources labor costs and or legal costs Responsibility for Your Company s Telecommunications Security The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equipment rests with you Avaya s customer system administrator your telecommunications peers an
332. n be added by connecting the device to the system or use the Add device function It is possible to transfer the information for a Number from one device to a new device 338 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager e Devices can be reset to factory settings e Devices can be updated with new software Add Devices Note Before connecting a device to the Device Manager make sure the connection is set up according to the instructions in the device s User Manual If a range of new devices are to be added the easiest way is to 1 Create a template with all common parameter settings See Create a Parameter Template on page 329 2 Add a range of Numbers and run the template See Create New Numbers on page 333 and Run a Template to Set Parameter Values Edit the parameters and change individual settings See Edit Parameters on page 334 Connect the devices and associate them with the Numbers in the database See Associate a Number with a Device on page 337 A single device can be added in the same way Note It is not possible to change model of a device already added to the site Instead a new device of the desired model must be added to the site and the parameters set to the correct values Synchronize a Device When parameters have been changed in a device the device is synchronized with the Number saved in the database When a device is being synchronized parameters tha
333. n file s to be deleted Click Delete In the Delete files dialogue click Yes Click Close Os OV DINOS ie Delete Software In the File menu click File management The File management window opens Click on the Software tab Select the software to be deleted Click Delete In the Delete files dialogue click Yes Click Close Oo GM BOO I oS Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 351 Installing and operating AIWS Delete Language Oy Ol AIN Note This applies to language files Ing Translation files xml are not deleted In the File menu click File management The File management window opens Click on the Language tab Select the Language to be deleted Click Delete In the Delete files dialogue click Yes Click Close Import and Export Import and other file handling of parameter definition files software files and language files is described in File management on page 342 Import of translation files xml is desrcibed in Import Translation files on page 390 The purpose of exporting and importing Numbers and Templates is to be able to move Numbers and Templates to another site or to use at a later time It is also possible to move between PDM Windows Version and AIWS The parameter configuration in Numbers can be exported to a file This file can be used by the supplier to pre program devices before delivery to the customer If there is a naming conflict when imp
334. n in call minutes for a cordless phone Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 45 Planning an IP DECT System mE Minutes per hour mE Minutes per hour 50 3 250 15 100 6 300 18 150 9 500 30 200 12 750 45 Example A customer ordering a system with 55 cordless phones generating 200 mE each in average requires a system with a traffic capacity of 11 E With an accepted GOS of 0 5 the number of base stations is found as follows The total traffic is 11 E In the column of 0 5 GOS the next higher value of 11 E is 14 2 E resulting in 3 base stations The system shall be equipped with 3 base stations offering the client 14 4 E instead of 11 This means that the system has an over capacity 3 2 E which allows expansion of the system with 16 cordless phones without reducing the grade of service or the need of more base stations Traffic Capacity of the Base Stations The total traffic that is being generated by all cordless phones of the systems should be in accordance with the capacity of the cordless network as well A base station having 8 channels available has an erlang value of 2 7 with a GOS of 0 5 This value can be read from the table above This means that each base station can serve 18 cordless phones assuming that cordless phones generate 150 mE each during busy hour 13 5 cordless phones if 200 mE each Example Suppose that in the building of the customer in the example in
335. nabled Carriers VRRP RP RP RP Ree Backup Update Coder GIA Frame ms 20 Exclusive 7 SC F Diagnostics OK Cancel Reset Change System Name and Password Note This is only applicable for a Master IPBS never on a Slave IPBS The system name and password must be the same for all IPBSs throughout the system Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 1 Select DECT gt System Note To access the System tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Write a system name in the System Name text field 3 Enter a new password in the Password text field Repeat the password 4 Click OK Change Subscription Method The IP DECT system can be set to use the following subscription methods e With User AC only individual registration with User AC possible e With System AC enables anonymouse subscription individual registration with User AC is also possible 110 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation e Disable disables subscription Select subscription method 1 Select DECT gt System Note To access the System tab the Master mode has to be activated see Select Mode on page 113 2 Select subscription method in the Subscriptions drop down list 3 Click OK Configure Authentication Code If allow anonymous subscription method is selected it is needed for the IP DECT system to have an authentication code configured select
336. name The Rename template dialogue opens In the Rename template dialogue enter a new name in the New name text field Click OK The Rename template dialogue closes and the new name appears in the list in the Templates tab Copy a template Select the Templates tab Select the template you want to copy The selected row is highlighted In the Template menu select Copy or right click and select Copy The Copy template dialogue opens In the Copy template dialogue enter a new name in the New name text field Click OK The Copy template dialogue closes and the new template appears in the list in the Templates tab Edit a template 1 Select the Templates tab Select the template you want to edit The selected row is highlighted In the Template menu select Edit or right click and select Edit The Edit template window opens In the Edit template window edit the parameters that shall be edited Click OK The Edit template window closes Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 331 Installing and operating AIWS Delete a template Select the Templates tab N Select the template you want to delete The selected row is highlighted In the Template menu select Delete or right click and select Delete or press the Delete button The Delete template dialogue opens 4 Click Yes The Delete template dialogue closes and the template is deleted Upgrade a template 1 Se
337. nce Guide 05 2010 349 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 122 The Upgrade software dialogue O Upgrade software Device type 3720 Imported Available files Y EnterURL Upgrade Activate new software 2 Immediately Immediately Later when idle O When idle in charger O After manual restart Cancel In the Upgrade software dialogue the following fields are shown Device type shows the model of your device Imported The Available files box contains previously imported software files see Import new Software for Devices on page 345 the latest used software file is selected by default The Enter URL box gives a possibility to enter a path to a URL Import is used to import new software Upgrade Immediately is used to start upgrade immediately Later enter a date and time for a scheduled upgrade Upgrades can be scheduled about 4 month ahead Activate new software mark Immediately When idle When idle in charger or After manual restart depending on when new software shall be activated 6 If the software to be used for software upgrade is not available it needs to be imported If so click Import The Import software dialogue opens Locate the file and click Open The software file is imported to the Device Manager It is recommended to use Enter URL if the software is stored on an external server and should not be impor
338. ncelled no licence Status time out from message service Can t receive status Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 397 Installing and operating AIWS nan Message cancelled no Call ID oor Call ID s out of number range Unknown returncode confused Example GUI index4 Figure 154 Files used for translation of the user interface index4 NotPage To cali ada Lee grou Use predeined message Type Normal Hlacabears Message igxi language s Delete op code 2 beeps Printlty Norma Citar bes Send l i I i I I i i 1 I i i i i I Ratt tn last masia i i l i I i I i I i i i 1 Message history Call if Beba text Abrent ipacus fae eee eS A eee eee eee ee nee eee ee Seen ee A eeee cena a eee ee ceed 398 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Language and User Interface Text which needs to be translated is found in two different files Translation of texts in the user interface including text in Administrate pages but excluding text in the Java Applet are found in the language js file Translation of the Java Applet Message history field is found in the receive html file 1 Download copy the files language js and receive htm1 from the FTP area refer to Files for Translation Editing on page 391 Open the language js file in a text editor for example Wordpad a Add the translation inside the quotation marks after
339. nd lifts may require extra base stations due to heavier constructions Coverage in lifts may require base stations closer to or in the lift shaft Corners and irregularities in the construction such as partial renovation extensions of older buildings and so on have influence Concentration of air conditioning ducts or other technical installations may influence the field pattern and thus the coverage Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 35 Planning an IP DECT System Figure 7 Example of the locations of base stations in a building Le 40 metres gt LL gt 3 5 metres Front view of a building Conference room Corridor 16 metres Base Office station 1 006 Top view of top floor Building Elements This section describes how different building elements can affect the coverage e The cell size is dependant on the material of which walls ceilings and floors are made e Plain light or reinforced concrete wood and plaster absorb and pass radio waves in different ways e Metal walls and large metal cabinet rows reflect all signals resulting in a greatly reduced coverage in areas behind these objects e X ray rooms in hospitals protected by lead walls and computer rooms in banking buildings protected against unwanted interference do not allow radio signals to enter e Exhibition halls or production halls may give reflections due to large metal st
340. ndow appears Click on the Software tab Click Add The Import files dialogue opens A E Select the software files to be imported Only files with a corresponding extension are shown such as bin and pkg Click Open Check that the newly imported software files appear in the list Click Close a Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 345 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 120 File management window Software tab File management Parameter definition Software Language Phonebook Device type Version File 3725_v2 8 18 bin Import Language files Note There is a difference between Language files Ing for devices described in this section and Translation files xml for the AIWS interface that are described in Customize the Language on page 387 Import of translation files are done via the AIWS Configuration page Updated language files are distributed by your supplier 1 In the File menu click File management The File management window appears Click on the Language tab Click Add The Import files dialogue opens Select the language files to be imported Click Open Check that the newly imported language files appear in the list DaN 346 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager 7 Click Close D File management Parameter definition Software Language Phonebook Device type Language File Swedish Ing
341. ne 490 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Directional single antenna Directional single antenna General Manufacturer MAT Equipment Product code manufacturer MA420X44 Physical Size h x w x th 270 w x 140 h x 35 mm panel thickness Mounting stand off 71 mm wall to back of antenna Weight 0 82 kg Material colour shroud UV resistant plastic grey RAL 7035 Environmental bracket aluminium and zamak Operating temperature 33 to 55 C Functional Specs Frequency range 1880 to 1920 MHz Nominal impedance 50 ohms VSWR lt 1 6 Polarization linear vertical Gain at connector level 9 5 dBi 0 3 dBi Radiation in horizontal plane beam width H plane at 3 dB 69 Radiation in vertical plane beam width E plane at 3 dB 31 Maximum power 10 watts Connector MCX male connector at the end of a1 m RG316 coaxial cable minimum bending radius 20 mm Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 491 Technical Data Orientation capability 45 in azimuth horizontal plane 15 in elevation vertical plane Radiation pattern Typical radiation in horizontal plane Typical radiation in vertical plane 492 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Outdoor housing DECT bas
342. need to be unique throughout the system This is the name presented in a called party s display unless this is configured in the IP PBX e Display Name Will be showed in the telephone display when the phone is idle e Number The phone number extension need to be unique throughout the system e IPEI IPDI needs to be empty for anonymous registration e Auth Code the authentication code needs to be empty for anonymous registration so the System Authentication code will be used for the telephone subscription Click OK Repeat step 2 to 4 for all users Assign Cordless Telephones to Users 1 Select DECT gt System 2 Enable anonymous registration by selecting With System AC in the Subscriptions drop down list Click OK Perform an over air subscription using the system Authentication Code For information on how this is done see the reference guide of the telephone The telephones IPEI IPDI number appears in the Anonymous list To view the list Select Users gt Anonymous 5 Assign the Portable Device to any user subscribed or unsubscribed on any Master defined in the system To do it go off hook and dial the desired Master ID extension and optional individual AC code and then hang up The master ID can be found on the Users page of the IPBS or in DECT gt Master You will need to use the Master ID of the currently connected IPBS master in a Multi Base Station Master scenario Example where 0 is the Master id
343. new definition file is needed to match the new parameters There are different parameter versions for different device types Example If a parameter version for a Number is 2 5 then a parameter definition file with a version between 2 0 and 2 5 is required Import new Packages Updated package files including new software and parameter definition files are distributed by your supplier A package file can also contain template files To import a package file please follow the steps to import parameter definition files see below or Import new Software for Devices on page 345 Note Parameter definition files def and software files bin may be included in package files pkg or delivered as separate files Import Parameter Definition Files Updated parameter definition files are distributed by your supplier Note Parameter definition files def may be included in package files pkg 1 Inthe File menu click File management The File management window opens 2 Select the Parameter definition tab 3 Click Add The Import files dialogue opens Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 343 Installing and operating AIWS 4 Select the definition files to be imported Only files with a corresponding extension are shown such as def and pkg Click Open Check that the newly imported definition files appear in the list Click Close If a definition file for a certain device type already exis
344. nfiguration on page 159 there are examples of configurations that can be made 2 Configure the telephone using the PDM AIWS see Configure a Telephone with a Template on page 149 148 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation of Telephones Scenario 2 Create an identity 1 Insert the telephone in a desktop charger or rack charger connected to PDM AIWS Note The telephone must not have a User ID If a User ID exists it can be removed by performing a facory reset see Perform a Factory reset on page 152 In addition a valid parameter definition file for the telephone has been imported to the PDM AIWS 2 In PDM AIWS navigate to the Devices tab and locate the telephone in the list of devices The telephone is identified by finding the IPDI of the telephone in the Device ID column 3 Select the telephone make a right click click on Assign number and preferably enter the extension number for the telephone The number that is assigned must not be present under the Numbers tab If this is the case it is recommended to delete the number before Assign number is performed Note It is possible to enter any number or name For IP DECT systems it is recommended to use the extension number of the phone This number will now be the User ID of the telephone The User ID can be viewed in the telephone by navigating to the menu Settings gt Device info gt User ID Configure the telephone
345. nfigure the telephone using PDM AIWS customize the behavior of the telephone to suite each user profile and the specific PBX used in the system Recommended The installation is described in two different scenarios see below Before starting check which scenario that suits best Scenario 1 Note This scenario is valid for Avaya Integral Enterprise and IP DECT If subscribing towards other systems follow Scenario 2 Note The telephone to be installed must not have any previous valid registrations If it has a valid registration unsubscribe the telephone or use Scenario 2 Subscribe and create an identity 1 Subscribe the telephone towards the DECT system The subscription procedure is described in User Manual Avaya 3725 telephone During the subscription procedure the PDM AIWS identity User ID will automatically be set to be the same as the extension number Note The User ID can be viewed by navigating to the menu Settings gt Device info gt User ID or in the Admin menu Settings gt Admin menu gt Device info gt User ID To find the Admin menu see Admin Menu Tree on page 170 Configure the telephone 1 Insert the telephone into a Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger connected to PDM AIWS not needed if an over the air connection is used The telephone can be identified by finding the extension number of the telephone in the Number column or IPDI of the telephone in the Device ID column In Telephone Co
346. nformation about the system View Info Log Information saved in a volatile memory View Error Log Errors and notifications saved in a permanent memory View Complete Log requires sysadmin rights The Complete Log includes Info Log Error Log and additional debug information Note This page shall only be used when information is requested by Technical Support System Information Information about module status Debug settings can be made Standard debug is set by default but it can be extended to show more details 516 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS Send Test Message Possibility to send a test message to an entered Call ID IP Statistics Information about the number of sent Unite messages and retransmissions for entered IP destinations can be viewed The syntax of the listed IP addresses in the IP Statistics page is lt IP address gt lt No of sent messages gt where indicates that retransmissions have been made Disk Status Status of the partitioned Compact Flash used by AIWS Module Fault List Level of seriousness for different kinds of log events can be set These events can appear in the Status Log further described in chapter Status on page 369 AIWS factory reset There is no general factory reset procedure available on the AIWS You manually need to go to the AIWS advanced configuration AIWS start page configura
347. ng decides which parameters that shall be copied from the Number If All parameters is selected the synchronization time will be longer It is also possible to create a template from a telephone that is online but not stored in the database The template will contain all parameters for the telephone except for those that are Number specific Rename a template Select the Templates tab Select the template you want to rename The selected row is highlighted In the Template menu select Rename or right click and select Rename The Rename template dialogue opens In the Rename template dialogue enter a new name in the New name text field Click OK The Rename template dialogue closes and the new name appears in the list in the Templates tab Copy a template 1 Select the Templates tab Select the template you want to copy The selected row is highlighted In the Template menu select Copy or right click and select Copy The Copy template dialogue opens In the Copy template dialogue enter a new name in the New name text field Click OK The Copy template dialogue closes and the new template appears in the list in the Templates tab Edit a template Select the Templates tab Select the template you want to edit The selected row is highlighted In the Template menu select Edit or right click and select Edit The Edit template window opens In the Edit template window edit the parameters that shall be e
348. ng Configuration IMS 172 20 9 133 Illegal parameter value IMSar 2008 01 11 17 57 03 Critical Supervision UPAC 172 20 10 95 Lost connection to system 900 UPAC 95 2008 01 11 17 56 51 Warning Fault in module component UPAC 172 20 10 95 Open Access App Specific UPAC 95 2008 01 11 17 56 39 Information Start of module component UPAC 172 20 10 95 Start of component UPAC 95 2008 01 11 17 56 38 All OK X No error UPAC 172 20 10 95 Symbols used in the Fault Log Symbol Description Active persistent fault Persistent fault that has been handled x Reset message no fault exists To get more detailed information about the events it is possible to expand the log entries by clicking the Expand all entries link Single log entries can be expanded by clicking the individual plus symbol Note When the persistent fault is recovered it takes a while before the persistent fault is cleared Administer Fault Log In the Administer Fault Log page it is possible to export the log file to CSV Comma Separated Values file format and to clear the status log file from non active faults 1 Click Configuration on the start page 2 Select Other Settings gt Administer Fault Log in the left menu on the AIWS Configuration page to open the page 372 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration Export Fault Log Click to export the fault log The log will be exported in csv format 1 Click Export
349. ng Protocols The protocol used for VoIP signalling is H 323 XMobile which is a proprietary extension of H 323 H 323 is in fact a set of protocols designed to enable multimedia traffic in single LANs H 323 H 323 was developed by the International Telecommunications Union ITU and was designed from a telecommunications perspective Ratified in 1996 it has become a defacto choice for interoperability among VoIP equipment It is a standard that provides specification for computers equipment and services for multimedia communication over networks that do not provide a guaranteed QoS H 323 equipment can carry real time video audio and data or any combination of these elements Included in the H 323 standard are H 225 H 245 and the IETF protocols RTP and RTCP with additional protocols for call signalling data and audiovisual communications H 323 products and services offer the following benefits to users e Products and services developed by multiple manufacturers under the H 323 standard can interoperate without platform limitations H 323 conferencing clients bridges servers and gateways support this interoperability e H 323 provides multiple audio and video codecs that format data according to the requirements of various networks using different bit rates delays and quality options Users can choose the codecs that best support their computer and network selections H 323 XMobile The protocol between the IP PBX and the
350. ng as the AIWS is not configured the setup wizard will start automatically when logging on from a web browser Requires admin or sysadmin password refer to Authentication Levels and Default Passwords on page 305 1 Log on to AIWS The setup wizard will open and help you with the basic configuration The setup wizard includes the following settings e Network setup can be set manually or via DHCP e Licence number the type of licence determines the functionality e DECT IP address IP address to the DECT exchange e Date and time properties settings for time stamps on activities e Central Phonebook properties database to use when searching internal external or LDAP server e LDAP properties only visible if LDAP is selected in the Central Phonebook Properties e TFTP properties IP address and port number to use only visible if TFTP is selected in the Central Phonebook Properties e Passwords change from default to site specific passwords 2 Configure the phonebook but only if an LDAP server or TFTP is not used refer to Central Phonebook Configuration on page 358 3 Create a security backup We recommend you to create a security backup of all settings to facilitate the configuration in case of a software upgrade Refer to Backup the Configuration on page 373 312 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 AIWS Setup Wizard and Configuration Optional Settings
351. ng dialogue Ctrl Tab Switch tab Alt F4 Close the application Devices Shortcut Description Ctrl N Add a new device Enter Upgrade the selected device s Delete Delete the selected device s Ctrl F Find a device Numbers Shortcut Description Ctrl N Add a new Number Enter Edit the selected Number Ctrl C Copy the selected Number F2 Rename the selected Number Ctrl S Save the selected Number to the database Delete Delete the selected Number from the database Ctrl F Find a Number Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 415 Installing and operating AIWS Templates Shortcut Description Ctrl N Add a new template Enter Edit the selected template Ctrl C Copy the selected template F2 Rename the selected template Delete Delete the selected template Ctrl F Find a template 416 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Function Indicator and Error Relay Output Function Indicator and Error Relay Output Figure 161 The function indicator that indicates the status of the AIWS Function indicator r mM Q The function indicator and the error relay indicate the status of the AIWS The indication is dependent of whether the AIWS is connected to the A bus or not and also whether there is a Central Unit connected to the A bus Which mode the AIWS uses is set on the AIWS administration pages The function indicator and error relay indications are described below AIWS connected to A
352. ng over TCP IP The AIWS starts an LDAP session by connecting to an LDAP server The AIWS then sends operation requests to the server and the server sends responses in return An LDAP directory is a tree of directory entries and follows the structure below e Anentry consists of a set of attributes Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 361 Installing and operating AIWS e An attribute has a name and one or more values An entry can look like this dn cn John Ericson dc company dc com cn John Ericson givenName John sn Ericson telephoneNumber 1 888 555 6789 dn is the name of the entry it is not an attribute nor part of the entry cn John Ericson is the entry s RDN and dc company dc com is the DN of the parent entry The other lines show the attributes in the entry Attribute names are typically mnemonic strings like cn for common name dc for domain component mail for e mail address and sn for surname See Examples of Settings on page 363 On the AIWS start page click on Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens Click on Other settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page appears 3 Inthe left pane click on Phonebook The Phonebook page appears 4 Click the LDAP Settings link 5 Enter the IP or DNS address to the LDAP server in the LDAP Server Address field 6 Enter the port number used by the LDAP server in the Port Number field 7 Select how to aV
353. ng settings in the original AlWSs e AIWS Enterprise AIWS1 In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt DECT Interface gt IP DECT Click Factory to remove IP addresses Click Activate e AIWS Standard AIWS2 In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt DECT Interface gt IP DECT Set the IP addresses for DECT IP Address and Secondary DECT IP Address to 0 0 0 0 In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Other gt UNS gt Default category Enter the IP address and name of the messaging handler here 192 168 0 3 and DECT Click Activate In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Device Management Remove all IP addresses For settings in the added AIWS see above Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 301 Installing and operating AIWS AIWS configuration for Multi Base Station Masters AIWS configuration for Multi IP DECT Masters wa ca aes Messaging es between the ts Locations Branch Office E IPBS Master2 Database Replicator Radio IPBS Y g AWS IP DECT interface IPBS Master1 Database Server gt andsets can roam between the Locations Radio IPBS Radio IPBS IPBS communication IPBS LDAP The AIWS is able to support multiple Base Station Masters This configuration offers e Messaging fro
354. nge light Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware now has the network setup IP address 192 5 36 229 If the function indicator is red check that supply voltage is 12 5 Vdc 10 444 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation 4 To be able to access Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware from a PC the PC has to belong to the same network as Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware or Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware s IP address has to be found in the PC s route table To facilitate this the program Route to ELISE is provided Start the program Route to ELISE Press Attach to add the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware network setup IP address to the route table 5 Press Launch config This will open the page 192 5 36 229 system in your browser The user ID is admin and the default password is changeme 6 Press System Setup and navigate to Network Set the network parameters Use the on line help if any problems occur 7 Navigate to System 900 and select the bus operating mode for the module The modes are described in the on line help 8 Change the default passwords for all users If the passwords are not changed anyone with knowledge of the default passwords can access your Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware and change any parameter 9 Set all sections in SW3 to OFF Reboot Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware by navigating to Reboot 10 Return to the program Route to ELISE and press Detach to remove the E
355. ninitalized Registrations section newly added Radios are shown 1 Select Device Overview gt Radios 2 Click Add to add the Radio to the Master 3 Inthe Add Radio window enter a name for the device You can also add a Standby Master IP Address 4 Click OK The Radio restarts and it establishes a connection to the PARI Master only Name The unique identification name The name syntax is ipbs xx xx xx where xx xx xx should be replaced with the last 6 hexadecimal digits of the MAC address RFPI Radio Fixed Part Identity IP Address The IP address click on the IP address to access the configuration GUI of that IPBS Sync The current synchronization status Should be Master OK or Slave OK if synchronized 126 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation LDAP The LDAP status can be blank server up or down Device Name The name entered in the general menu Version The current software version Connected Time The elapsed time since connected to the Master Delete Radios In the Static Registrations section initialized Radios no longer registered to the PARI Master are shown 1 Select Device Overview gt Radios 2 Inthe Static Registrations section click Delete to delete the Radio The Radio s RFPI is now released and can be reused All other RFPIs in use are not affected Move RFPIs In the Static Registrations section initia
356. nk Access Code according to the dialplan analysis table for a DAC Dial Access Code same first digits dialed string and same total length The Incoming Digit Handling for the IP trunk should support overlap For Communication Manager 4 and Communication Manager 5 display trunk group 9 Page 1 of 21 TRUNK GROUP Group Number 9 Group Type isdn CDR Reports y Group Name IP_DECT_ Trunk COR 1 TN 1 TAC 909 Direction two way Outgoing Display n Carrier Medium H 323 Dial Access y Busy Threshold 255 Night Service Queue Length 0 Service Type tie Auth Code n Member Assignment Method auto Signaling Group 9 Number of Members 10 display trunk group 9 Page 2 of Z1 Group Type isdn TRUNK PARAMETERS Codeset to Send Display 0 Codeset to Send National IEs 6 Charge Advice non Supplementary Service Protocol a Digit Handling in out overlap enbloc Digit Treatment Digits Digital Loss Group 18 Incoming Calling Number Delete Insert Format Disconnect Supervision In y Out v Answer Supervision Timeout 0 CONNECT Reliable When Call Leaves ISDN n Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 187 Configuring Avaya Aura Communication Manager display trunk group 9 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignmen Used for DC Suppress Outpulsin ce S g Page n Measured none Internal Alert n 3 21 Maintenance Tests y
357. not included in 3720 e Fault logging e Enhanced system menu with ability to alter protection e Factory reset option To activate the Admin menu enter Settings gt Device info gt Software and press the buttons containing CRAFT that is 27238 n Note Once the Admin menu was activated by CRAFT a new menu entry Admin menu will appear in the Settings menu So you can easily enter the admin menu again without typing CRAFT The new menu entry can be deleted by a restart of the telephone Note Never enter Craft in the Settings gt Admin menu gt Device info gt Software menu to activate the admin menu again even it is already active The telephone can get stuck The following table shows the menu tree for the Admin menu in 3725 Other menus are described in User Manual Avaya 3725 telephone and User Manual Ayava 3720 telephone Admin Menu in 3725 Device info gt Software Hardware IPEI IPDI User ID DECT info Link 170 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Admin Menu in 3725 continued Administration System Centr Management Site survey tool Link HO amp roam beep On Off Range beep On Off Error rate beep On Off Set range dbm lt Value gt Set error rate f s lt Value gt Show RFPs All RFPs Selected RFPs All except selected Residential RFPs Logging No of ev
358. now possible to do so Connect a device and associate it with a Number in the database The parameters will automatically be sent from the PDM to the device See Associate a Number with a Device on page 262 Note If a template has been created for a device model it can be used to set the parameter values for a range of devices or a single device Associate a Number with a Device Before being able to to synchronize parameters between PDM and devices it is necessary to associate a Number with the device It is possible to enter several Device ID s in advance and to associate them with a Number at a later moment See also Assign a Number on page 267 1 Select the Numbers tab 2 Inthe Number menu select Associate with device The Associate number dialogue appears Figure 71 Associate number dialogue Associate number Choose a device to associate with Dev Device t Softwar Paramet Upgrad Online Latest n 103647029 d62 2 5 6 19 1 Search for in Device ID Show all 3 Select the device you want to associate with in the list 262 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation 4 Click OK If the selected device is online it will immediately be updated with the selected Number If the selected device is not online it will be updated the next time it is online It is possible to associate several Numbers with several devices simultaneously If a dev
359. ns and standards Product marking C Safety IEC 60950 1 EMC EN 55022 class B EN61000 4 3 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 481 Technical Data Portable Device Manager PDM PC Requirements PDM Installation and operation Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2 SP2 or Windows Vista Business operating system Sun Java Runtime Environment JRE 6 or later Acrobat Reader 5 0 or higher Available hard disk space Language 200 MB recommended Operational GUI English as default 482 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS Hardware Requirements Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 64 MB RAM 1 GB FLASH Hardware Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware For information on ELISE2 hardware see nstalling Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 421 PC Requirements Installation and administration Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or later Sun Java Runtime Environment JRE 6 or later Screen resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Languages Installation GUI English only Operational GUI English as standard translations can be added Items WSM MVB AIWS Basic including Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware power supply and licence WSM MVC AIWS Basic including Elise 2 Server AIWS H
360. ntenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Installation and Configuration Rackmount Charger Installation General A Important The unit shall be installed by authorized personnel only e The units shall be placed in a dry environment with a temperature range from 5 C up to 40 C 41 F to 104 F e The units shall be mounted on a vertical wall e Avoid mounting the Rackmount Charger in a sunlit place This can affect the charging capacity e Avoid mounting the Rackmount Charger where radio network coverage is not sufficient This can reduce the messaging capacity e The unit shall be mounted on concrete or plaster walls only e If the Rackmount Charger is connected to a power supply via an AC wall plug serial power supply connection is not allowed e If the Rackmount Charger is connected to a power supply via an AC wall plug the socket outlet shall be situated near the equipment and shall be easily accessible e Ifthe Rackmount Charger is connected to a power supply via a fixed connection a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the building installation wiring Delivery includes e Rackmount Charger e Power supply cord including IEC C14 connector male e Inlet accessory kit including cable support holders and screws Note An extension cord IEC C14 AC connector female IEC60320 C 13 to wall socket IEC60320 C14 has to be ordered separately It shall be connected between t
361. nternet Explorer In the menu select Tools gt Internet Options gt Advanced Under Browsing uncheck the Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility checkbox When secure mode is enabled see Web access security settings on page 307 only secure access via HTTPS and FTPES is allowed HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS and FTP access is not allowed The FileZilla Client freeware not included supports FTPES NetPage Troubleshooting My Groups and My Messages don t work Check that cookies are enabled in your web browser Number list Common Groups or Common Messages are unsatisfactorily updated Refresh the cache memory on the web browser If they still are unsatisfactory refresh caching proxy if any In for example Microsoft Internet Explorer this can be achieved by pressing CTRL F5 Entire Message history including column headings doesn t appear The Java Virtual Machine may be missing on your PC Contact your IT department for assistance Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 513 Troubleshooting Message history is not running although messages are sent and column headings are visible There might be a firewall preventing you from receiving data from the NetPage server Contact your IT department to open port number 5891 in the firewall in the direction from the web client to the NetPage server Reboot after image installation w o restoring the parameters When install
362. nto service Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes For equipment approved prior to July 23 2001 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On either the rear or inside the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company For equipment approved after July 23 2001 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council on Terminal Attachments ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAE Q TXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the
363. ntries are correct Send a message Check that the message history status is received and displayed Update the User Interface after a new AIWS Release When a new version of the AIWS is released there might be changes in the user interface that need to be translated 1 Import your old translated file to the new AIWS software version New text and buttons in the user interface are shown in English Click the language file link and save it Open the file All tags that are not translated are marked with the comment lt The text identifier below couldn t be translated gt Translate the new text and import the translated file again Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 401 Installing and operating AIWS Messaging Tool Configuration Depending on AIWS item see Items on page 290 different tools for messaging are displayed e Messaging Tool for AIWSs without NetPage e NetPage for AIWSs with NetPage Operation of the Messaging Tool is described in Operation Messaging on page 314 Messaging Tool Configuration It is possible to change the title of the Messaging Tool webpage 1 Click Configuration on the start page The AIWS Configuration page appears 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu on AIWS Configuration page The AIWS Advanced Configuration page appears 3 Inthe left pane click Messaging Tool The Messaging Tool page appears Figur
364. nute If a Sync Master is found during this first minute it will start up in slave mode In slave mode it will continuously search for the Master base station and if the Master is not found it will enter the Master mode If no Master is found during the first minute of search it will immediately start up in Master mode Configure Synchronization to Another DECT System An IPBS that is configured as a Sync Master can be configured to synchronize to another DECT system If the site contains multiple DECT systems disturbance between the systems can be avoided if the systems are synchronized Synchronization between the systems is done by configure an alien RFPI in the Sync Master The synchronization using alien RFPI is done on a best effort basis If the alien system is powered down during operation of the IP DECT system the IP DECT system will still continue to operate Also if the alien system is not found during startup of the Sync Master it will start to operate anyway When configure an alien RFPI at least all carriers that are enabled in the alien RFPI must be enabled in the IP DECT system When configure an alien RFPI and an alternative alien RFPI this must be different RFPIs on the same alien system not different RFPls on different alien DECT systems Note If an alien RFPI is configured on an existing IP DECT system it may take several hours before the system is synchronized to the alien system Configure an alien RFPI in the Air Sync M
365. o configure profiles via the telephone menu See User Manual Avaya 3725 telephone Import Contacts It is possible to import a phonebook file that is local phonebook to a telephone The phonebook file is a tab separated txt file and contains two items per row number and name The PDM is used to import the phonebook file to the handset For more information see Import Contacts on page 264 See also Central Phonebook on page 159 and Company Phonebook on page 159 168 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Telephone Configuration Shortcuts This feature is included in 3725 not in 3720 One click access to predefined functions can be configured for the Soft keys Hot keys Navigation keys and the Multi function button It is for example possible to define the soft key to make a call Shortcuts are configured via parameters in the Shortcuts folder Note When programming Soft keys both name and function must be set Note It is also possible to configure shortcuts via the telephone menu See User Manual Avaya 3725 telephone Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 169 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones Administration Admin Menu Tree The telephone has a hidden menu for system administrators The Admin menu contains e Software and hardware information IPDI and IPEI e DECT link and system information e Centralized Management status e Site survey tool
366. ode the IPBS will act as a DHCP client on power up If the IPBS is restarted by shortly pressing the reset button it will get the IP address 192 168 0 1 and the netmask 255 255 255 0 for the LAN port Change DCHP mode following the steps below 1 2 3 4 Select LAN gt DHCP Select DHCP mode in the Mode drop down list Click OK Reset in order to make the changes take effect if Client or Automatic is set see Reset on page 135 Set a Static IP Address It is necessary for the Master and the Standby Master to have static IP addresses The slaves can have dynamic IP addresses retrieved from the network DHCP server Ask the network administrator to reserve an IP address for the Master and Standby Master 1 oa e yN Select LAN gt DHCP Select Disabled in the Mode drop down list Click OK Do NOT reset the device yet Set a static IP address first Select LAN gt IP Enter IP Address Network Mask Default Gateway and DNS Server addresses provided by the network administrator in the text fields You can also enter an alternative DNS Server in the Alt DNS Server text field and select the Check ARP check box to detect and prevent ARP poisoning attacks Click OK Reset in order to make the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 Start the web based configuration using the static IP address Dynamic IP address via DHCP The Slaves Radios can have dynamic IP address allocation if the network has
367. oftware is installed on a PC running Windows XP Professional or Windows Vista Business The charger is then connected to the PC running the PDM software via the USB port The COM port is also supported by PDM but currently no Avaya device 240 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Introduction Note Only one charger at a time can be connected to PDM A Rackmount Charger can hold one or more cordless telephones though Figure 57 Charger connection to the PDM Desktop charger Parameters can be edited for a single device and then sent to the device but if many devices are to be updated with new parameter settings it is also possible to create a parameter template and run the template on each Number Parameters can be uploaded from a connected device edited and sent to the device again If the PDM shall store parameter settings in the site database or not is selectable When editing parameters there are help texts to assist in writing the correct parameter format Devices can be upgraded with new software A text and a status bar indicates that the connected device is being updated with the new software Requirements See Technical Data Portable Device Manager PDM on page 482 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 241 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM PDM description PDM terminology This section gives a brief description of the basic ter
368. oftware upgrade in progress It is also possible to see a progress bar when the device is being upgraded software upgrade Pending Request sent or Accepted a green arrow software upgrade Scheduled or Retrying the last upgrade Failed or Aborted a red broken arrow device busy operation cannot be executed because handset is not in idle state Please bring handset back to idle state to start the operation Sometimes a restart of the PDM application is needed to get the proper status update for this handset Completed no icon is shown Note A software upgrade from AIWS should be done on one device to start with If successful the remaining devices can be updated in one operation e Online shows if the device is connected to the Device Manager The icon indicates a connected device e Latest Number shows the Number ID that the device had during its last login Note A handset can be online when connected over the air or plugged into an advanced charger Advanced Chargers and Rackmount Chargers will be online when connected to the Ethernet There is a certain time out of a view hours so it s not mandatory that the device is still online 326 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Figure 107 The Devices tab showing a list of devices in a system 5 Avaya WSM File Device Devices Numbers Templates Device types Desktop Charger Ad Searc
369. oint user database contains information about the users registered in the system It also contains the system configuration that is the configurations made under the DECT menu This section describes how to do the following configurations and settings e Configure LDAP Server e Check LDAP server Status e Configure LDAP Replicator e Check LDAP Replicator Status Configure LDAP Server The IP DECT system needs an LDAP server If the PBX is set up as an LDAP server the IPBS Master should be set up as an LDAP Replicator If the IPBS Master is set up as an LDAP Server the Standby Master could be set up as an LDAP Replicator see Configure LDAP Replicator on page 107 Setup the IPBS as an LDAP server Note The selected user name and password must be the same in both the Master and the Standby Master Select LDAP gt Server Add a user for example Idap user in the User text field Enter a password in the Password text field Mark the Write Access check box Click OK Oo ON gt 106 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Figure 27 Setting LDAP User Name and Password IP DECT Base Station Configuration Server Server Status Replicator Replicator Status General LAN User Password Write Access IP IdapTstuser eeee M LDAP l m DECT VolP Administration Users Device Overview Traffic Backup Update Diagnostics Reset 039 Check LDAP Server Status 1 Select LDAP gt Server S
370. ok Setup Figure 125 AIWS Phonebook Setup Phonebook Introductory text Search Result Previous EE No search result Sorry no match Database for lookups Local 500 Editable Y View LDAP parameters Enter Search result texts When a request is sent to the phonebook a text is included in the response that is sent to the telephone These texts can be customized for example translated 1 On the AIWS start page click on Configuration The AIWS Configuration page appears 2 Inthe left pane click Other settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page appears 3 In the left pane click Phonebook The Phonebook page appears Figure 126 Central Phonebook Setup Phonebook Introductory text EN Search Result Previous Factory No search result ES Sorry no match Database for lookups ES Local 500 Editable Y View LDAP parameters Search direction Right to left means that the Central Phonebook returns entries that ends with the entered search criteria Note Ifthe LDAP phone book is selected the search direction will always be left to right So the direction setting will not be valid in this case 360 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration 4 Enter the texts that should be included in the search result see table below for more information about the different texts and when they are used Default text Descriptio
371. ok search will only show the first 25 entries if more matches available in the cordless telephone User needs to narrow down the search string to get not displayed entries 2 Select a name and press the Call key to dial the number See also the documentation for the telephone that is used 318 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Messaging Search examples You want to search for Text to be entered Search result First name or Family name S M All names that start with Sm both first names and family names First and Family name L _ B All entries where the first name starts with L and the family name starts with B First name only A N _ All first names that starts with An Family name only _A N All family names that start with An Telephone number 2 0 0 All telephone numbers that end with 200 Import and Export a Phonebook Import Entries to the Phonebook from a CSV File The CSV file to be imported to the phonebook should have the following format using a semicolon a comma or a TAB as a delimiter i e First name 1 Last name 1 Phone number 1 First name 2 Last name 2 Phone number 2 Warning When importing a phonebook file in CSV format existing entries are deleted 1 Click Phonebook on the start page 2 Enter User name and Password and click OK Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 319 Installing and operating AIWS 3 Select Phonebook gt
372. om a cordless unit that supports WAP Two WML pages for this purpose are included in NetPage The page that is accessed is called send wml and the response is shown on receive wml The included WAP application enables specifying a Call ID and a message text When the message has been sent the receive page is opened and the send status is shown The send application is accessible from the receive page in case another message should be sent Note If the cordless unit uses WAP version earlier than 2 0 it has to be stated that the message is UTF8 encoded See UTF8 encoded on page 401 for more information 400 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Language and User Interface UTF8 encoded When NetPage is accessed from a cordless unit that uses WAP version earlier than 2 0 the message that is sent will be UTF8 encoded The parameter utf8 then has to be included to indicate this for the CGI script in NetPage The parameter utf8 has to be given a value but the value has no meaning i e it can be any value Test the New User Interface It is recommended to test the customized user interface as follows for example If a company logotype is added check that it looks all right and that AIWS opens quickly If AIWS opens slowly minimize the picture file size and save it as interlaced to decrease wait time for the image Check that all text is correctly translated Check that the phonebook opens and that the e
373. omatic to either client or off see Set DHCP Mode on page 102 This section describes how to determine the dynamically allocated IP address The address is used to access the IPBS using a web browser Two methods are described e Ina Network without a DHCP Server on page 74 e Ina Network with a DHCP Server on page 74 In a Network without a DHCP Server If the network does not have a DHCP server and the DHCP mode is set to automatic factory default follow the steps below Note If the IPBS has been used before it must be restored to factory default settings by performing a long hardware reset see Reset Using the Reset Button on page 136 1 Connect a ethernet cable between the IPBS and the computer The computer Ethernet interface need to be configured for a fixed IP address in the range of 192 168 0 2 to 192 168 0 254 Note For IPBS a power adapter must be used Perform a hardware reset by shortly pressing the reset button The IPBS will be assigned the IP address 192 168 0 1 and the netmask 255 255 255 0 Enter http 192 168 0 1 in the browser address field to access the IPBS GUI After the first startup the DHCP mode should be changed from automatic to either client or off see Set DHCP Mode on page 102 E S In a Network with a DHCP Server If the network has a DHCP server the IP address is determined following the steps below The IPBS MAC address can be found on the label on the box and on the
374. ome menu items are not shown in the set language Locally configured menu items are made in another language No fault Locally by the administrator configured entries will not be translated when the language is changed While in charger the telephone will shut down again immediately when it is switched on Switch off while in charger is activated Change setting in menu Connections gt In charger Phone cannot make or receive calls e Check trunk configuration in IPBS master and Communication Manager IP Addresses and ports need to match 500 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya 3720 3725 DECT Telephones e Check status station on Communication Manager if already in off hook state Make a call to the station and check status station on Communication Manager again this does not work remove station on Communication Manager and configure again Feature access codes do not work It might be that feature access codes do not work even if they are sent manually or preprogrammed in the In call menu Call service menu or My favorites One option is to enter the R key before sending the feature access code e g 05 If it is preprogrammed you need to add the R in the value field for the feature e g R 05 Handset cannot receive SMS and Centralized Phonebook access to LDAP directory does not work In the IP DECT system the user ID of the handset Menu gt Settings
375. on 1 Inthe Options menu select Preferences gt Select language The Select language dialogue opens Figure 60 The Select language dialogue Select la nguage Select language New language Available languages English Built in Current v In the Available languages field check if the preferred language is available via PDM If the preferred translation file needs to be imported do so by clicking the Import button In the Import files window find and select the translation file to imported and click Open In the Available languages field select which language to use English is default Click OK The dialogue closes Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 247 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Operation The PDM GUI PDM Window The PDM window consists of three areas Menu Toolbar and Work Area The Toolbar has three tabs Devices Numbers and Templates When one of these tabs is selected the available devices numbers or templates will be shown in the left hand pane of the work area The right hand pane shows the devices numbers or templates which have already been configured In the upper part of the Work area there are search fields where different search criteria can be selected depending on which tab that is displayed Figure 61 PDM window areas E OurSite Ascom WinPDM Menu File Settings Help a Devices Numbers Templates Tool
376. on The purpose of exporting and importing Numbers and Templates is to be able to move Numbers and Templates to another site or to use at a later time It is also possible to move between PDM and AIWS The parameter configuration in Numbers can be exported to a file This file can be used by the supplier to pre program devices before delivery to the customer If there is a naming conflict when importing a template the new template is imported and the old template is deleted If there is a Number conflict when importing Numbers an error message is displayed Export Numbers to a File It is possible to configure Numbers for a site and export the settings to a file One or several Numbers can be selected The exported file can then be used when producing new devices for the customer Only Numbers stored in database can be exported There is no restriction on device type when exporting 1 Select the Numbers tab The Numbers view appears 2 Select the Number or Numbers 3 In the Number menu click Export The Export Numbers dialogue appears By default the file will be saved in the My documents directory with the name sitename xcp The application remembers the last location used though You can select another name and directory 4 Click Save Import Numbers Updated Number files may be distributed by your supplier 1 Inthe File menu click Import gt Numbers A File Browser window appears 2 Select the Number files to be import
377. on in Mounting on page 435 System 900 Addressing The System 900 address consists of two hexadecimal digits that are selected by the eight sections of the address switch SW2 Sections 5 8 of the switch select the first most significant digit and section 1 4 select the second least significant digit The address must not be the same as any other System 900 unit address see document System Installation On site Paging System TD 90227GB for more information 436 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation Figure 169 The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware addressing switch SW2 Es LEER o lle gt 1 Y 1 JE 152322 Jrz 1 _s Ls ro w l e 016 Connection of System Bus The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware can be installed together with other System 900 units either via modular system bus cabling or via twisted pair lines Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 437 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Bus Connection to Modular Jacks L 017 1 The illustration above shows an Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware placed to the left of another System 900 unit Connect the bus cable as shown from connector J12 J13 on the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware to the bus connector on the other unit
378. on shall be set to No Connection parameters Password password Require user identification No Serial port None Y PPP server address 192 168 0 1 PPP client address 192 168 0 2 2 Set up the connection parameters and click Activate Open ports 1 Click Edit for Open Ports in the Remote Management Server page to open any additional ports that are needed for configuration tools To be able to configure ports section 8 on switch number 3 has to be set to ON Switch nr 8 must be setto be able to change parameters Open ports 10101 12345 2 Set up the port parameters and click Activate Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 385 Installing and operating AIWS Serial port channel Not applicable Language and User Interface All text shown in the user interface is by default in English but a copy of the language can be translated and imported to AIWS Several languages can be added The default English language is not possible to edit or remove The supplied user interface can also be modified to suit the individual customer requirements concerning functionality Basic changes that can be made are e Translate or adapt text refer to Translate Edit the Language on page 387 e Hide unused functionality refer to Change the NetPage User Interface Functionality on page 395 e Modify the user interface to suit the customer s image refer to Customize the User Interface GUI on pa
379. on the Parameter definition tab Select the definition files to be deleted Click Delete The Delete files dialogue opens Click Yes Click Close oe PD gt Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 275 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Delete Software In the File menu click File management The File management window appears Click on the Software tab Select the software to be deleted Click Delete The Delete files dialogue opens Click Yes Click Close oa fF wWDhH gt Delete Language Note This applies to language files Ing Translation files xml are not deleted In the File menu click File management The File management window opens Click on the Language tab Select the Language to be deleted Click Delete In the Delete files dialogue click Yes Click Close D m eo NM SS Delete Phonebook file In the File menu click File management The File management window opens Click on the Phonebook tab Select the Phonebook file to be deleted Click Delete In the Delete files dialogue click Yes Click Close DOr BO NS Import and Export Import and other file management of parameter definition files software files and language files is described in File management on page 268 Import of translation files xml is desrcibed in Language settings on page 246 276 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operati
380. on the telephone will not affect the Call services menu entries The text entered in PDM AIWS will not be changed In Call Menu In Call Menu is a configurable menu in the telephone The setting for the incall menu entries are system dependent The purpose of the In Call Menu is to provide a user friendly access to system dependent functionality during a call such as e Start a New Call during Conversation e Switch between Calls e Enda Call e Transfer a Call e Transfer to new Call e Make Conference Call e Activate Call Back e Sending Call Waiting Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 161 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones Note The Transfer to a new call option will be visible in the telephone when the parameters Transfer call and New call are set The menu is described in User Manual Avaya 3725 telephone The programming of the menu is done with PDM or AIWS For instructions on how to edit parameter with PDM see Edit Parameters on page 259 or with AIWS see Edit Parameters on page 334 Ask your supplier for example templates that will configure In Call Menu for your PBX Figure 33 Examples for In Call Menu settings Systems Name Value H O System A New call R Registration Data End current call H PBX Settings Switch call Sy Diversion Transfer call H Absence Conference call R Numbers Callback RP 06PH In call Functionality Call waiting Own line se
381. on two AIWS modules A system configuration with two AIWS s is required when there are more than 120 cordless telephones simultaneously in the system and Central Phonebook with LDAP TFTP or Netpage Advanced is used Figure 87 Example of a multiple AIWS solution with Device Handling on one AIWS and DECT interface on another AIWS WSM1 WSM2 Device Manager DECT Netpage Central LDAP Phonebook A Server WSM Enterprise WSM Standard y Basic configuration for the setup The basic configuration for this setup is described below 296 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration e AIWS1 Enterprise This setting is done in the Configuration page not in the Setup Wizard In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Device Management Replace the address 127 0 0 1 DECT with lt IP address of AIWS2 gt DECT that is if AIWS2 has the IP address 192 168 0 2 change to 192 168 0 2 DECT Set forwarding for Netpage In Configuration gt Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Other gt UNS gt Operating mode Operating Mode shall be set to Forwarding IP address of forward destination UNS shall be set to the IP address of the AIWS with the DECT connection here AIWS2 192 168 0 2 Click Activate Disable the DECT interface on the AIWS1 because it s not used If the DECT interface is disabled the AIWS will not show any
382. one 145 POM RP EII 146 AIWS Avaya In Building Wireless Server 146 Over the air OTA via IP DECT o 146 Installation of Telephones e 147 Preparing PDM AIWS for handling of 3725 3720 147 Installation of a new Telephone ee eee 147 Configure a Telephone with a Template lt lt 149 Synchronizing a telephone with PDM AIWS 151 Malitenance cc Gea ke iaa a ARA AA ew Ow A 152 DeIMONS 6 6 ca koe Cae eee Oo las ee Pe ee k 152 Upgrade telephone software 2 ee es 152 Perform a Factory reset ee o omo o o o 152 Replacement procedure choice guide 152 Easy Replacements lt gt 24 90 de iD w 153 Replacement of a telephone with the AIWS 155 Replacement of the telephone with the PDM 157 Telephone Configuration 159 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 7 Contents Voice Mail si aise america 159 Central Phonebook s ii a ae dee oe SO a es eae ed A A a 159 Company Phonebook s c 606 vars AA OEE Ow Dw 159 Call SONICO 65 bas Sa WH RA Gee Caw ON ae ee AA 160 Mi GN eat eat ws a ae es ee E 161 My Fav urit s ica a Ge SSE SHEDS de OSS EES DRESS 162 Own Line SORIA s gt s aca mri ee A Oe we ee S 163 Uploadable
383. onfiguration page 1 Click Configuration on the start page The Configuration page appears 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu in the AIWS Configuration page The Advanced Configuration page apperars Under Common click Reboot The Reboot page appears To reboot the AIWS click Reboot Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 383 Installing and operating AIWS Absence Handling Note The Absence List feature are not supported by the Avaya IP DECT system Remote Management Through the AIWS it is possible to establish a remote connection to a customer site This makes it possible to configure and maintain sites independent of distance To be able to connect remotely the remote management server in the AIWS has to be configured The helptext buttons in the GUI will give more information about each parameter setting 1 Click Configuration on the start page 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu on AIWS Configuration page 3 Select Remote Management in the left menu The Remote Management Server configuration page is opened Remote Management Server Remote connection E dit Open ports RE Serial port channel E 384 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Remote Management Remote connection 1 Click Edit for Remote Connection to set up the connection parameters Parameter notes Require user identificati
384. onfigure the 3725 3720 Telephone by inserting it into a Advanced Charger Rackmount Charger or directly over the air OTA The charger is connected via USB or ethernet to Portable Device Manager PDM or Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS In the case of IP DECT it is possible to configure over the air Note It s recommended to place the handset in idle state in the advanced charger otherwise you might get synchronization issues between handset and device manager Note Uploading a language file phonebook file or a software download is not possible for 3720 Telephone while in a call Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 145 Configuring Avaya 3725 3720 telephones PDM PDM runs on a PC The telephone is configured via PDM as follows e Connect a Advanced Charger or a Rackmount Charger via USB to the computer running PDM e Start PDM e Place the telephone in a charger that is connected to PDM For instructions on how to use PDM see Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM on page 239 AIWS Avaya In Building Wireless Server The AIWS is run on an Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware For instructions on how to use AIWS see Installing and operating AIWS on page 289 Via charger e Connect a Advanced Charger or a Rackmount Charger via the Ethernet port to your network The charger is by default configured to connect to the network using DHCP If DHCP is not used in
385. onnects AUX Input and AUX Output For connection of 10baseT or 100baseT Ethernet TCP IP network For internal use only For connection of A or B bus from System 900 when modular system bus cable is not used Jumper points and push buttons J1 J4 J15 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 SW4 Switches SW2 SW3 Jumper that activates the backup battery Jumper pin 2 3 to activate For grounding and production test Jumper that determines if the Error relay output should be active when the relay operates or is released Normally set to 1 2 to select operating Jumper points for selection of A or B bus For internal use only Jumper points used when Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware controls the communication on the A B bus Reset button for CPU Module address selector switch for A or B bus If the setting of SW2 is changed the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware detects this automatically and will reconnect to the System 900 with the new address it takes approximately 30 s Selector switch for operating mode Module key and Backup battery IC1 CPU 424 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 IC2 IC24 BAT1 LEDs LED1 LED2 LED5 LED6 LED7 General Information On board flash memory used for software reboot Module key Backup battery Function indicator with green orange and red indication Application dependent functionality See documentation on the application for description Communication on the Et
386. or a description of each log see the table below Setting Description TCP Logs generated upon TCP connection set ups in the H 225 H 245 protocol DECT Master Logs generated by the DECT Master software component in the IPBS DECT Radio Logs generated by the DECT Radio software component in the IPBS H 323 Registrations Logs generated upon RAS registration Config Changes Logs generated upon configuration changes in the IPBS or the IP DECT system DECT Stack A low level DECT log intended for support departments 1 Select Diagnostics gt Logging 2 Select which logs to generate by marking the check box next to the log name 3 Click OK 4 View the logs by clicking the syslog link The logs are updated in real time Tracing The information gathered from the trace functionality is mainly used for troubleshooting in case of failure in the system The trace information is intended for the support departments It is possible to trace traffic information on the LAN for troubleshooting purposes 1 Select the Enable check box in the Remote PCAP section to enable the use of a network protocol analyzer program for example Wireshark The Trace check box in the Remote PCAP section is mainly used by the R amp D department to follow the desired network attributes Select the TCP UDP Traffic check box in the IP section to capture traffic information Click OK Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenan
387. ord protection of Netpage see Password Protected Access to NetPage on page 400 Different levels of password policy can be set in AIWS see Password policy on page 306 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 305 Installing and operating AIWS Functionality matrix The following matrix shows which functionality that can be used by the different authentication levels anonymous user admin sysadmin auditor Send messages Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Phonebook administration No Yes Yes Yes No View configuration settings No No Yes Yes Yes AIWS configuration No No Yes Yes No Access to the Setup Wizard and the Device Manager Change passwords No No Yes Yes No Note admin cannot set password for syadmin Set passwords It is 1 2 possible to set passwords for the different users via the Advanced Configuration page Click Configuration on the start page The Configuration page appears Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu in the AIWS Configuration page The Advanced Configuration page appears Under Security click Change Passwords The Change Passwords page appears Select user The Change password page appears Change password Click Ch Passwd Password policy The 1 2 3 4 required password complexity can be set in AIWS follow this instruction Login to AIWS Click on Configuration In the left pane select Other Settings gt Advanced Configur
388. orrect software versions installed contact your system administrator To install the PDM you must have administrator rights on the computer Contact your system administrator if you are not able to install the PDM Firewall issues Windows Firewall may alert you of PMServer CuspCsi UspCsi CuspSerialCSI and MwpCsi These alerts will not affect the PDM but you can select Continue blocking or Unblock to avoid further alerts No Indication of connected Device If a device does not show up in PDM make sure the device is properly connected or try disconnecting and reconnecting the device If a connected Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger does not show up as connected in the Devices view the USB port may not be configured correctly Open Windows Control Panel gt System Select the Hardware tab and then select Device Manager If the device does not show up in the list as a USB port check the connection and reinstall the drivers and or software for the device see Software Installation on page 244 The USB driver can also be installed separately and can be found on the PDM installation in the USB driver folder Software in Device Not Recognised Synchronization Fails A device might have software with a parameter set that is newer than the version recognised by the PDM The PDM will then be unable to send parameters to the device The icon a red broken arrow in the Parameters column for the selected device indicates that
389. ors can only administer users They can view but not create or manage other user administrator accounts Login as User Administrator To login as a user administrator 1 Follow Access the GUI on page 73 and access the device using a web browser 2 Click the link labelled User Administration A login window is opened Enter user name and password for a user administrator Click OK to login Click the show link Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 77 Installing and operating IPBS 6 The User Administration page is displayed See the figure below for a sample Figure 21 User Administration Page Sample Users Anonymous UserAdmin2 User Administrators show Long Name Name UserAdmin UserAdmin UserAdmin2 UserAdmin2 new User Administrators 2 m Users Long Name Name No Fty Display IPEI AC Registration First Last Name Name 1234 Display Name Not Subscribed User 2 User2 1235 User 2 Not Subscribed Users 2 Registrations 0 The right side of the page consists of two list sections e User Administrators in the upper right section Note This section is read only since a user administrator cannot manage other user administrators See Managing User Administrators on page 81 e Users in the lower right section Refer to Add Users on page 87 System Administrators IPBS devices are factory delived with a default system administrator account Login as System Adminis
390. orted Format Comment 4631559300 E 164 international standard and E 123 031 559300 E 123 local number 46 031 559300 National prefix national destination code in parentheses 46 0 31559300 National prefix in parentheses 46 31 559300 Canonical address format 4631551234 Digits only Conversion is controlled by setting maximum lengths of internal and global numbers Examples The following figure shows the elements of a telephone number 46 31 551234 in canonical format used in the parameter descriptions below Figure 129 Example of how a telephone number is built up from different prefixes and extensions 46 31 55 1234 Country Code N Extension National PBX Destination Prefix Code Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 365 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 130 Example of a digit treatment setting for Location former IP region Country Code National Destination Code International Prefix National Prefix External Line Prefix PBX First Prefix PBX Second Prefix Maximum size of internal phone numbers Minimum size of global phone numbers IP Region name Factory E regionid 46 31 00 0 ra 55 156 4 E BERERE 91 Activate The following examples illustrates how digit treatment works in different queries The queries are considered to be done from within 463155xxxx local exchange see also figure 130 a
391. orting a template the new template is imported and the old template is deleted If there is a Number conflict when importing Numbers an error message is displayed Export Numbers to a File 352 It is possible to configure Numbers for a site and export the settings to a file One or several Numbers can be selected The exported file can then be used when producing new devices for the customer 1 2 3 Select the Numbers tab The Numbers view appears Select the Number or Numbers In the Number menu click Export The Export Numbers dialog appears By default the file will be saved in the My documents directory with the name EliseSite xcp You can select another name and directory Click Save Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Export Templates to a File It is possible to export templates to a file One or several templates can be selected 1 2 3 Select the Templates tab The Templates view appears Select the template or templates In the Template menu click Export The Export Templates dialog appears By default the file will be saved in the My documents directory with the name Templates tpl You can select another name and directory Click Save Import Numbers 1 2 3 4 In the File menu click Import gt Numbers A File Browser window appears Select the Number files to be imported xcp Click Open The Number s will be imported Impor
392. ote This chapter describes settings in parameter definition files def These files are regularly updated and settings may change slightly For example On to Enable or a parameter can be moved to another directory Voice Mail In some systems it is needed to assign the telephone number of the Voice Mail service The parameter can be set specifically for each PBX subscription on the telephone and is accessed from Systems gt System x gt PBX Settings gt Numbers System x is replaced with the subscription System A System H that is configured Central Phonebook If the system is equipped with a messaging server with a phonebook service the Central Phonebook on that server can accessed from the telephone The number to be used is set to default 999999 It can be changed by editing parameters in a Number or a template If the system is not equipped with a Central Phonebook this menu option can be removed from the telephone by entering an empty value for the corresponding parameter The parameter can be set specifically for each PBX subscription on the telephone and is accessed from Systems gt System x gt PBX Settings gt Numbers System x is replaced with the subscription System A System H that you are configuring Company Phonebook It is possible to create a phonebook that is administered centrally and uploaded to the telephone from PDM AIWS If this feature is used entries from Contacts and Company Phonebook
393. outside the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Check the other System 900 units according to document System Installation On site Paging System TD 90227GB or contact your dealer 2 Open the administrator page in a browser and navigate to Troubleshoot Use the information log and tools given to test that Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is functioning properly Replace the cover When all other units are installed perform the system test described in System Installation On site Paging System TD 90227GB Clock Synchronisation and Time Settings The clock in different Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware s can be set from the web browser A bus i e Central Unit in System 900 or a time server To be able to synchronize the clocks in different Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware s a time server has to be used Depending on software application and licence an Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware can be used as time server An external time server supporting the Network Time Protocol NTP can also be used Normally the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware that is used as time server synchronizes with an external time server and then all other Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware use that Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware as the time server To select time source do as follows 1 Open the administration pages of the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware by entering XXX XXX XXX XxXxX admin in the address field in the web browser 2 Click on Settings in the left menu 3
394. over cable if connected directly to a PC e Use an ordinary cable straight through pinouts if connected to the LAN Supply voltage in LAN or PC Aaaa AAAA AAAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAAA A AAAA AAAA AAAA AAAA SAAANA Function indicator Figure 2 Function Indicator Figure 2 shows the function indicator and different status Note If a DECT Exchange is selected in the wizard as wireless phone system but not yet connected the Starting up status will be indicated until connected LED Indication Status OK Running orange MANNY starting up aca IN 8 g Restart SLR ARR hicence error Lo tach segment t00ms_ Y Starting up mode is indicated during start of applications or if an application has lost gt connection to a required resource for example DECT Exchange Module key number Figure 3 shows where to find the module key number on IC24 SOON Operation switches SW2 and SW3 Figure 4 Q1 Figure 4 shows the placement of SW2 and SW3 and A ON OFF positions SW ON 2 EEEE Ni SW3 PEE EEE M0276300 Ver E June 2008 414 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Keyboard Shortcuts Device Manager Keyboard Shortcuts The following table shows the shortcuts that can be used in the Device Manager General Shortcut Description Ctrl H Open the File handli
395. page 155 or Replacement of the telephone with the PDM on page 157 Easy Replacement The easy replacement procedure is done via the telephone display and does not involve a PDM AIWS Instead a Advanced Charger or a Rackmount Charger is used The following settings are replaced during easy replacement e DECT registration e User parameters including User ID e Contacts The following settings are not replaced e Call list e Messages e Bluetooth pairing list Note Both the old telephone and the new telephone must be of the same model 3725 or 3720 The same extension number is assigned to the new telephone Note If you are using the Rack Charger the same charging slot has to be used for both telephones Currently only the left charging slot is activated for easy replacement Easy Replacement procedure During the Easy Replacement procedure the LEDs of the telephone and the charger follow the same LED indications This means that if the old telephone has a broken display the LED indications on the charger and on the telephone can be used to follow the replacement procedure Before and after easy replacement the LEDs may have different LED indications For more details see also LED indications on page 172 Note It is recommended to make sure that the telephone batteries are charged before starting the easy replacement procedure Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 153 Configuring Av
396. ployment for the IP DECT System 27 Avaya IP DECT System Components o eae 27 DECT Cordless telephoneS 27 AI 27 Communication Manager o ca aoe area dadia a 27 Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS 28 System Capacity e iris 28 Planning an IP DECT System 31 INTTOUCION coe cerada a RR RE AR ee A 31 Wired LAN Backbone Requirement o eee ee 32 End toEnd DOS israel ARA ARA AAA 32 Base Station Planning lt lt 2 60 005 nera ww we 33 Client s Requirements ee 34 Base Station Coverage 2 2 2 2 ee ee 35 Architecture 2554 5 lt lt roses A EA 35 Building Elements s e ic ra A AAA 36 Special Areas 626 ge ak De we AAA 38 Metal Halls c c e ia Se ee A ARA GO a 40 Determine the Average Cell Size lt lt 43 Traffic Capacity of the System o o 45 Traffic Capacity of the Base Stations 46 Location of the Base Stations lt lt 47 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 5 Contents SOON 6 6 2444 a6 HS EEO AAA LAN ACCESS ii cee chee hee ce ie ee ee ke he ee Sa Power the Base Stations o ea ee a A AE Base Station Planning Tips lt lt lt lt lt oocsras ss Making a Base Station Plan
397. port Layer Security TLS TLS 1 0 is based on SSL 3 0 3 1 This document hereafter uses the term TLS TLS is a security mechanism based on cryptography see Cryptography and is used for encrypting communications between users and TLS based Websites The encryption prevents eavesdropping and tampering with any transmitted data TLS operates on the OSI Model Level 5 and uses PKI see Public Key Infrastructure Public Key Infrastructure Public Key Infrastructure PKI is a component of Public Key Chryptography PKC that uses e Public Key Certificates see Public Key Certificates Digital Certificates e Certificate Authorities see Certificate Authorities 60 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 IP Security Public Key Certificates Digital Certificates Public Key Certificates are used for key exchange and authentication They are simply electronic documents files that incorporate a digital signature to bind together a public key with an identity information such as the name or a person or organization their address and so forth The signature may be signed by a trusted entity called a Certificate Authority CA see Certificate Authorities The most common use of public key certificates is for TLS certificates https websites Certificate Authorities A Certificate Authority or Certification Authority CA is a trusted entity which issues public key certificates The certificates contain a public ke
398. r Introduction This chapter describes how to install configure and operate the Multiple Battery Charger It charges batteries for the Avaya DECT Telephones Each Multiple Battery Charger charges six batteries simultaneously Figure 40 Multiple Battery Charger Multiple Battery Charger can be serially connected with up to four Battery Pack Chargers connected to the same power source This chapter is intended as a guide for installation and troubleshooting purposes Power Supply for Multiple Battery Charger Supply voltage 100 240 VAC 0 7 A 50 60 Hz Building fuse for fixed installation 10A Installation alternatives e The CR4 as delivered can be installed as a single unit When installed as a single unit the power cord with the C14 connector may be used with a suitable extension cord to be plugged into a wall outlet Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 207 Installing Multiple Battery Charger e f more than one CR4 is used in a serial configuration a fixed installation must be made For safety reasons it is not allowed to supply more than one unit by the power cord with the C14 connector When units are supplied in series the installation must be made by an authorized electrician and the C14 connectors must be removed Maximum five units may be connected in serial power supply In Sweden Norway and Finland a connection to protective earth safety grounding must be provided Safety
399. r address field to access the GUI 5 After the first startup of the IPBS the DHCP mode should be changed from automatic to either client or off see Set DHCP Mode on page 102 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 75 Installing and operating IPBS Change the Default Password 1 Enter the IP address determined in Determine the IP Address in the web browser address field Select General gt Admin Enter user name and password in the dialogue box Default user name is admin Default password is changeme Enter a user name in the User Name text field Enter a password in the Password text field Repeat the password in the second text field Click OK GUI Web Access Login Page When accessing IPBS through a web browser the initial page is the login page This page has two hyperlinks System Administration and User Administration Note Logging out of the IPBS application is done by closing the Internet Explorer to be completely logged out Access Levels Three types of web users or Access Levels are authorized to access IPBS e Auditors e User Administrators e System Administrators The different types of access levels are described in the following table Access Level Authorization Login Described in hyperlink on section login page 1 Auditors e Read access to device parameter System Auditors on settings Administration page 77 e Can generate Service Reports 76 A
400. r used for the telephone subscription 4 Perform an over air subscription using the individual authentication code For information on how this is done see the reference guide of the telephone 5 Click OK Logout Login Users This section describes how to logout and login users to the IP DECT system For example when using a shared Portable Device for shift workers Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 89 Installing and operating IPBS Logout Users Logout the Portable Device for any subscribed user in the system by calling the supplementary services feature for logout see 7 5 8 Configure Supplementary Services on page 52 amp optional individual AC code and hang up Example where 11 is the feature for logout and 1234 is the AC code 11 1234 Login Users To login a user see Assign Cordless Telephones to Users on page 88 Operation This section describes the settings in the Configuration and Administration menu each subsection represents a sub menu to the Configuration and Administration menu Some changes require a reset in order to take effect It is possible to do several changes before resetting the IPBS General This section describes how to do the following configurations and settings e Change User Name and Password e Name the equipment e Configure automatic firmware update e Configure the NTP settings e Configure Logging e Configure the HTTP settings 90 Avaya DECT
401. rator is enabled it vibrates after the last beep The telephone is out of coverage or faulty telephone The beeps can be stopped with the mute button Note When re entering the coverage area it can take a couple of minutes before the telephone automatically has registered into the system Name and number information of the other party not correctly shown in the display during a call Wrong display format configured in Communication Manager Go to Communication Manager station form and check if length of display is configured to 16x2 System busy The IPBS you are connected to has reached its limited number of active calls Change place to get connected to the next available IPBS SERVICE NEEDED Parameters corrupt Note This display message is only shown in English Faulty telephone Select the reset option on the middle soft key if available Upgrade the telephone s software to version 3 0 0 or greater If the problem persists send the telephone for service 502 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya 3720 3725 DECT Telephones Display shows Probable cause Action or comment PBX out of service 1 Handset can t do calls Trunk configuration in IPBS Master is faulty or configured trunk on Communication Manager is down 2 Handset can do calls and trunk IPBS Master is active check on IPBS Master gt Dect gt trunk
402. re X can be Messaging Favourites etc The parameters are found under X The settings for the parameters may have three alternatives such as e Show e Hide all e Hide admin All settings can be viewed but not modified by the telephone user Clear Lists when inserted in Charger The telephone can be configured to clear lists when placed in a charger The following lists will then be cleared e Inbox only 3725 e Unsent only 3725 e Sent only 3725 e Call list e Missed calls 164 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Telephone Configuration Note Both call lists and message lists will be cleared Using the PDM AIWS and the Edit template feature the parameter can be found at Connections gt In_Charger gt Clear_Lists_In_Charger in a template or parameter definition file def The default setting for Clear list in charger is Off The feature is activated by changing the parameter value to On When the feature is enabled the lists are cleared when the telephone is placed in the charger Disable Homebase GAP Registration This shall not be activated if the telephone is used in an Integral 5 system When the feature is enabled it is not possible to register to a home base Using the Edit template feature in the PDM AIWS the parameter can be found at Systems gt Home_Base_Subscription The parameter shall be set to Enable for registration of a new base station The default value is Disab
403. re not included supports FTPES Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 399 Installing and operating AIWS Inserting a Company Logotype In the default GUI a company logotype can be inserted for example in a separate table above the NetPage application In the examples index1 index2 and index3 the company logotype can be inserted in any of the empty table cells of the NetPage application Password Protected Access to NetPage If access to NetPage has to be password protected do as follows 1 Log on to AIWS with an FTP client When secure mode is enabled see Web access security settings on page 307 only secure access via HTTPS and FTPES is allowed HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS and FTP access is not allowed The FileZilla Client freeware not included supports FTPES Log on with ftpuser The default password is changemetoo 2 Change the name of the file htaccess to htaccess a point is added in front of the name With this modification one has to log on with the user name user to get access to NetPage The default password is password When secure mode is enabled see Web access security settings on page 307 only secure access via HTTPS and FTPES is allowed HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS and FTP access is not allowed The FileZilla Client freeware not included supports FTPES Accessing NetPage from a Cordless Unit with WAP NetPage can be accessed fr
404. re 1 IP DECT System Overview Poo Pog CM PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network AIWS LAN IPBS 001 Supported Standards e H 323 XMobile e G 711 a law and mu law e G723 53 e G726 32 e G729 A AB System Functions The Avaya IP DECT system is designed to enable voice traffic messaging and alarm handling between cordless telephones within an enterprise LAN For details see the Function Description Avaya IP DECT System 18 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya IP DECT System Overview DECT Functions DECT is a digital wireless technology which originated in Europe but is now being adopted increasingly worldwide for cordless telephones wireless offices and even wireless telephone lines to the home DECT has been designed and specified to interwork with many other types of network such as the PSTN ISDN and GSM Common IP DECT functions are handled entirely within the IP DECT system Roaming and Handover The IP DECT system supports roaming between all IPBSs in the system It also supports handover if there is overlapping speech coverage LAN WAN There are several vendors providing components needed to deploy a LAN WAN In order to achieve optimal performance for IP DECT the following is recommended e Quality of Service QoS e The infrastructure should be connected to a switched network i e hubs or repeaters
405. receive html includes the NetPage message history applet See figure 154 on page 398 for an overview of where the different files are used 396 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Language and User Interface Start Page 1 5 Download copy the file and included image from the FTP area refer to Files for Translation Editing on page 391 Open the file in a text or HTML editor and translate all words Save the file Upload paste the file to the FTP area refer to Upload the Files to the AIWS FTP Area on page 399 Check that the user interface looks all right Example User Interfaces index1 index2 or index3 1 5 Download copy the file and included images from the FTP area refer to Files for Translation Editing on page 391 Open the file in a text or HTML editor and translate all words and immediate status texts For existing immediate status texts see table below Save the file Upload paste the file to the FTP area refer to Upload the Files to the AIWS FTP Area on page 399 Check that the user interface looks all right The following immediate status texts must be translated Exchange the English text with your translation Keep the code 20 30 etc unchanged 20 30 31 40 nst nlc sto sns Message accepted Memory full in message service Message deleted due to time out Message not sent invalid Call ID Message not sent Message ca
406. rial power supply connection is not allowed e When using a fixed connection up to five Multiple Battery Charger or Rackmount Charger can be serially connected to the same AC connection e If the Multiple Battery Charger is connected to a power supply via an AC wall plug the socket outlet shall be situated near the equipment and shall be easily accessible e Ifthe Multiple Battery Charger is connected to a power supply via a fixed connection a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the building installation wiring Delivery includes e Battery Pack Charger e Power supply cord including IEC C14 connector male e Inlet accessory kit including cable support holders and screws Note An extension cord IEC C13 AC connector female IEC60320 C 13 to wall socket has to be ordered separately It shall be connected between the pre installed IEC C14 AC connector male and the wall socket Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 211 Installing Multiple Battery Charger Required Tools etc e Screwdrivers e Cutting pliers e Multimeter e Screws and wall plugs for wall mounting Make sure the screws and wall plugs have the correct length for the type of wall used See example below Wall material Plug length Screw diameter Single plasterboard Thorsman TP1 3 5 5mm Double plasterboard Thorsman TP2 3 5 5mm Concrete Thorsman TP2 3 5 5mm Examples of Ways to Mount the Battery Pack Chargers The fol
407. rial Bus a serial bus standard to interface devices for example connect computer peripherals such as mice keyboards scanners etc User ID identifies the set of user parameters possible to save and administrate via PDM It can be moved together with user parameters between telephones It is normally set automatically at DECT subscription to be equal to call number Voice over IP Voice over Wireless Fidelity is a wireless version of VolP and refers to IEEE 802 11a 802 11b or 802 11g network WiFi stands for Wireless Fidelity and is a term developed by the Wi Fi Alliance to describe wireless local area network WLAN products that are based on the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE 802 11 standards Today most people use WiFi as a reference to wireless connectivity see AIWS 522 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Related Documents User Manual Avaya 3725 DECT Telephone 21 603358 User Manual Avaya 3720 DECT Telephone 21 603360 Function Description IP DECT System for Avaya 21 603368 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 WSM 523 WSM 524 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Index A Absence Handling 04 384 Assign a Number 44 267 341 Associate a Number aooo a a 337 Audio adjustment o oo oa a 167 Authentication Levels 305 C Character
408. rming that the module is working properly again It is also possible to delete the fault in the list by clicking the delete symbol Note If the IP address or licence is changed in AIWS the faults reported for the previous IP address licence will remain since no confirmation can be received These faults must be manually deleted The active faults list page has to be manually updated by clicking the Update Page link uppermost on the page On this page the error relay can be reset See also Function Indicator and Error Relay Output on page 417 and Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 421 Module Fault List There is a list of all possible module faults which shows codes and statuses etc for AIWS 1 Click Configuration on the start page 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu on the AIWS Configuration page 3 Click the Troubleshoot button and select Module Fault List in the left menu to open the list In the Module Fault list page it is possible to change settings on which level to use 370 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration Figure 132 Part of the Module Fault list page 3 3 8 10 3 10 12 3 21 12 3 22 11 3 28 Code 7 3 15 Fault Log Module Supervisor Status Start of module Reoccurring application failure Application restarted Module key failure Module running in unlicensed mode All applications stopped
409. roup needs to have the node name of the Master IPBS as Far end Node Name There is a strong linkage between the signaling group and the related trunk group When creating the signaling group before the trunk group is available the fields Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Channel Selection and X Mobility Wireless Type have to be left blank After the trunk group is created change the Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Channel Selection to the number of the new trunk group and X Mobility Wireless Type 184 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide should be DECT The Near end Listen Port needs to match the Master IPBS IP Trunk setting CS Port The Far end Listen Port needs to match the Master IPBS Trunk setting Local Port Max number of NCA TSC and Max number of CA TSC should be set to 1 or higher The Enable Layer 3 Test should be set to y for IP trunk supervision For Communication Manager 4 display signaling group 9 Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 9 Group Type h 323 Remote Office n Max number of NCA TSC 1 SBS n Max number of CA TSC 1 IP Video n Trunk Group for NCA TSC 9 Trunk Group for Channel Selection 9 X Mobility Wireless Type DECT TSC Supplementary Service Protocol a Network Call Transfer 1 T303 Timer sec 10 Near end Node Name procr Far end Node Name Master IPBS 110 Near end Listen Port 6000 Far end Listen Port 6000 Far end Network Region 1 LRO Require
410. rowser has to meet the following requirements e HTTPS TLS1 Note The IPBS is using HTTPS TLS 1 0 as default configuration So TLS 1 0 needs to be selected in the menu Extras gt Internet properties gt Advanced of the Internet Explorer TLS 1 0 is disabled by default in IE 6 0 e HTTP 1 1 protocol e HTML 4 0 protocol e XML XSL Version 1 0 The GUI has been tested with Internet Explorer 6 x but can also be operated with other browsers in compliance with the requirements above Access the GUI The GUI interface is accessed through a standard web browser It is possible to use the name ipbs xx xx xx where xx xx xx is the end of the MAC address It is also accessed by entering http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the browser address field In this address xxx xxx xxx xxx Should be replaced with the IP address determined in Determine the IP Address on page 74 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 73 Installing and operating IPBS Access the GUI and change the default password as described in Change the Default Password on page 76 Determine the IP Address The factory setting of the DHCP mode for the LAN port is automatic at first power up it will act as a DHCP client If the network has a DHCP server it will assign an IP address to the IPBS If there is no DHCP server in the network the IPBS can be assigned a predefined IP address Note After the first startup the DHCP mode should be changed from aut
411. rt A File Browser window Import site opens Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 257 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM 3 Find and select the Site file ste to be imported Click Open 4 The Input dialogue opens Figure 68 Input dialogue Enter a new site name Enter a name for the new site Click OK The site is imported to PDM Click Close oN o o Export a Site In the File menu click Site Management The Site Management dialogue opens Select the site to be exported Click Export A File Browser window opens Select a file name of the site ste and where to save the file Click Save The file is saved and the File Browser window closes Click Close oe 2 A M A Numbers Create New Numbers 1 Select the Numbers tab 2 From the Number menu click New Alternatively right click in the Numbers list and select New The New Numbers dialogue appears Select device type in the Device type list Select the parameter version in the Parameter version list All parameters except Number specific parameters will be set to their default values 258 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 8 Operation Select which template to run on the Number This is optional and therefore None can be selected If the Numbers need a prefix add this in the Prefix text box If you want to create a single Number select the Sing
412. rt the new telephone into a desktop charger or rack charger connected to the PDM 2 A pop up dialogue appears asking the user to decide whether to use the Number settings in PDM or the Number settings in the device Select PDM The telephone will automatically be synchronized and all data and parameter settings will be transferred to the new telephone The synchronization will take a while if the Contacts in the original telephone contains a large number of contacts Note This scenario is valid for Avaya Integral Enterprise and IP DECT If subscribing towards other systems follow Scenario 2 Note The telephone to be installed must not have any previous valid registrations Unsubscribe telephone or use Scenario 2 Telephone replacement with PDM Scenario 2 1 Insert the new telephone into an Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger connected to the PDM 2 A pop up will be displayed Select the option Associate with number Follow the instructions and select the number of the old telephone see Associate a Number with a Device on page 262 3 The telephone will automatically be synchronized and all data and parameter settings will be transferred to the new telephone The synchronization will take a while if the Contacts in the original telephone contains large number of contacts 4 Subscribe the new telephone 158 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Telephone Configuration Telephone Configuration N
413. rted Advanced parameters include e Extended Activity Log N A e Broadcast Specifies whether broadcast messaging is allowed or not Only IP DECT systems can handle broadcast all other systems will ignore the parameter e Set time in DECT N A e Priority conversion Used to convert messaging priorities Alarm High Normal and Low This conversion is normally only used for compatibility with some PWT telephones and should never be enabled unless you are absolutely sure 356 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 DECT Interface e DECT Interface This parameter makes it possible to disable the DECT Interface on AIWS When the DECT interface is disabled messaging is not supported and lost link to DECT system will not be indicated In multiple AIWS configurations the DECT interface should be disabled on the the AIWS devices The DECT interface is not used to connect to the Master Base Stations e IM update status handling e No of included 9dLD locations Only valid in combination with Ascom messaging system System Dependent Settings Which parameters that can be changed is dependent on the Cordless Telephone System that AIWS is connected to To find IP DECT settings do as follows 1 On the AIWS start page select Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page opens 3 On the AIWS Advanced Configuration page s
414. rtificates to AIWS These certificates may be created by a system administrator with IT security responsibility AIWS uses PKCS 12 files which include keys and certificates For instructions on how to import a PKCS 12 file follow this instruction 1 On the AIWS start page click on Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens 2 Inthe left pane click Other settings gt Advanced configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page opens 3 Inthe left pane under Certificates click on Import The Certificates Import page opens Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 309 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 98 The Certificates Import page Certificates Import Import PKCS 12 file Import a PKCS 12 file received from the IT security responsible Please note that the web server will be restarted automatically Filename EN Password EN N EH e MA 4 On the Certificates Import page you can locate a certificate file Enter file name and a valid password The certificate is tied to a specific password which should be delivered with the file 5 Click Import file The file is imported to AIWS 6 Click Close You may have to ask the network administrator for PKCS 12 files When starting there may be a warning about the security certificate This warning can be ignored Create certificate It is possible to create certificates in AIWS For instructions on how to create a PKCS 12 file follow
415. ructures This causes interference which reduces the capacity and coverage range of the base station Walls Walls ceilings and floors have large impact of the coverage range different types of walls have different impact on the signal range For list of the most common types and the approximate range achieved through these materials see the table below 36 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Base Station Coverage Type Examples Range in meters Stud wall Plaster 30 60 Concrete 10 30 Reinforced Fire wall 0 10 concrete Stone brick 30 50 Metal A panel on brickwork 0 10 Wood 30 60 Wired glass Fire protection 0 10 Surface coated Only of importance for coverage outside if the 30 50 float glass base station is installed inside None Open plan office or outdoors 150 300 Note The values in this table are estimated values Furniture cupboards etc and the amount of movement in the area to be covered for example cranes in a production hall see also Metal Halls on page 40 are further factors that affect the coverage range Ceilings and Floors The difference between ceilings and floors compared to walls lies in the materials used Concrete and reinforced concrete are the main materials and it is important to determine the level of coverage of a base station on the floor above and below For normal concrete this coverage extends to a radius of approximately 15 20 metr
416. rval min text field 4 Click OK Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 91 Installing and operating IPBS The Current Update Serials section shows the values of the variables set after the last execution of the associated command Configure the NTP Settings Since the IPBS does not have a battery backed real time clock the internal time will be set to 0 00 hrs 1 1 1970 in the case of a restart In order to get the correct time in the system specify the IP address of a NTP time server The IPBS will synchronize its internal clock to the time server at startup and at the specified intervals The clock is for example used by the telephones and log files Figure 24 Configure NTP settings IP DECT Base Station Configuration Info Admin Update NTP Logging HTTP HTTP Client General LAN Time Server 172 20 10 135 172 20 10 135 IP LDAP Interval min 5 Timezone Europe Central European Time UTC 1 vw DECT String CET 1CEST 2 M3 5 0 2 M110 5 0 3 CET 1CEST 2 M3 5 0 2 M10 5 0 3 VoIP Last sync 23 10 2007 13 31 Administration Users Device Overview Traffic Backup Update Diagnostics Reset 03 1 Select General gt NTP 2 Enter the IP address to the NTP server 3 Enter a time interval in the Interval min text field 4 Select time zone in Time zone drop down list If the desired time zone is not in the list select Other and edit the String text field following the instructions
417. ry Trunks are automatically changing from Up mode to Active mode when the timer is elapsed Example If the timeout is set to 600 seconds it means that the system waits 600 seconds 10 minutes until it is automatically up and running again on active Primary Trunks This is the amount of time to fix any problems During the Supervision Timeout there is a continuous condition check of the trunk connection The timer states the time it must take until a successful connection is established in the system Enable the Radio If the IPBS not shall be used as a Radio for example only be used as a PARI Master it can be disabled by marking the checkbox Disable 1 Select DECT gt Radio 2 Clear the Disable box 3 To assign a PARI Master see Enter IP Address to the Pari Master on page 117 for explanation of PARI Master enter the name and password of the PARI Master to connect to If this is the PARI Master the internal name and password found under DECT gt System and the loopback address 127 0 0 1 should be used Enter IP Address to the Pari Master All IPBS need to know the IP address of the Pari Master 1 Select DECT gt Radio 2 Write the name for the Pari Master in the Name text field 3 Enter the password for the Pari Master in the Password text field 4 Enter the address to the Pari Master in the Pari Master IP Address text field If this is the Pari Master enter 127 0 0 1 Click OK Reset in order to make
418. s H Shortcuts H Audio Customization My Favourites Cancel 4 Select the parameters you want to be saved in the template by selecting the checkbox to the left of each parameter Change the parameters to the desired values Click OK Create a Parameter Template from a Number It is also possible to create a template from a Number in the Device Manager 1 Select the Numbers tab 2 Mark the Number you want to use 3 Right click on the Number and select Use as template The Enter template name dialogue opens Enter a name for the template Click OK 330 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager 6 The Edit template dialogue opens Continue with 4 to 6 in Create a Parameter Template on page 329 Note When the Edit template window is opened from the Use as template command an extra drop down list Select is shown in the bottom left corner This setting decides which parameters that shall be copied from the Number If All parameters is selected the synchronization time will be longer It is also possible to create a template from a portable that is online but not stored in the database The template will contain all parameters for the device except for those that are Number specific Rename a template Select the Templates tab Select the template you want to rename The selected row is highlighted In the Template menu select Rename or right click and select Re
419. s Q C Program Files ASAB Go Name Size Type Date Modified File and Folder Tasks drivers File Folder 2008 04 14 14 19 unite Host Router File Folder 2007 12 19 15 01 C Make a new folder Publish this Folder to the Web EZ Share this folder Other Places E Program Files S My Documents 5H My Computer J My Network Places Details Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 285 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM PDM Keyboard shortcuts The following table shows the keyboard shortcuts that can be used in PDM General Shortcut Description Ctrl H Opens the File management dialogue Ctrl Tab Switch tab Alt F4 Close the application Devices Shortcut Description Ctrl N Add a new device Enter Upgrade the selected device s Delete Delete the selected device s Ctrl F Find a device Numbers Shortcut Description Ctrl N Add a new Number Enter Edit the selected Number Ctrl C Copy the selected Number F2 Rename the selected Number Ctrl S Save the selected Number to the database Delete Delete the selected Number from the database Ctrl F Find a Number 286 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 PDM Keyboard shortcuts Templates Shortcut Description Ctrl N Add a new template Enter Edit the selected template Ctrl C Copy the selected template F2 Rename the selected template Delete Delete the sele
420. s 0 5 years Power connected 10 years Battery life battery not connected Minimum 10 years Connection of Ethernet If Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is connected directly to a PC a crossover cable has to be used If Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is connected to a HUB an ordinary straight through pinouts cable has to be used The cable supplied is an ordinary cable Connect the Ethernet cable to connector J20 see figure 178 below It is recommended to break off a suitable section before inserting the Ethernet cable see Wiring Runs on page 431 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 443 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Figure 178 Connection of Ethernet cable s N y et a AE 1 7 1 1 1 027 Setup of Network Parameters 1 Set section one in SW3 to ON to set Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware in Network setup mode The remaining sections should be set to OFF Figure 179 Setting the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware in Network setup mode OFF ON 1 SW3 Aaa 8 o N o 2 Connect Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Ethernet connector J20 either e with crossover cable directly to a PC or e with ordinary straight through pinouts cable via a HUB on the LAN to the PC Observe that it has to be the same LAN e same Ethernet Broadcast Domain 3 Connect the power cable and wait until the Function Indicator indicates with steadily ora
421. s bin mod Communication Managerd UPO prot http 192 168 0 10 firm ireset 1 2 2 The command above determines if firmware 1 2 2 is already installed If not new firmware will be downloaded from http 192 168 0 10 firm ipbs bin the UPDATE PROT variable will be set to 1 1 2 and the device will be reset as soon as it is idle Similar to the prot command the boot command will update the boot code mod Communication Managerd UPO boot http 192 168 0 10 firm ireset 205 The command above determines if boot code 205 is already installed If not new boot code will be downloaded from http 192 168 0 10 firm boot_ipbs bin the UPDATE BOOT variable will be set to 205 and the device will be reset as soon as it is idle Using UPO device configurations can be saved to a web server mod Communication Managerd UPO scfg lt url gt 142 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 How to Use the Update Server This will cause the device to upload its current config to url This will be done using an HTTP PUT command url must be writable thus With url some meta character strings are replaces as follows Sequence Replacement Example d Current date and time 20040319 162544 m Prinmary device mac address 00 90 33 03 0d f0 h Device hardware ID ipbs 03 0d f0 Setting the RFP_UPDATEO Parameter To perform a RFP firmware update use the following commands mod Communication Managerd RFP_UPDATEO firmw
422. s for SMS 173 Charging e ea hos aR a A ad Pood a a 219 Gearissa t date se ic 164 Communication cable connection 232 Company Phonebook 159 Compliance 2 209 223 Configuration s eaa a aeaa a a 000 295 Customize GUI oao a 164 D database 239 289 Default Category o 378 description of selected parameter 259 334 Device Manager 322 DEVICES a a did wee oe hoe at 325 DAG Ps sa isc Gt Seca es aad on Oa nee a 233 Digit manipulation 364 DISK Status so ld A td RA oe ed 517 E Easy Replacement 0 153 203 Easyreplacement 195 Emergency Call Number 166 O EE A E E NE A ih fA 509 Error Relay ooa a 417 EU Compliance Elise 2 Server 422 F Factory reset o 152 FCC Compliance Elise 2 Server 422 File handling o 268 File types 418 Firewall coito a e Poa aa a aed Le 511 fre wall a A hd Sees 244 509 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide Index Function Indicator 2 ee ee el 417 G Glossary ita siora la oe HDA AE PS 519 H Headset configuration 2 2 ee ee 167 ICONS Lita dl ad dra des el 250 Import and Export o 276 Import Contacts ooo 264 Installation 211 2
423. s have been correctly programmed The test is performed by calling all cordless phone from one specific cordless phone 1 Put all cordless phone together in order of extension number on a table 2 Go off hook with each cordless phone and check that the dial tone is heard 3 Call with a cordless phone cordless phone A all other cordless phones sequentially and check that the cordless phone with the corresponding number on its display rings when called 4 Call cordless phone A and check if it rings 138 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting See Troubleshooting on page 495 How to Use the Update Server Summary Automatic update is based on configuration and firmware information stored on a standard web server and retrieved by the devices on a regular basis There are 2 modules in the device which work in tandem The first is known as UPO and actually executes the upload and download of configuration information as well as the download of updated firmware UPO is controlled by commands as described below The second module is known as UP1 It serves to poll a given website for changed configuration information If certain conditions are met UP1 will issue commands to UP1 to perform the requested updates UPO can also receive commands from the Update clients page of the PBX Administration user interface System Requirements One or more regular Web Server tha
424. s needed for Activity Logging 1 Click Configuration on the start page The Configuration page appears 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu in the AIWS Configuration page The Advanced Configuration page appears 3 Under Other click Logging The Log settings page appears Figure 141 The Log settings page Log settings EN Status Log System Activity Log View advanced parameters 4 Click Status Log System Activity Log or View Advanced parameters 5 In the selected log page enter settings Click Activate Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 379 Installing and operating AIWS Time Settings It is possible to select where to fetch the time from such as a web browser or a time server 1 Click Configuration on the start page The Configuration page appears 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration in the left menu in the AIWS Configuration page The Advanced Configuration page appears 3 Under Time click Settings The Time settings page appears Figure 142 The Time Settings page Time source Time server address Fault log Time zone Auto DST adjust Date format Date separator Time Format Time push time HH MM Only valid when Time server is selected Activate 3 Time settings Web browser v Previous Factory 0 0 0 0 No x GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Rome Stockholm v Yes
425. s only the parameters defining the Number PDM usage This section gives a short description to give a basic understanding on how to use the PDM with devices This description is intended to be used to get a basic understanding of the work flow and is not intended to be followed in work e Importa parameter definition file of the corresponding device type to PDM e Create a template from the parameter definition file e Add a device to PDM 242 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 PDM description e Create a new Number for the corresponding device type e Associate the Number with the device Refer to the following chapters mainly chapters Operation on page 248 and Administration on page 279 for a detailed description Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 243 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM Installation and Configuration Software Installation This section describes the installation procedure when installing from a CD Note Do not connect the hardware to the computer before installation 1 Close all running programs 2 Insert the PDM installation CD 3 Follow the instructions given by the setup program If the setup program does not start automatically it is possible to do one of the following e Right click on the CD drive in a file browser and select Install e Double click on the SETUP EXE file on the CD in a file browser Software Con
426. s operation of the system The main functionality is e On site and remote administration of cordless telephones and chargers e Parameter configuration and software download to cordless telephones and chargers e Parameter configuration and software download to chargers e Supervision of chargers e Central phonebook application for cordless telephones e Text messaging between cordless telephones Figure 85 AIWS in a system 3 DECT Telephones Chargers J amp gt AIWS provides a generic application for managing portable devices and chargers in wireless systems AIWS makes it possible to edit parameters and update software in the devices It saves parameters and software for all devices in a database All devices are updated remotely from AIWS Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 289 Installing and operating AIWS In IP DECT systems cordless telephones can be accessed by over the air administration that is configured in the IPBS Master by default In other systems for remote configuration the cordless telephones need to be plugged into an Advanced Charger or Rackmount Charger connected to the Ethernet AIWS also includes a phonebook which can be accessed from the telephones The number of entries in the phonebook depends on whether the internal database or an external database is used as phonebook source Additionally LDAP access to an existing company phonebock server is supported T
427. s used for login Enter a password Confirm the password Click OK View and Modify a User Administrator 1 2 3 Login as System Administrator see Login as System Administrator on page 78 Select Administration gt Users Click on show A two part list page is displayed At the top are the user administrator accounts and below the user administrators are the user accounts In the User Administrators section click on a hyperlink below the Long Name heading A detail window is opened Select Edit any of the following settings e Long Name Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 81 Installing and operating IPBS 6 e Name Note This field is used for login e Password e Confirm Password Click OK Delete a User Administrator 1 2 3 4 Login as System Administrator see Login as System Administrator on page 78 Select Administration gt Users Click on show In the User Administrators section click on a hyperlink below the Long Name heading A detail window details for is opened Click on Delete The User Administrator is deleted and the windows is closed Configure the Master This section describes how to configure the Master Each configuration step is briefly described in the step list below For more detailed information see the corresponding subsection in Operation on page 90 1 2 O NU OO gi e 10 11 Determine the address and access th
428. sable Automatically save new numbers 3 Click OK Close the Device Manager In the File menu click Exit The Device Manager shuts down 354 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 DECT Interface DECT Interface Cordless Telephone System IP DECT Single Master Figure 124 Redundancy achieved by connecting AIWS to two IP DECT base stations DECT IP Address a a WSM Secondary DECT IP Address EE 1 SoS Se ii it 1 IP DECT Master IP DECT Master aoe a ole ee dl AIWS can communicate with the IP DECT system over a LAN For configuration of the IP DECT system see Installing and operating IPBS on page 51 It is possible to set an address to a secondary IP DECT Standby Master which is used as a redundancy backup The secondary IP Address is used if the connection to the primary IP Address is lost If the secondary IP Address is lost AIWS will try to use the primary IP Address To enter IP DECT IP address settings do as follows 1 2 3 4 On the AIWS Start page click on Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard opens Click Next until you reach DECT IP Address Enter settings in the fields for DECT IP Address and Secondary DECT IP Address Set multiple Locations former IP regions to no IP DECT multi Master Base Station configuration For an IP DECT system with multiple Master Base Stations connected to a single AIWS the IP DECT interface settings needs to be changed In
429. ser density is added to secure the voice quality There are several things to consider when designing a network e In order to achieve optimal performance the infrastructure should be connected to a switched network no hubs or repeaters e When setting up a network supporting both voice and data it is recommended that voice and data are separated on different VLANs e Maximum capacity of the VoIP traffic may not exceed 25 of the capacity of the network e Maximum capacity of the network may not exceed 75 of the total capacity of the network including the VoIP traffic e No firewalls should be used in the network If they are anyway tunneling or application aware firewalls should be used e Depending on network size a backbone of at least 100 Mbps should be used In a switched network the transmission delay should not be an issue but if voice traffic is routed a significant transmission delay could be added If the transmission delay is too long an echo will appear in the voice path impacting the systems voice quality The transmission delay will also add to the speech delay Jitter in voice packages will also add to the speech delay since the portable will adjust the jitter buffer size Note There are several tools from third party vendors that is used to provide detailed and useful information when performing site surveys End to End QoS To achieve QoS for a phone call it is important that QoS is enabled or managed al
430. server in the TFTP server IP address field Enter the port number used by the TFTP server in the TFTP server port field Enter the external directory file path in the TFTP external directory file field Enter the internal directory file path in the TFTP internal directory file field Enter the TFTP synchronization interval in minutes in the TFTP synch interval field Click on Activate Figure 128 Example of TFTP settings Phonebook TFTP server IP address 172 20 13 190 TFTP server port 169 TFTP external directory file TFTP internal directory file lA nasystem dir_list nasystem user_list7 TFTP synch interval min 160 Activate UE Digit Treatment in Central Phonebook When importing telephone numbers it is sometimes necessary to automatically change the way a number is written according to preset conditions 364 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration Depending on where a number is situated the AIWS can alter the number that is returned in a phonebook query If for example the queried number is situated within the same local exchange the telephone number is considered to be an internal number and the number is stripped from superfluous international prefixes etc This feature is only used if LDAP is selected as database Telephone number standards There are several standardized ways of writing telephone numbers The following formats are currently supp
431. set 4 A message saying Do you want to reset the selected device s to factory defaults will appear 5 Click Yes File management This chapters covers the File management for parameter definition files software files language files and phonebook file Import and export of templates and numbers is described in Import and Export on page 352 Import of translation files is described in Import Translation files on page 390 342 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager The parameter definition file holds the definitions of all parameters for a specific version of a Number s parameter set Updated software and new parameter definition files for devices and Numbers can be added to the Device Manager see Import Parameter Definition Files on page 343 and Import new Software for Devices on page 345 If there is a naming conflict when importing a warning message is displayed Definition File Version Parameter Version Both definition files and device software include parameters and are indicated by a version number Note The version of the definition file matches the version of the device software If a device is updated with a new parameter version it does not always demand a new definition file An old definition file can often be used but if new parameters have been added in the new parameter version these parameters will not be editable The release note will tell you if a
432. settings Do not remove phone from charger appears The charger LED changes to slow orange flashing A Important Do not remove the telephone while the text Saving settings is displayed It may take several minutes A Important If the old telephone can not communicate with the charger due to any destroyed the LED will not change to slow orange It will remain at quick orange flashing As the easy handset replacement is already started with the new phone steps 1 3 it needs to be continued by placing a working phone into the charger Otherwise the new phone will not come back to operation and will need service too Any other phone of the same type for examle from a customer installation can be used to continue step 4 At the end of the replacement procedure the configuration of the old and new phone will be exchanged Starting the easy handset replacement again with the same both phones gives the option to exchange the configuration again So finally both phones will have the same configuration as they had before 154 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Maintenance 5 Remove the old telephone from the charger when the text Please insert new phone in charger appears in the display and the charger LED changes to quick orange flashing The old telephone is reset to factory settings and automatically restarted 6 Put the new telephone in the charger The text Restoring settings appears in the display T
433. settings for a specific device type A template can be applied to several Numbers of the same device type Tabs in the Device Manager there are three different views or tabs In these tabs the information for devices Numbers and templates are shown Some information is shown in two tabs Parameter definition file a file including all possible settings for a certain device type Templates are created from parameter definition files Software is the software used in devices The device software can be updated via AIWS Version parameter definition files and device software are indicated by versions Package file a file that can contain other files such as parameter definition files software files and template files Importing diffent types of files can be imported Note that if a software file should be imported it may have been delivered in a package file Associate before being able to synchronize parameters between AIWS and devices it is necessary to associate a Number with the device Association includes all parameters If it exists on that device type it also includes Contacts Assign it is possible to assign a Number to a device that has not yet been assigned a Number in the Device Manager Assign includes only the parameters defining the Number Device Manager usage This section gives a short description to give a basic understanding on how to use the Device Manager with devices This description is intended to be
434. since it is often configured as air synchronization master Make sure that the bandwidth between the master and the IP PBX is sufficient Finalizing the plan When all base station positions on the map are verified and the plan is found okay discuss with the client whether due to local traffic requirements extra base stations are needed in particular areas In that case integrate these base stations with the plan Thus a final base station planning is made and tested simultaneously 50 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installing and operating IPBS Introduction This chapter describes how to install and operate the following equipment e IP DECT Base Station IPBS The chapter is intended as a guide for installation troubleshooting and maintenance purposes and are relevant for the following personnel e System administrator e Service technician For information on the IP DECT system see System Description on page 17 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 51 Installing and operating IPBS Description This section gives a general description of the IP DECT Base Station and DECT Base Station IP DECT Base Station The following versions of the IPBS are available e IPBS with Internal antenna e IPBS with External antennas 52 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Description IP DECT Base Station with Internal Antenna Figure 12 IPBS Overview
435. sion of the parameters in the Number Upgrade status might show the following icons new software upgrade is in progress It is also possible to see a progress bar when the device is being upgraded software upgrade Pending Request sent or Accepted a green arrow software upgrade is Scheduled or Retrying Y gt the last software upgrade Failed or Aborted a red broken arrow device busy operation cannot be executed because handset is not in idle state Please bring handset back to idle state to start the operation Sometimes a restart of the PDM application is needed to get the proper status update for this handset Online shows if the device is connected to the PC running PDM The icon indicates a connected device Latest number shows the Number ID that the device had during its last login Figure 62 The Devices tab showing a list of devices in a system OurSite Ascom WinPDM File Device Options Help Devices Numbers Templates F amp E e Upgrade software Search for in Device ID v Show all Device types Desktop Charger Ad 2 0 Y A d62 lt 1 item selected Device ID Device type Software version Parameter version Upgr Online Latest 036470294566 d62 2 5 6 19 1 Y 250 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Numbers Tab Select the Numbers tab The view shows all Numbers configur
436. sition Set all switches and jumpers as they were on the original circuit board and replace the screw connectors Check installation according to Installation Test Procedure on page 445 452 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 LON Piggy Back Circuit Board LPB LON Piggy Back Circuit Board LPB BR IC1 IC9 o a n Connectors and Jumper Points 029 J1 Connection for the teleCARE M LON only use terminals 1 and 2 J2 Connector for In System Programming ISP of the flash micro controller J3 Male connector to be put on J9 on Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware circuit board Pin 12 cut off J4 Male connector to be put on J10 on Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware circuit board Push button SW1 For service Micro Controllers and others IC1 Flash memory IC3 Neuron micro controller IC9 PIC flash micro controller Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 453 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware LEDs LED1 LON Rx LED2 LON Tx LED3 See table for LED3 in Status Indication of LPB on page 454 LED4 Rx data transfer LEDS Tx data transfer LED6 See table for LED6 in Status Indication of LPB on page 454 Status Indication of LPB LED3 TEU raton merry OLEA rat onerar conos ARENA PTT unconigued neon No application no Neuron firmware Each segment 100 ms LED6 Status 2 Indication LED6 Fun
437. ss B EN61000 4 3 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 479 Technical Data Rackmount Charger Physical Dimensions x w x h 453 x 156 x 98 mm Weight 1 6 kg Material Case PC ABS Colour Light grey Functional Supply voltage 100 240 VAC 0 7 A 50 60 Hz Charge current 0 65 A Interfaces Ethernet Support data transfer rates up to 100 Mbps IEEE 802 3y standard USB USB specification 2 0 full speed Recommended cables not supplied by Avaya Environmental Power cord with IEC C13 connector Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C Storage temperature 20 C to 65 C Enclosure protection IP30 IEC EN60529 Immunity to electromagnetic fields 3 V m EN61000 4 3 Immunity to ESD 4 kV contact discharge and 8 kV air discharge EN61000 4 2 Compliance to European regulations and standards EU directives 2004 108 EC EMC Product marking CE Safety EN60950 1 EMC EN 55022 class B EN61000 4 3 480 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide Compliance to US regulations and standards 05 2010 Rackmount Charger Product marking 57 Safety UL 60950 1 EMC FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Compliance to Canadian regulations and standards Product marking Safety CSA 60950 1 EMC FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Compliance to Australian regulatio
438. ssaging Add Entry Manually Figure 104 The Edit Phonebook page Edit Phonebook Last Name First Name Number Add Delete all 1 Enter the following settings in the text fields Setting Description Last Name The family name First Name The first given name Number The phone number 2 To add several rows click Add again 3 Click Save Sorting of Phonebook The entries in the phonebook can be sorted on Last Name First Name or Number 1 On the start page click Phonebook The Edit Phonebook page appears 2 Select Phonebook gt Edit in the left menu 3 To sort the entries click on the arrows in the list s title bar The Edit Phonebook page can also be reached from the AIWS Configuration page via Other settings gt Advanced Configuration Delete a single entry Entries in the phonebook can be deleted in the following way 1 On the start page click Phonebook 2 Enter User name and Password and click OK 3 Inthe left pane click Phonebook and Edit The Edit Phonebook page appears see figure 104 on page 317 4 In the Edit Phonebook page locate the entry to be deleted Click the X button in the same row Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 317 Installing and operating AIWS 5 Click Save The entry is deleted Delete All All entries in the phonebook can be deleted by clicking the Delete All button 1 On the start page click Phonebook The Edit Phonebook page appears
439. ssary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the Technical Service Center at 1 800 242 2121 or contact your local Avaya representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information Installation and Repairs Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier It is recommended that repairs be performed by Avaya certi
440. stOffset EDT4 Summertime for the year 2006 begins at two o clock on a Sunday the first week in April M4 1 0 2 The summertime ends at two o clock on a Sunday the fifth week in October M10 5 0 2 lt String EST5EDT4 M4 1 0 2 M10 5 0 2 gt Example 2 Indian Standard Time IST is 5 30 hours ahead UTC StdOffset IST 5 30 India has no daylight saving time lt String IST 5 30 gt 6 Click OK Note If this value is removed or changed it takes up to 24 hours until this is reflected in the cordless telephone Switching a cordless telephone off and on the changes will take effect immediately Configure Logging There are three ways to collect logs see the table below TCP The syslog entries are transmitted using a TCP connection SYSLOG The entries are reported to a syslogd server in the network which is responsible for further evaluation or storage of the entries HTTP The syslog entries are transferred to a web server where they can be further processed Each individual syslog entry is transmitted as form data to the web server in HTTP GET format Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 93 Installing and operating IPBS Store the Syslog Entries using a TCP Connection 1 Select General gt Logging Select TCP in the Type drop down list Enter the IP address of the logging server in the Address text field Enter the Port of the logging server in the Port text field Click
441. stem On IPBS Master e In LDAP gt Server tab create user with write access 86 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Configuration On IPBS Master2 e In DECT gt System use same System name Password Subscription and Authentication settings as in IPBS Master 1 to get a common system e In DECT gt Radio use the same system name as in the DECT System e In DECT gt Master configure an individual Master ID for each IPBS Master in the range of 0 and 250 It is recommended to use Master ID 0 for IPBS Master1 which is the LDAP server of the IP DECT system All further IPBS Masters doing the LDAP replication should use a Master ID from 1 to 250 A standby Master needs to use the same Master ID as the corresponding IPBS Master e In DECT gt SARI do not configure any value The SARI is part of the IP DECT database and will be configured automatically when the LDAP replication will be enabled The same SARI value has to be used in each IPBS Master that is part of the common DECT system A Important Using a different SARI value will cause invalid subscriptions for all the subscribed devices Changing the SARI in one of the IPBS Masters will change the SARI on all other IPBS Masters using the same LDAP database as well e In DECT gt PARI you can use the same PARI value as used in IPBS Master1 if you do not have an overlapping Coverage area of the two locations If you have an overlapping covera
442. t Templates A template may be imported from another system Updated Template files may be distributed by your supplier 1 In the File menu click Import gt Templates A File Browser window appears 2 Select the Template files to be imported tpl 3 Click Open 4 The Template s will be imported Other Settings Autosave settings Normally when a device logs in it is automatically saved in the AIWS database and this is the default setting When a single AIWS for the device management is used the autosave function should normally be enabled if the number of devices is not higher than the maximum number of supported devices according to the license used Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 353 Installing and operating AIWS When multiple AIWS for the device management are used in a system the autosave function should normally be disabled If multiple device managers are used and the autosave function is enabled devices will be saved on all AlWSs running device management This will cause synchronization problems and the logged in devices will consume licence positions on each AIWS See also Multiple AIWS configuration on page 296 To disable automatic saving of new numbers 1 Inthe Options menu click Preferences The Preferences window appears Figure 123 The Preferences window O Proforonces Settings Automatically save new numbers 2 Inthe Preferences window di
443. t can be accessed by all devices are required This has been tested with Microsoft IIS and Apache but any regular Web Server should do For best results the Web Server should be able to maintain a large number of HTTP sessions simultaneously since potentially all devices may attempt a configuration update at the same time For example Microsoft s Personal Web Server is not adequate since it only support 10 simultaneous sessions Installation To be able to upload save device configuration information on the web server it must allow HTTP PUT requests All other functions require HTTP GET permissions only Since all HTTP requests are performed unauthenticated the website used must allow anonymous read and potentially write access You may want to restrict access to that site to certain network address ranges Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 139 Installing and operating IPBS Configure a Microsoft IIS URL to allow PUT commands 1 Create a directory where you want to save configurations to 2 Create a virtual directory in Microsoft s IIS manager 3 Select read and write access No installation is needed on the IPBSs Configuration See Configure Automatic Firmware Update on page 91 on how to configure the IPBSs for automatic update The URL parameter must point to the site where the file containing the maintenance commands is stored Note that in this URL no host names are supported The web servers
444. t have been changed in the device are uploaded to the Device Manager and parameters that have been changed in the Device Manager are sent to the device If a parameter has been changed in both the device and the Device Manager the setting made in the Device Manager will take precedence 1 When a device is connected to the system running the Device Manager and if the Number is saved and it has a parameter definition the device is automatically synchronized While synchronizing a progress bar and a text is shown in the Numbers view Note Due to hardware limitations in the 3720 telephone the device might be busy for parameter synchronisation e g during a call Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 339 Installing and operating AIWS Delete a Device 1 Select the Devices tab 2 Select the device you want to delete The selected row is highlighted 3 Inthe Devices menu select Delete or right click and select Delete 4 Click Yes in the Delete Device dialogue The dialogue closes and the device is deleted from the list Note You cannot delete a device that is online Replace a Device If a device shall be replaced with a new device it is possible to transfer its associated Number including settings to a new device The new device must be of the same device type as the old one 1 If the device to be replaced is still working make sure that it is synchronized 2 Shut off the old device or make a
445. t or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio tv technician for help Information to user This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference recieved including interference that may cause undesired operation IC Requirements for Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 59 Installing and operating IPBS Cet appareil num rique de la Classe B conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Modifications Any modifications not expressly approved by Avaya could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Exposure to radio frequency signals This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 Communication Manager from all persons and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter IP Security IP Security Terminology SSL TLS Note Secure Socket Layer SSL has been renamed Trans
446. t to mount them in a height that makes it easy to reach the cordless telephones and to read the cordless telephones display Measure and mark the drill holes by using the dimensions in figure 49 Drill and fasten the Rackmount Charger on the wall with four screws 226 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Figure 49 Mounting dimensions in mm Rackmount Charger seen from the back Electrical installation Power supply by Power cord to wall outlet The Rackmount Charger is delivered with a cord with an IEC C14 connector male An extension cord IEC C13 AC connector female IEC60320 C13 to wall socket has to be ordered separately It shall be connected between the pre installed AC connector male and the wall socket Figure 50 Multiple Battery Charger with pigtail connector Proceed with the Communication cable connection when required Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 227 Installing and operating the Rackmount Charger Installation test 1 Connect the mains power supply cord to the wall socket 2 The LED on the front of the charger shall now light up Power supply by fixed connection Note If the rack charger shall be connected with a fixed connection the AC connection must be done by a authorized electrician Tip It is possible to use any one of the two AC terminal blocks for AC input Consequently the unused terminal block may b
447. tallation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 337 Installing and operating AIWS Delete a Number in the Site Database 1 2 3 4 Select the Numbers tab Select the Number you want to delete The selected row is highlighted In the Number menu select Delete or right click and select Delete Click Yes in the Delete Number dialogue The dialogue closes and the Number is deleted from the list Rename a Number Select the Numbers tab Select the Number you want to rename The selected row is highlighted In the Number menu select Rename or right click and select Rename The Rename number dialogue opens In the Rename number dialogue enter a new Number in the New number text field Click OK The Rename number dialogue closes and the new Number appears in the list in the Numbers tab Copy a Number Devices Select the Numbers tab Select the Number you want to copy The selected row is highlighted In the Number menu select Copy or right click and select Copy The Copy Number dialogue opens In the Copy number dialogue enter a new Number in the New number text field Click OK The Copy number dialogue closes and the new Number appears in the list in the Numbers tab A device can be a DECT telephone a Rackmount Charger or an Advanced Charger developed to work together with the Device Manager See the user manual for respective portable All work with devices is performed from the Devices view Devices ca
448. tallation and configuration In order to simplify for example an installation on a site use the following steps 1 Install the PDM on your computer see Software Installation on page 244 2 Open and configure the PDM see Software Configuration on page 244 3 Create a template with settings common for all devices of a certain device type at the site see Create a Parameter Template on page 280 During system setup it is likely that the personnel doing the installation and configuration continues with the Administration tasks below to make the system fully functioning Administration These tasks are intended for administration This is the recommended order 1 Create new Numbers see Create New Numbers on page 258 and run the template on the Number s see Run a Template to Set Parameter Values on page 261 Make individual settings for each Number See Edit Parameters on page 259 If applicable switch on the devices Connect the devices one after the other and associate them with the Numbers Different devices have different ways of connecting See Associate a Number with a Device on page 262 Note The very first time a device is connected to the USB port the Found New Hardware wizard displays not for all computers Do the following Select No not this time and click Next twice More tasks are described in this document such as how to import different types of files Technical Solution The PDM s
449. tatus The following information can be checked e connections Total number of active connections to the LDAP server e write connections Number of write enabled connections e rx search Number of received search requests e rx modify Number of received change requests e rx add Number of added objects e rx del Number of deleted objects e rx abandon Number of lost connections e tx notify Number of sent change notifications e tx error Number of sent error notifications e tx error 49 Number of sent error notifications due to invalid credentials e tx error 50 Number of sent error notifiatiosn due to insufficient access rights Configure LDAP Replicator LDAP Replicators are configured in the following cases Operation e User data is replicated from the Master to the Standby Master The replicator is configured on the Standby Master Full Directory Replication Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 107 Installing and operating IPBS e Incase of one common IP DECT system with multiple IPBS masters on multiple locations the user data is replicated from one specific IPBS Master holding the LDAP database LDAP Server to the other IPBS Masters LDAP replicators The replicator is configured on these additional IPBS Masters Full Directory Replication Configure Full Directory Replication 1 Select LDAP gt Replicator 2 Mark the Enable check box 3 Enter the IP address to the LDAP server
450. te PCAP interface rpcap xxx xxx xxx xxx trace can be used in your wireshark tool to connect to the IP interface 498 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Remote LAN sniffer traces Figure 183 Remote LAN sniffer traces Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 499 Troubleshooting Avaya 3720 3725 DECT Telephones This section contains information on how to solve common operational problems and warnings you may receive Go through the following lists if you encounter any problems Fault Symptoms If any of the following Fault Symptoms occur follow the instructions below Fault Probable cause Action or comment The display stays dark There is no ring signal The Call list entries of the 3720 are deleted Low battery level or faulty telephone Sound off or Ring volume silent icon is on or faulty telephone The battery was changed Charge the battery If the telephone does not work after charging it is defective Press and hold the Mute key or increase volume Settings gt Sound amp Alerts gt Volume No fault Normal behaviour of 3720 after battery change Time stamp of Call log entries is wrong On DECT R4 systems Date and time info was not sent by IPBS On ADMM systems Date and time are not correctly set Switch telephone off and on again Set date time manually in menu Settings gt Time Date S
451. ted to the Device Manager Note It is recommended to open a web browser and enter the URL for example http myserver kathy_v1 5 7 bin Make sure that the web browser asks you to save or open the correct file Copy the URL and paste it in the Upgrade software dialogue 350 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager 7 Select software to be used in the upgrade in the Available software text box 8 Click OK The Upgrade software window closes 9 The software will be downloaded to the device For some device types a progress bar in the Status column for the device shows the progress of the download To cancel the upgrade click Cancel upgrade in the Device menu Alternatively right click on the device in the device list and select Cancel upgrade The device will restart automatically after a successful download and when the handset is idle Note The Handset will not restart if a missed call popup or a new message popup is active on the handset This is not considered as an idle state A switched off device is upgraded when restarted Telephones that are not in the coverage area will be upgraded when they come online It is not possible to upload phonebook language file and software to 3720 telephone while it is on a call Delete Parameter Definition Files In the File menu click File management The File management window opens Click on the Parameter definition tab Select the definitio
452. telephone will be customized for that PBX with menu options for PBX specific functions such as Callback Create a template To create a parameter template see chapter PDM Create a Parameter Template on page 280 or chapter AIWS Create a Parameter Template on page 329 Apply a template To apply a parameter template see Run a Template to Set Parameter Values on page 261 in chapter Installing and operating PDM or AIWS Run a Template to Set Parameter Values on page 335 Save a telephone configuration as a template You can save all settings of a telephone as template Please note that this does not include contacts and other personal data The template will only contain configuration data This template can be used as a backup if your want to restore the configuration of the telephone at a later stage or as a template that can be applied to a number of telephones Some parameters are user specific If it is decided to apply this type of template to several telephones the following parameters may be excluded e Owner ID A text string specified in the standby mode The parameter is located directly under Settings gt User ID e Phone lock PIN code The security code used to unlock the keypad The parameter is located under Settings gt Locks To save a telephone configuration as a template see chapter PDM Create a Parameter Template from a Number on page 281 or chapter AIWS Create a Parameter Template from a Number on pa
453. tenance Guide 05 2010 Telephone Configuration Audio adjustment It is possible to adjust the side tone level i e how much of the speakers voice that is fed back to the speaker The side tone level is set via PDM by adjusting the parameter Audio gt Normal gt Normal side tone adjustment The parameter affects the normal mode i e not wired headset not Bluetooth headset and not the handsfree loudspeaking mode For configuration of headset audio see Headset configuration on page 167 Note Changing this parameter may result in lower sound quality and high sound level Evaluate carefully before applying Headset configuration A headset is recommended if you frequently use the telephone and or want to have both hands free The headset comes in two versions microphone integrated in the cable and microphone on a boom In order to achieve optimal audio quality with the different headset types it is recommended to set the corresponding headset profile The default setting is microphone on a boom which means that the audio is optimized for using a headset with microphone on a boom The headset profile can be changed in the telephone menu or in a template Number via PDM AIWS in Connections gt Headset gt Headset type If the preconfigured headset profiles does not match the headset or the audio performance is bad it is possible to configure a headset profile In PDM AIWS this is done under Connections gt
454. ters is included but they are marked as comments to prevent the browser from interpreting them see figure 152 and figure 153 on page 396 The default user interface can be exchanged with one of the example user interfaces shown in figure 151 on page 394 by saving the html file as index html and replacing the existing index html file index4 is shown in figure 154 on page 398 Note Selecting a predefined message when using the index4 html interface will replace the already typed message in the message text Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 393 Installing and operating AIWS Figure 151 NetPage user interface examples index1 and index2 NetPage NetPage calliD calliD Message Message Beep code 2beeps Y Beep code 2beeps Y Priority Normal Status on last message Status on last message Note The JavaScript code in the HTML files is used for interpreting and displaying responses from the messaging system It is recommended that this code is used unmodified otherwise the Message history functionality may be lost Also the Java Applets must be left unchanged to preserve the functionality Note No server side scripts are allowed in the FTP area 394 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Language and User Interface Priority and Beep Codes in the default NetPage User Interface GUI Description Priority Code Low 9 Normal 7 High 3 Alarm 1
455. that use TCP IP Dual Tone Multiple Frequency Embedded LInux SErver A hardware platform used for AIW Frame Error Rate Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 519 FTP FTP GAP GoS GUI IPBS IPDI IPEI IPO ISDN JRE LAN LDAP Number NTP OAP File Transfer Protocol Generic Access Profile communication protocol standard within DECT that guarantees compatibility of systems and components Grade of Service Graphical User Interface Internet Protocol IP DECT Base Station The unique global GAP identity number for the DECT registration IPDI is exchanged between handsets during the Easy replacement procedure International Portable part Equipment Identity The unique global GAP identity number for the handset This code is needed for the system administrator to enable network subscription IP Office an Avaya PBX Integrated Services Digital Network Sun Java Runtime Environment Local Area Network a group of computers and associated devices that share a common communication line Lightweight Directory Access Protocol PDM AIS Settings for the complete set of parameters of a single device tied to a specific identity Network Time Protocol a standard for synchronization of clocks via packet based communication networks Open Access Protocol 520 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 OTA PBX PDM PKCS 12 PoE Portable
456. the fault log refer to Fault Log on page 371 1 2 Click Configuration on the start page Select Status gt Active Faults in the left menu on the AIWS Configuration page to open the page The following information is shown for each fault Time when the fault occurred Level of the fault Critical error Error Warning Description of the fault as defined in the module Type of module IP address and host name of the module that generated the fault By expanding the fault in the list additional information about the fault is shown containing Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 369 Installing and operating AIWS e Fault ID This is used to reference a persistent fault when it later is reset e Fault code e Description of the fault code e Extended address information showing the system bus type and module address In the figure below the system is 00 the bus type is 1 and the module address is OA Figure 131 The Active Faults page This page reflects the status at 2008 01 22 17 22 05 Update Page Active Faults Active Faults 1 8 Expand all entries Time Level Description Module Address 2008 01 11 17 57 03 Critical Supervision UPAC 172 20 10 95 X Lost connection to system 900 UPAC 95 E 2008 01 11 17 56 51 Warning Fault in module component UPAC 172 20 10 95 X Open Access App Specific UPAC 95 Persistent faults will remain in the list until the module sends a status message confi
457. the 1880 1900 MHz frequencies IPBS LA Latin America for use with DECT in the 1910 1930 MHz frequencies IPBS Brazil for use with DECT in the 1910 1920 MHz frequencies IPBS US North America for use with DECT in the 1920 1930 MHz frequencies Physical Dimensions x w x d Weight 165 x 200 x 56 mm including mounting bracket 450g Power Material ABS moulded plastic Colour Beige External connectors 2 x RJ45 Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af or local power supply Operating voltage 21 to 56 Vdc Power consumption typical 4W maximum 5W Network Ethernet 10 100baseT Voice over IP Voice over IP H 323 XMobile incl H 450 Voice Encoding G 711 A law p law 64kbps G 723 1 5 3 kbps G 729A and AB 16 kbps G 726 32 kbps 458 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 IP DECT Base Station IPBS Radio RF output power e r p EU Between 23 dBm and 28 dBm with internal antenna Between 20 dBm and 25 dBm with external antenna RF output power e r p US Between 17 dBm and 21 6 dBm with internal antenna Environmental Operating temperature 10 C to 55 C Storage temperature 40 C to 70 C Relative operating humidity 15 to 90 non condensing Relative storage humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Immunity to electromagnetic fields 3V m EN61000 4 3 Immunity
458. the AIWS Start page click Configuration The Configuration page opens 2 Inthe left pane select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page appears 3 Click Device Management The Device Handlers page appears Figure 135 The Device Handlers page Device Handlers Unite Addresses to device interfaces ES 127 0 0 1 DECT Previous 4 Enter Unite address to the interfaces that the devices are connected to Device Handling Configuration It is possible to set the types of devices that can login to AIWS This enables a possibility to for example enable portable devices log in to one device manager and to enable chargers to log in to another device manager 1 Login to AIWS 2 Click on Configuration Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 375 Installing and operating AIWS NE OD OMe OO In the left pane select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration Under DECT Interface select Device Handling Select the device type to enable disable login from Change Status to desired value Click Activate On line Status Report Time for chargers It is possible to set how often a device type must log in in order to be considered on line This is called On line Status Report Time To enable moving a charger without being logged out it is possible to set a Status Log Delay Time If the device has not logged in again within the On line Status Report Time the Status
459. the User Interface GUI 2 2 391 Password Protected Access to NetPage 400 Accessing NetPage from a Cordless Unit with WAP 400 Test the New User Interface lt lt 401 Update the User Interface after a new AIWS Release 401 Messaging Tool Configuration o ee 402 Messaging Tool Configuration 402 NetPage Configuration c vrea ren erir anaoa a 402 Predefined Groups e raiki ee 405 Predefined Messages 2 466424 0 eee da ed eee eee eee ee 406 Message History Status eee ee ee 407 Backup and Restore of NetPage files lt lt 408 Open Access Protocol QAP ocio coceccicioss eran naaa ee 410 CONRAN occse e di AAA e A ia oe te 410 TWOUBIGSNOOUNG carrera AAA AAA 411 Geng IATA es ac e AA A AA 412 12 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Contents Device Manager Keyboard Shortcuts 2 o e 415 GOT e a A O ik es he a Tae ir gg ae nck has Paar as A 415 a iG bp POSS SUS EWES OP Oe Ge Oe S 415 NUDOS 2k 4 kk oem AA Ee Re RES 415 WeMplQles 3 6 ew a dee as wwe Oo ee ee ee ee ee Sa dae a da So 416 Function Indicator and Error Relay Output 22 417 File ipese a sd A 69 GS SES OE EEE DE AAA HSE EELS 418 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware 421 INMIOACUGCHON
460. the changes take effect see Reset on page 135 en Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 117 Installing and operating IPBS Multiple Radio Configuration The PARI Master can configure the same Radio settings for all Radios in the system All settings configured in the Radio Config page replace the local Radio settings This means that all settings in the Radio Config menu will have presedence over values configured locally or received via DHCP options PARI Events and Alarms See Configure Logging on page 93 Update See Configure Automatic Firmware Update on page 91 Network Time See Configure the NTP Settings on page 92 Priority Diff Serv See Configure IP Settings on page 105 Port Ranges See Configure IP Settings on page 105 Select DECT gt Radio Config Configure alarm and event forwarding seeForward Alarms and Events on page 94 Configure automatic firmware update see Configure Automatic Firmware Update on page 91 Configure NTP settings see Configure the NTP Settings on page 92 Configure IP settings see Configure IP Settings on page 105 Click OK The PARI is a part of the IPBS broadcast identity which uniquely identifies an IPBS This PARI is automatically assigned to each IPBS in the system But if more than one Avaya IP DECT system operates within the same coverage area the systems need to have a unique system identity in the PARI assigned in order to differentiat
461. the essential requirements of the EU Directive 1999 5 EU Radio andTelekommunication Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Due to the differences of the individual public networks and network operators this compliance does not by itself give an unconditional assurance of successful operation at every network termination point For the time being we are not aware of any network on which the equipment will not work due to its design In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier or your Avaya service The conformity declaration can be accessed at the following Internet address www avaya de gCommunication Manager emea de includedcontent conformity htm or search the index using the key term Conformity CE FCC compliance statements for USA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is
462. the network connect each charger via USB to a PDM and configure a static IP address e Start AIWS e Place the telephone in a charger that is connected to AIWS Over the air OTA via IP DECT If OTA is configured in the IPBS the cordless telephones can be administered by the Device Manager without connecting to a charger There is no external equipment needed besides AIWS and IP DECT Please proceed with Installation of Telephones on page 147 146 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation of Telephones Installation of Telephones This section describes the recommended procedure for installing and configuring telephones There are several ways to install a telephone but the procedures described here guarantees simple maintenance of the system It is recommended to use the AIWS to install and maintain telephones in a large system The reason is that it enables to install upgrade and configure a large amount of telephones simultaneously Another benefit is that the collection of the telephones from the user is not needed They can be maintained while placed in network connected Advanced Chargers on the users desks Network connected Rackmount Chargers can also be used or over the air in the case of IP DECT The PDM enables administration of telephones inserted in a Advanced Charger or a Rackmount Charger connected via USB to the administrator s computer For AIWS see Installing and operating
463. this configuration one IP DECT interface on the AIWS is communication with multiple Master Base Stations on the same or different locations 1 2 3 4 On the AIWS Start page click Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard opens Click Next until you reach DECT IP Address Set multiple Locations former IP regions to yes Do not enter any IP address or remove the entries for the DECT IP Address and for the secondary DECT IP Address Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 355 Installing and operating AIWS Note Of course a multi AIWS configuration with splitting services of the AIWS to several Elise hardware units is supported in the same manner see Multiple AIWS configuration on page 296 DECT Interface settings The DECT Interface controls the messaging flow between the Cordless Telephone System and the AIWS services General Settings To find DECT General Settings do as follows 1 On the AIWS start page select Configuration The AIWS Configuration page opens 2 Select Other Settings gt Advanced Configuration The AIWS Advanced Configuration page opens 3 On the AIWS Advanced Configuration page select General Settings under DECT Interface e Call Diversion Display Text When this parameter is enabled the text specified is added to the display message when a Call diversion takes place The original Call ID can be included in the parameter text by writing a character where the Call ID shall be inse
464. tically sent to the device if it is connected 260 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Operation Run a Template to Set Parameter Values If a template has been created for a device type it can be used to set the parameter values for a range of devices or a single device The command to use is Run template 1 Select the Numbers tab The Numbers view appears 2 Select the Number or Numbers you wish to run the template on 3 Inthe Number menu click Run template Alternatively right click on the Number in the Number list and select Run template from the menu that appears The Run template window appears Figure 70 Selected template to run on one or several Numbers Run template Device type d62 Talker Parameter version 25 2 Name Device type Parameter version MyTalkerTemplate d62 Talker 25 2 i Cancel 4 Select a template from the Template list Note If multiple templates are selected only one of them will be executed 5 Click OK The Run template window closes If the parameters in the database have been edited but not yet sent to the device it is indicated with Not synched or Update queued This is not valid for devices that have not yet been logged in and associated for the first time Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 261 Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM If a Number has not been associated with the device it is
465. ting account row Enter a new user name Enter a new password Enter the password again Select Administrator for System Administrator or Auditor in the drop down list See Access Levels on page 76 for a description of access levels 4 Click OK The account row is updated Delete An Additional Account To delete an additional administrator account do the following 1 Login as system administrator see Login as System Administrator on page 78 80 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Configuration Select Configuration gt General gt Admin On the row to be deleted select the Delete check box Click OK The account row is deleted Managing User Administrators Create a User Administrator IPBS is not supplied with preinstalled user administration accounts Therefore the first user administration account must be created by a system administrator If additional user administration accounts are needed they must also be created by a system administrator 1 2 AN O On oe o po Login as System Administrator see Login as System Administrator on page 78 Select Administration gt Users Click on show The User Administration page see User Administration Page Sample on page 78 for a sample is displayed Click the new hyperlink A window is opened Select the User Administrator radio box The window layout transforms Enter a long name Enter a name Note This field i
466. tion Existing languages English Each language can be exported as an XML file To create a new language or update an existing click a language link above to download the file If a new language should be created change the language indication in the language tag Translate Update the text within translation and helptext tags and save the file Import the XML file Import language file Enable translation mode O Apply in Translation mode all text will be exchanged with the identification in the language file This can be used to identify where a text is displayed in the GUI 5 Click an existing language link to create or update languages An XML file is generated from the AIWS and a File download window opens 6 Save the file for translation or editing purposes The file can be saved in any name during the translation Translate Edit the Language In the downloaded language file there are numerous tags but changes should only be made in one tag attribute and two tags Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 387 Installing and operating AIWS e lt language id English gt The id attribute is the text that appears in the drop down list Change English to the name of your translated language here e lt translation gt Text displayed in menus on buttons tabs etc Translated text can be added inside the tags e lt helptext gt On line help text Translated text can b
467. tion Installation and Configuration The charger is delivered with pre installed software and it is possible to upgrade the charger software Please see Software Update on page 202 Advanced Charger Configuration Each Advanced Charger need access to DHCP to receive an IP address automatically If no DHCP is accessible it is possible to configure the IP address with PDM or AIWS If the Advanced Charger is configured to run DHCP connect the network cable and the charger will automatically receive an IP address If the charger is not configured to run DHCP the charger will use the setup IP addresses The following parameters exist for Advanced Charger and can be changed via PDM or AIWS Parameter Description Ethernet Bit rate auto default Ethernet connector auto default Ethernet duplex auto default DHCP Enabled Yes default No Charger IP address 192 168 0 101 default Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 default Default gateway IP address 192 168 0 1 default DNS IP address 192 168 0 2 default Charger IP port 12346 default Service Discovery Enabled Yes default No Service Discovery Domain Name of domain Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 199 Installing and operating the Advanced Charger DH IP address one DH only 192 168 0 3 default DH IP port 10147 default
468. tion other settings advanced configuration check all the settings and press the factory button if available to reset the setting to default Device management Phone book remote management remote connection open ports and serial port channels general settings IP Dect device handling portable devices desktop chargers advanced chargers message distribution Alarm Mobile Data Location and Availability info UNS operating mode User server logging status log system activity log advanced parameters service discovery Time settings Security web access password policy passwords needs to be changed reset manually sysadmin user password needs to be known Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 517 Troubleshooting e network e license A work around is to install the image again on the AIWS flash card see Replacement of the Compact Flash on page 449 This will clear all settings to default including the license key and network parameters Of course you should not restore a AIWS backup file afterwards What to consider when replacing a module Refer to Installing Elise2 Server General Information on page 425 and Installation on page 430 to find information about e Address e Jumpers e Switches e Cable connections e Battery Licences are defined in the Module key The type of information that is located on the Compact Flash is software configuration settings fault logs te
469. tion and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 69 Installing and operating IPBS Figure 18 Cables entering centrally from above Figure notes 1 Data cable 2 Power cable if used 2 Plug the modular jack of the data cable into one of the data power connectors 3 When an AC adapter is used e Plug the modular jack of the AC adapter in one of the data power connectors e Plug the AC adapter into a wall outlet Mount the Base Station 1 Hold the base station flat against the mounting bracket and move it downwards until it clicks see figure 19 70 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation of the Base Station Figure 19 Mounting the base station 017 Power the Base Station The base station is powered the following ways e Power over Ethernet only IPBS e Bya local power supply Note Do not power the base station using both power supplies Parallel powering will not harm the base station but it can disturb the signalling Power the IPBS over Ethernet The IPBS supports Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af class 2 The IPBS power consumption is maximum 5W But according to the PoE standard for class 2 the PoE power source will allocate 7W to the IPBS This must be regarded when planning the powering of the IPBSs so that the power limit of the PoE power source is not exceeded The PoE standard supports two ways of feeding the power 1 Power over the Rx Tx data pa
470. tion and Time Settings 446 Message Distribution lt lt 0 ica rear AR 447 Unite Name Server UNS o lt lt lt lt 00 lt xx lt lt 2 449 Maintenance Information ee ee ee ee 2 449 Replacement of the Compact Flash 449 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 13 Contents Updating Application Software Replacing an Image on the Compact Flash Installing an Image on an empty Compact Flash Updating the Software Licence Circuit Board Replacement 0 0002 eee LON Piggy Back Circuit Board LPB 2 TOCINA aos AAA AAA introduction po serere E AA AS ARANA A AAA IP DECT Base Station IPBS lt gt lt lt gt 0 05 ee ee Base Station RM627 BS330 lt lt Base Station RM637 BS340 lt lt Avaya 3725 DECT Telephone ee es Avaya 3720 DECT Telephone ee ee es Advanced NAGS a ee di a a a e A a ae AAA ERA Multiple Battery Charger lt R ckmou nt OELSE AA Portable Device Manager PDM lt lt ee Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS lt lt cc AAA ET ek ee ee Se e
471. tion of the alarm Performance It is possible to check different performance parameters For a description of the parameters see the table below Parameter Description CPU Shows CPU utilization CPU R Shows utilization of CPU resources allocated by different tasks MEM Shows memory utilization Concurrent calls Shows the number of ongoing calls 1 Select Diagnostics gt Performance Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 133 Installing and operating IPBS 2 Select the checkbox es for the desired performance statistics 3 Click OK One window shows statistics for the last 24 hours The maximum possible value is displayed in the top left corner Click the left or right arrow buttons to see different time frames Config Show Config Show displays the configuration as a text output Ping The ping function is used to determine the response time from the IPBS to a certain IP address It can be used to analyse the connection between the IP DECT system components 1 Select Diagnostics gt Ping 2 Enter an IP address in the IP Address text field 3 Press Enter on the keyboard Traceroute The traceroute function displays how packets travel from the IPBS to a certain IP address The result is an ordered list of IP addresses with the measured round trip time 1 Select Diagnostics gt Traceroute 2 Enter an IP address in the IP Address text field 3 Press Enter on the keyboard
472. tiple Battery Charger with IEC C14 connector and an extension cord with an IEC C13 connector Installation test 1 Connect the mains power supply cord to the wall socket Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 213 Installing Multiple Battery Charger 2 Place a battery in the charging slot 3 A yellow LED indicates that charging starts while a green LED indicates a fully charged battery Power supply by fixed connection Note If the rack charger shall be connected with a fixed connection the AC connection must be done by a authorized electrician Vy a AX Tip It is possible to use any one of the two AC terminal blocks for AC input Consequently the unused terminal block may be used to connect the next rack charger or battery pack charger The Power Supply module connects to 100 240VAC 0 7A 50 60 Hz When working with the units the mains power supply cable bmust always be disconnected The safety covers must be mounted on top of the power supply terminal blocks to prevent hazardous situations like electric chock Figure 43 Examples of how Multiple Battery Charger can be mounted and connected to a power source To disconnect device To disconnect device 009 Opening the top cover Open the top cover by first pressing on the sides of the top cover then lifting it upwards 214 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation and Configuration Figure 44 Op
473. to ESD 4 kV contact discharge and 8 kV air discharge EN61000 4 2 Compliance to European regulations and standards EU directives 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Radio EN 301406 TBR22 Safety EN 60950 1 EMC EN 301 489 6 Product marking CE EC Declaration of Conformity can be found at http Awww ascom com ws products_ws htm Compliance to US and Canadian regulations and standards Safety CSA UL 60950 1 EMC Radio FCC part 15 Class B and RSS 213 ans ICES 003 Product marking FCC ID BXZIPBS1 1C 3724B IPBS1 Compliance to Australian regulations and standards Radio ACA TS028 Safety IEC 60950 3Ed Product marking A Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 459 Technical Data Base Station RM627 BS330 Physical Dimension 200 w x 165 d x 56 h mm Weight 470g Material ABS moulded plastic Colour light grey Connectors two RJ45 connectors for Upn power one RJ12 connector for factory testing purposes Environmental Operating temperature 10 C to 55 C Storage temperature 40 C to 70 C Relative operating humidity 15 to 90 non condensing Relative storage humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Enclosure protection IP20 IEC EN60529 Functional Operating voltage 21 to 56 Vdc Power consumption between 1 2 W and 2 0 W depending on the number of ca
474. together with the area covered by each base station After this the planned positions can be verified with the site survey tool and with help of the traffic requirements a final plan can be made Note Since coverage for air sync and speech differs two average cell sizes need to be determined one for the speech coverage and one for the air sync coverage For information on how to use the site survey tool please refer to the appropriate user s guide The principle of a site survey is as follows Observe the Building to Find a Typical Area Modern buildings usually have standard constructions In older buildings due to renovations or expansions areas with different structures may exist However inside these areas a uniformity in structure can be found again Find an area with a typical structure for the building and of about the expected cell size This area will be used to determine the typical cell size When having a building with different structures do so for each of those areas so that differences in typical cell size can be detected Figure 10 Measurement of typical cell size Le 40 metres gt 1 40 metres 2 20 metres 3 20 metres _ Base station of site survey tool Measure the horizontal cell size on the middle floor see 1 in figure 10 The cell size can be determined as follows 1 Install the site survey base station in the middle of the typical area Avaya DECT R4 Installation an
475. tory use the protective packaging as described e Never underestimate the damaging power ESD can have and be especially careful when temperatures are below freezing point and during very warm weather in combination with low humidity Make sure that the environmental conditions remain within the limits specified in the components data sheets A Important In the interest of quality and reliability system boards and other parts returned for exchange or credit may be refused if the proper protective packaging is omitted Safety Aspects IP DECT Base Station The IP DECT Base Station meets the valid editions of safety standard EN IEC CSA UL AU NZS 60950 1 The system is a class II equipment for stationary wall mounting Regulatory Compliance Statements EU EFTA only Permission and Conformity We Avaya GmbH amp Co KG declare that the product line Avaya IP DECT concurs with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of EU Directive 1999 5 EU concerning radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and themutual recognition of their conformity Intended use This equipment is intended for connection to radio interfaces DECT of Avaya PABX systems It is compliant with the essential requirements of the EU Directive 1999 5 EU Radio andTelekommunication Terminal Equipment R amp TTE 58 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Safety Instructions Due to the differences of the indi
476. trator To login as a system administrator 1 Follow Access the GUI on page 73 and access the device using a web browser 2 Click the link labelled System Administration A login window is opened Enter user name and password for a system administrator Click OK to login Click on the Admin tab The Administration page is displayed See the figure below for a sample 78 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Configuration Figure 22 System Administrator Admin Page Info Admin Update NTP Logging HTTP HTTP Client SNMP Certificates admin Admin Device Name TechDoc User Name ladmin o Password Sea ee ROR F Confirm Password eeeeceee Additional Administrator and Viewer Accounts User Name Password Confirm Password admin sorosoro 00000000 Administrator v auditori levccccce PEPA i Auditor vl Administrator v This page is used for the following tasks e Managing the default System Administrator account see Admin Section on page 79 e Managing additional System Administrator accounts see Additional Administrator Accounts on page 80 Admin Section The Admin section the upper part of the page displays the default System Administrator account This account can be modified see the following section but cannot be deleted Modify Admin Account 1 Login as system administrator see Login as System Administrator on page 78 2 Select Configuration gt General gt A
477. ts e 48 character name e 24 digit work number e 24 digit mobile phone number e 24 digit other numbers Telephony Indication 14 ring signals flashing LED and vibrator Answer call options Button press or auto answer Call list storage capacity 25 received dialled and missed calls with time stamp Radio Automatic DECT protocol detection Automatic detection and configuration for US DECT and EU DECT at first registration Frequency range e EU e US e LA e BR 1880 1900 MHz 1920 1930 MHz 1910 1930 MHz 1910 1920 MHz Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 471 Technical Data Modulation GFSK Channel spacing 1 728 MHz Antenna Integral Sensitivity 93 dBm Radiated power EU 250 mW US 100 mW Environmental Operating temperature 0 C to 40 C Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C Enclosure protection IP40 IEC EN60529 Immunity to electromagnetic fields 3 V m EN61000 4 3 Immunity to ESD 4 kV contact discharge and 8 kV air discharge EN61000 4 2 Free fall test standard product IEC 60068 2 32 procedure 1 dropped 12 times from 1 metre Accessories Leather case Hinge type clip Basic charger Advanced Charger Rackmount Charger Telephone lanyard Avaya In Building Wireless Server AIWS e Portable Device Manager PDM 1 Note that storing Li lon batteries at h
478. ts etc Always mount a base station at least 30 Communication Manager away from a metal wall to avoid a substantial impedance change for the antennas Always try to place the base station in a way that it can see as much as possible of the area to be covered Locate the base stations such that it can see as much as possible of the area to be covered or such that there are as few obstacles as possible between the base station and the area to be covered Place the base station strategically for example do not place the base station on a large concrete pillar in the middle of a hall since this will result in bad coverage behind the pillar To achieve outdoor coverage mount a base station on a wall containing a window Place the base station with its antennas in front of the window or in a way that the base station can see as much as possible of the outdoor area Base stations should not be placed near the outer walls of the building as this reduces the effective covered area except of course when outdoors coverage is desired Always keep the necessary traffic capacity in mind during the site survey How many people there are in a particular department how often people call on average and how long people call on average A standard rule of thumb for this ratio is one base station for 27 people If you are dealing with for example a purchase department the ratio will quickly change Talk this over with the client If you need to
479. ts in the database and an attempt is made to import a definition file with the same parameter version and with a ower revision the file will not be imported If a definition file for a certain device type already exists in the database and a new definition file with the same parameter version and with a higher revision is imported the old file will be replaced with the imported file For each update of a parameter definition file the revision is increased An update does not necessarily affect the parameter version The following columns are displayed e Device type the device model e Revision the revision number of the definition file Used to determine which definition file is the most recent e Parameter version shows the version of the parameters in the definition file Used to determine compatibility with device software e File the name of the imported definition file 344 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Figure 119 File management window Parameter definitions tab Y File handling Parameter definition Software Language Device type Revision Parameter version File Desktop Charger Adva 3 01 2 0 pdm_DC4_p2 0_d3 01 Import new Software for Devices Updated software files are distributed by your supplier Note Software files bin may be included in package files pkg In the File menu click File management The File management wi
480. ts the ciphertext back into plaintext Public key algoritms use paired keys one for encryption and another for decryption Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 61 Installing and operating IPBS Authentication Authentication is the verification of a message s sender This requires the message to be protected so it cannot be altered usually by generating a digital signature formed by a hash of the message Only the correct key can generate a valid signature Introduction to IP Security in IP DECT A secure system requires more planning than an unsecured system Secure Web Access https For IP DECT devices e https access should be enabled e http access should preferably be disabled For more information see Configure the HTTP settings on page 95 TLS Certificates Security in Web based applications rely on cryptography Cryptographical systems are only as secure as their keys This makes Key Management a critical and often neglected concern TLS Certificates have emerged as a clever way of managing large scale key distribution Certificate Handling Options There are three certificate handling options 1 Default Device certificate The default certificate is supplied with the device It is is a self signed certificate Self signed certificates provide only encryption not authentication For more information see Default Device Certificate on page 99 2 Self signed certificates This option is for
481. ttings Contacts On DTMF Off My Favourites Entries in the My Favorites can be used similar as the Call Service menu They can be configured by the user itself Additionally it is possible to configure a short cut to open the My Favorites menu or to assign a My Favorites entry directly to a short cut The settings in the My Favorites are system dependent 162 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Telephone Configuration Figure 34 Examples for My Favourites My Favourites Name value i Name Call forwarding 2 Type Phone Call Number 025005 4 Prefix o 5 6 7 3 9 10 Own Line Settings Use the Own Line Settings when you want to use the same phonebook in different systems and in different countries The own line settings enables e Calling numbers stored with a sign for the international access code The same phonebook can be used in different countries e Recognizing incoming internal or external calls as numbers stored on international format in the phonebook The same phonebook can be used in different systems In order for this feature to work numbers must be stored in the phonebook in international format with a sign for the international access code Also the Own Line parameters must be configured with the PDM AIWS For instructions see Installing and operating the Portable Device Manager PDM on page 239 or Installing and operating AIWS on page 289
482. uction date until March 2010 g QD ID B014317 For models since production date April 2010 g QD ID B016451 EMC Radio RSS 213 and RSS 210 Bluetooth ICES 03 SAR Specific Absorption Rate IEEE Std C95 3 Normal operation 0 104 W kg 1 gram Body worn operation 0 029 W kg 1 gram Safety CSA 60950 1 Hearing aid CS 03 Compliance to Australian regulation s and standards Product marking For models production date until March 2010 AO QD ID B014317 For models since production date April 2010 A Y QD ID B016451 Radio 468 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and EN301406 Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Avaya 3725 DECT Telephone Bluetooth EN 300 328 2 EN 301489 17 AUS NZS 4771 SAR Specific Absorption Rate EN 50360 and EN62209 1 0 074 W kg 10 gram Safety AUS NZS 60950 1 EMC EN301489 6 EN 301 489 1 DECT AS ACIF 5004 TS028 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 469 Technical Data Avaya 3720 DECT Telephone Physical Dimension x w x d 133 x 53 x 24 mm Weight 115 g battery and clip included Material Case PC ABS Key pad Silicone Clip PC Colour Grey Display w x h 28 x 35 mm FSTN B W Clip Hinge type standard or swivel type Battery and charging Type 600 mAh Li lon Speech time 16 h during optimal condition Stan
483. unication on the A B bus follow instructions in Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware controlling the Communication on the A B bus on page 433 430 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Installation Mount Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on the wall follow instructions in Mounting on page 435 and Mounting Together with Other Units on page 435 Set the system bus address follow instructions in System 900 Addressing on page 436 Connect the system bus follow instructions in Connection of System Bus on page 437 and Connection of Supply Voltage on page 439 Optionally connect outputs and inputs described in Additional Connections on page 439 8 Activate the battery follow instructions in Activation of Battery on page 442 10 11 12 13 Perform a network parameter setup of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware follow instructions in Setup of Network Parameters on page 444 Connect Ethernet connector to the Local Area Network follow instructions in Connection of Ethernet on page 443 Perform a test of the installation follow the instructions in Installation Test Procedure on page 445 Continue with additional parameter setup for the unit according to chapter and respective software application documentation Make a backup copy of all parameters Opening the Housing Use a screwdriver or similar to release the cover by applying a light pressure to the two snap catches 1
484. unications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense For a Class B digital device or peripheral Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no quarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and reveiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the reveiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Equipment With Direct Inward Dialing DID Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not prov
485. up of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is done with a web browser Figure 162 The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware al 001 Supply voltage 12 24 V DC 10 Current consumption max 0 4 Aat 12 V max 0 2 A at 24 V Delivery includes Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware System Bus Cabling Ethernet cable Tools etc required Screwdriver Cutting pliers Screws for installation Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 421 Installing Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Multimeter Power supply PC with Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 or later Software Route to ELISE Available from the distributor FCC Compliance Statements for Class A Digital Device This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense EU Compliance Statements for Class A Device This
486. upt for example if firmware download is interrupted the IPBS could become unreachable by the web GUI It will not be possible to load new firmware or to start correctly If this occurs the IPBS runs on the bootcode and the Gwload tool a tftp style client used to repair a broken firmware can be used to upload firmware 1 Download the Gwload software from the IP DECT system provider 2 Set the IPBS in TFTP mode by performing a medium 3 sec hardware reset see Reset Using the Reset Button on page 136 3 Start a command window To update with new firmware execute the following command from the folder where the gwload exe file is located IPBS gwload setip i lt ipaddress gt gwtype 1201 prot lt path firmwarefilename gt go 4 If there is more than one IPBS in TFTP mode select the unit to update and press enter Issues by using VLANs for connecting IPBS to the network In an IP DECT system all IPBS using the same Master need to be in the same VLAN and need to use the same VLAN ID Check for LAN gt VLAN configuration in the IPBS web interface The switches the IPBS are connected to need to have the VLAN tagging mode enabled e g dot1q for the used ports Roaming between different IPBS masters of same IP DECT system not working The coverage areas of the IPBS masters must not overlap Otherwise roaming will not work properly Due to the effects of overlap the handset may sometimes not receive SMS Also over t
487. uration page click on Configuration on the AIWS start page Figure 97 AIWS Configuration page a Module Information Y Phonebook Host Name Elise Status IP Address 10 30 4 25 Y Other Settings MAC Address 00 01 3e 00 a8 ae Module Key 00043182 Licence Number 31D6801540032200 Software Version B4 2 40 OS Version 9 02 Number of Active Faults 0 With system administrator or administrator rights you will be able to access the complete AIWS configuration page from the Configuration and Phonebook buttons on the start page On the Configuration page system information is shown for example Host Name IP Address MAC Address Module Key Licence Number Software Version OS Version Number of Active Faults 308 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 AIWS General Icons On the AIWS pages the following icons might be shown Click on this icon to return to the A WS start page Fi Click on this icon to return to the AIWS Configuration top page s Click on this icon to create a shortcut in your Internet Browser Certificates Certificates are used to increase security by encryption A self signed digital certificate is created during the first start up of AIWS This certificate is issued to the MAC address of the module Except for the certificate created during start up it is possible to import a certificate or to create one in the AIWS Import certificates It is possible to import ce
488. uthenticate to the LDAP server in the Authentication Method drop down list Note If the authentication method SASL DIGEST MD5 is selected the IP address for primary DNS server must be entered in the DNS server field on the Network setup page Otherwise it is not possible to authenticate with the LDAP directory Microsoft Active Directory 2003 8 Enter the user name used for logging on to the LDAP server in the User name field It is a good idea to create a new user in the domain with access for the LDAP server Enter the password used for logging on to the LDAP server in the Password field 10 Enter the user entries parent DN in the Search Base DN field The distinguished name for all users common entry 11 Enter the name of the attribute that holds the phone numbers in the Number attribute field 362 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 12 Select the appropriate option in the Type of Name Attribute s drop down list Basic Configuration The option depends on if the name is stored in a single attribute or if it is splitted into two different attributes 13 Enter name s of the attribute s containing first name and family name in the Name Attribute s field If two attributes are used enter the first name on the first line and the family name on the second line 14 Enter an error message to be sent as an answer to a phonebook query that was unsuccessful due to no answer from the server in the
489. vate UE 2 Enter the IP address of the module with the IP DECT system connected Set messaging handler to DGH 3 Click Activate Alias Call ID Alias can be used when there are numbers that do not belong to the default category 1 To set Alias Call ID click Alias Call ID The UNS Alias Call ID page appears Figure 139 The UNS Alias Call ID page UNS Alias Call ID Alias Call ID 999999 ES EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY 999999 is a preset alias used for phonebook queies It shall normally not be changed 2 Click one of the links The UNS Alias Call ID configuration page appears 378 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Basic Configuration Figure 140 The UNS Alias Call ID configuration page UNS Alias Call ID configuration Alias Call ID EJ Myalias Previous _ UNITE Address 1234 192 168 0 1 DECT CTA cancel 3 Enter settings for UNS Alias Call ID In this example a message that is addressed to MyAlias will be sent to the handset with telephone number 1234 in the IP DECT system that is connected to the AIWS with the address 192 168 0 1 4 Click Activate Logging Status information can be stored locally but can also be sent to a central log The System Activity Log can store activities such as messages alarms faults input output activities etc Activity logging is useful for troubleshooting An ESS i
490. vaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Configuration User e Add update and remove users User User Administrator Administration Administrators on S page 77 System e Write access to all device System System Administrator parameter settings for example IP Administration Administrators on Ss addresses software upgrades page 78 e Assign and modify access to other System Administrator and User Administrator account settings e Add update and remove users 1 Different users should use the hyperlink related to their access level The system does not allow login by a link not related to the user s access level Auditors Auditors have read access to device parameter settings but are not authorized to update those settings Auditors are also allowed to generate Service Reports Administration gt Diagnostics gt Service Reports The login steps for an auditor follow the steps of a normal system administrator login See System Administrators on page 78 for more information User Administrators IPBS is not supplied with preinstalled user administration accounts Therefore the first user administration account must be created by a system administrator see System Administrators on page 78 If additional user administration accounts are needed they must also be created by a system administrator Refer to Managing User Administrators on page 81 for more information User administrat
491. vaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 General Information 1 Fail safe mode is indicated even if SW3 pin 2 is not set to ON if the application on Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is not completely installed or when the application part of the Compact Flash is erased 2 When Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is in Network setup mode this will always be indicated and override LED indications of other simultaneously activated modes for example Image installation mode 3 Starting up mode is indicated during start of applications or if an application has lost connection to a required resource for example A bus or connected IPBS Master or NTP server Administration and Authentication Administration on Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is done from a web browser In order to access the administration pages a user name and password have to be given A Important The default passwords have to be changed else anyone with knowledge of a password and the IP address can access the administration web pages and make changes Authentication There are two different users in all Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware products admin and sysadmin The user admin has the default password changeme and is used for administration and simple troubleshooting of the product The admin has permission to change all passwords except the sysadmin password The user sysadmin has the default password setmeup and is used for advanced troubleshooting
492. vaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 83 Installing and operating IPBS 15 16 17 18 Enter system name and password this should be the same system name and password as in the Master See Change System Name and Password on page 110 Enter Primary Master IP Address Set the mode to Standby Master see Select Mode on page 113 Configure the Master ID see Configure Master ID on page 114 Select PBX see Configure IP PBX on page 114 Enter Master IP address see Enter IP Address to the Pari Master on page 117 Select supplementary services see Configure Supplementary Services on page 113 Assign PARI see PARI on page 118 Configure air synchronization see Configure Air Synchronization on page 119 Enter AIWS IP address see Configure Messaging on page 122 Device Management on page 123 and Configure the Location on page 123 Enter the Time Server address see Configure the NTP Settings on page 92 Configure the LDAP replicator enter the IP address user name and password to the LDAP server Write access is required for the Standby Master replication New users in the IP DECT system need to be created on the IPBS Master holding the database even if the LDAP write is configured for the Standby Master Alternative LDAP server must not be entered Check the Enable check box see Configure LDAP Replicator on page 107 Enter AIWS IP address see Configure Messaging on page 122 D
493. vice type list Select the parameter version in the Parameter version list All parameters except Number specific parameters will be set to their default values 5 Select which template to run on the Number This is optional at this stage and therefore None can be selected Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 333 Installing and operating AIWS 6 If you want to create a single Number select the Single option and enter the call number in the Call number text box It is recommended to use the telephone extension of the handset as the number in the AIWS Note The prefix is not used in an Avaya system 7 If you want to add a range of Numbers select the Range option Enter the start call number in the Start call no text box and the end call number in the End call no text box Note The maximum range that can be added at a time is 100 Numbers 8 Click OK The dialogue closes and the new Numbers show up the list in the Numbers view Parameter Transfer between a Device and the Device Manager When a device is connected it is synchronized with the associated Number in the Device Manager see Synchronize a Device on page 339 Note When parameters have been edited and the device is synchronized only the edited parameters will be sent to the device Edit Parameters The Edit Parameters popup window shows the set of parameters relevant to the Number that is being edited The parameter groups are organi
494. vidual public networks and network operators this compliance does not by itself give an unconditional assurance of successful operation at every network termination point For the time being we are not aware of any network on which the equipment will not work due to its design In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier or your Avaya service The conformity declaration can be accessed at the following Internet address www avaya de gCommunication Manager emea de includedcontent conformity htm or search the index using the key term Conformity CE Regulatory Compliance Statements USA and Canada only FCC complience statements The equipment have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation The equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installtion If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorien
495. visable to consider this before carrying out the measurement but the fact remains that you must always carry out a measurement to ensure the best possible operation 48 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Location of the Base Stations Base Station Planning Tips All information needed to do a solid base station planning are given in section Client s Requirements on page 34 to Location of the Base Stations on page 47 Below is a list of the most important issues Always involve the client in the site survey Ensure that the client shares the responsibility for the decision on the siting of base stations Also always involve the client in problems which you encounter a difficult area to cover and ensure that the client is not faced with surprises afterwards Discuss with the client whether the base stations are to be installed visibly or out of sight If the client wants the base stations not to be visible the possibility of installing the base stations with antennas pointing out of the ceiling should be considered This is done to prevent a base station from being obstructed by ventilation ducts metal panels on the ceiling or other obstacles If this is not acceptable ensure that the base station is placed in a way that disruption by the obstacles above the ceiling or behind walls is minimized Pay particular attention to the non standard areas such as toilet rooms stairwells lifts maintenance shaf
496. ware e Compact Flash image update or installation The system page can also be used when configuring network parameters Installation Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware should be placed in a dry environment with a temperature range of 0 to 40 C The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware can be connected via system bus cabling or via twisted pairs together with other units in the System 900 The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware s can communicate with each other via the TCP IP network A Important The Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware must be mounted in a vertical position to ensure sufficient cooling for the electrical components A Important Always follow the instructions in Power Down and Restart of Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware on page 425 when disconnecting the power to the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware Note Only install one Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware at a time otherwise problems might occur during IP addressing Installation Procedure 1 Read chapters 4 1 and 4 2 before starting the installation 2 At delivery Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is configured for system communication on the A bus If modular system bus cabling is used and the B bus shall be used for system communication follow the instructions in Selection of A or B bus on page 432 3 At delivery the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware is configured to be connected to a Central Unit on the A B bus If the Elise 2 Server AIWS Hardware should control the comm
497. will be fully operational with the exception of https not working and the certificate tab pane not being visible Certificate Signing Request CSR This section corresponds to option 3A amp 3B in TLS Certificates on page 62 This will be the most common options for IP DECT systems For more information on CSRs see Certificate Authorities on page 61 1 Select Configuration gt General gt Certificates 2 Click the Create New hyperlink in the Device Certificate section A window will open http fipbs 00 e7 57 X509 mod_cmd xml cmd EBR Create new Type Signing request Mi Key 1024 bit Validity year s Common Name Organizational Unit Organization Locality State or Province Country 3 Inthe window select Signing Request in the Type drop down list 4 Select Enter the following settings Field name Description e Validity This is an read only information field indicating a default mandatory validity of 1 year The time length of the validity is defined by the CA e Key Select the desired key strength 1024 bit 2048 bit 4096 bit or select to reuse the old key pair this is not recommended e Common Name Enter the domain name or IP address for the device This is the same value as entered in the web browser when accessing the device Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 101 Installing and operating IPBS Click OK The windows closes
498. y and the identity of the owner The CA asserts that the public key belongs to the owner so that users and relying parties can trust the information in the certificate Certificate Signing Request CSR or Certification Request is a message that is generated and sent to a CA in order to apply for a TLS certificate Before the CSR is created a key pair is generated the private key kept secret The CSR will contain the corresponding public key and information identifying the applicant such as distinguished name The private key is not part of the CSR but is used to digitally sign the entire request Other credentials may accompany the CSR If the request is successful the CA will send back an identity certificate that has been digitally signed with the CA s private key A CSR is valid for the server where the certificate will be installed Cryptography Cryptography is the encoding of messages to render them unreadable by anyone other than their intended recipient s Modern cryptography uses complex algorithms implemented on modern computer systems Cryptography tasks can be divided into the two general categories Encryption and Authenitication Encryption Encryption is the scrambling of information so that the original message cannot be determined by unauthorized recipients by applying an encryption algoritm to the message plaintext producing ciphertext appearently random bits A decryption algoritm if given the correct key conver
499. zed in a tree structure in the left pane with the parameters in the current node in the right pane The parameter list has one column with the parameter name and another column gives the parameter value This can be for example a numerical value a boolean value or text Clicking in the column will give a short description of the selected parameter 1 Select the Numbers tab The Number view appears 2 Select the Number The selected row is highlighted 3 Click Edit in the Number menu Alternatively right click and choose Edit or double click on the Number The Edit Parameters for lt Number gt window opens where lt Number gt is the ID of the current Number Select parameter in the left pane Make your changes on the Value row When a parameter has been edited the name of the node to which the parameter belongs changes to a blue colour Click Cancel if you want to undo all parameters edited since your last save and return to the main window 6 Click OK to save your changes 334 Avaya DECT R4 Installation and Maintenance Guide 05 2010 Device Manager Note If the Handset is used on an Integral system only the sound and alert settings for Vibrating alert on off key sound click tone silent ring type normal short silent will be valid Other settings are ignored This is also valid when configuring profiles Figure 114 Editing parameters in AIWS GUI Edit parameters for 809 Devic

Avaya DECT R4 - Avaya Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents